Instruction Manual

CNC SYSTEM
OSP-P300S/P300M
SPECIAL FUNCTION FOR MU-1000V SERIES (MU-4000V/5000V/6300V/8000V)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
(1st Edition)
Pub No. 6467-E (ME61-528-R1) Apr. 2015
6467-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-
free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.
1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.
 Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this
could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
 If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is
no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large
amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).
(2) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.
 Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.
 Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.
 Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.
 The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C (41 to
104°F).
 The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is relative humidity 50%
or less at 40°C (104°F) (no condensation).
 The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).
2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,
chips, and dust.
(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.
(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.
6467-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.
(2) Use tools whose dimensions and types are appropriate for the work undertaken and the
machine specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.
(3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.
(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.
(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.
(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always
stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.
(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the
machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.
(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.
(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.
(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.
(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.
4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that
a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to
danger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.
(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.
(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause
misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips
further in.
(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.
5. On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.
(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.
(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.
(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.
6467-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.
(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.
(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need
to be taken.
(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.
(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.
(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.
(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.
(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.
(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.
(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure
a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.
b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may be some residual charge
in the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are
permitted to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following
precautions.
 MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.
c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory
is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are
handled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service
personnel should handle these boards.
6467-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure
a. Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive
temperature rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit.
Inspect the following points every three months.
 Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.
 Is the external air inlet blocked?

If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.
7. General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.
(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.
(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine
operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.
(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct
procedure before operating the machine.
(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.
(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-
voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.
(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
6467-E P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8. Symbols Used in This Manual

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of
particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
6467-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system is an expandable CNC
with various features. Major features of the CNC system are described below.
(1) NC operation panels

The following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.
 Color CRT operation panels
 Thin color operation panels (horizontal)
 Thin color operation panels (vertical)

One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.
(2) Machining management functions

These functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from
small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control
functions are described below.
a. Reduction of setup time

With increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. The
simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup,
such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling
drawings and further reduce the setup time.
b. Production Status Monitor

The progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNC
system.
c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

Correct information is quickly available for troubleshooting.
(3) Help functions

When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.
This helps take quick action against the alarm.
To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instruction
manual before use.
Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.
Screens
Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the
screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown
in this manual.
6467-E P-(i)
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 ROBOT/LOADER INTERFACE TYPES
SECTION 2 CHUCK (JIG) CONTROL
SECTION 3 WORK SIT CONFIRMATION
SECTION 4 OPERATION DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SPEC
SECTION 5 AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SHUTTER ON MACHINE SIDE
SECTION 6 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC
SECTION 7 BLUEBE ECOBOOSTER EP SERIES
SECTION 8 MATRIX MAGAZINE
SECTION 9 ECOSAVER MADE BY KURODA PRECISION
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L

WITH THE MULTI-PALLET APC
SECTION 11 AIR TURBINE SPINDLE FUNCTION
SECTION 12 MATRIX MAGAZINE TOOL-ID FUNCTION
SECTION 13 LHL GREASE LUBRICATION SYSTEM MADE BY LUBE
SECTION 15 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT SPECIFICATION WITH KOSELL

FILTER MADE BY OGURA CLUTCH
SECTION 16 2ND AIR BLOW
SECTION 17 2ND COOLANT

6467-E P-(ii)
CONTENTS
SECTION 18 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC SUPPORTING FMS
SECTION 19 MU-6300V/6300V-L STACKER CRANE INTERFACE
This instruction manual consists of several specifications for peripheral devices

and systems including those not selected by some users.
For details of each specification, refer to the corresponding materials such as the
final specification.
6467-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 ROBOT/LOADER INTERFACE TYPES ................................................1
1-1. Robot/loader Interface Types ............................................................................................ 1
1-2. Automatic Mode................................................................................................................. 1
1-3. NC Operation Interlock ...................................................................................................... 1
1-4. List of Input and Output Signals ........................................................................................ 3
1-4-1. Inputs from the Robot/loader to the NC............................................................... 3
1-4-2. Outputs from the NC to the Robot/loader............................................................ 4
1-5. Description of Signals ........................................................................................................ 5
1-5-1. Robot/loader Interface Type B ............................................................................ 5
1-5-2. Robot/loader Interface Type C .......................................................................... 16
1-6. Interlock ........................................................................................................................... 26
1-6-1. Axis Interlock ..................................................................................................... 26
1-6-2. APC Interlock .................................................................................................... 26
1-7. Work Condition Display Function .................................................................................... 27
1-8. Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 28
1-9. Automatic Power Shutdown ............................................................................................ 29
1-9-1. Effective Conditions........................................................................................... 29
1-9-2. Description of the Function................................................................................ 30
1-9-3. Parameters........................................................................................................ 31
1-10. Input/Output Bit................................................................................................................ 32
SECTION 2 CHUCK (JIG) CONTROL ....................................................................36

2-1. No. 1 Chuck (Jig) ............................................................................................................. 36
2-1-1. Clamping Modes ............................................................................................... 36
2-1-2. Chuck clamp/unclamp commands .................................................................... 36
2-1-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp sequences..................................................................... 39
2-1-4. "Chuck Open/Closed" limit switches ................................................................. 40
2-1-5. Work clamp/unclamp timers .............................................................................. 41
2-1-6. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 42
2-1-7. Interlocking ........................................................................................................ 43
2-1-8. Special conditions ............................................................................................. 44
2-1-9. Status indicators................................................................................................ 44
2-2. No. 2 Chuck ..................................................................................................................... 45
2-2-1. Clamping Modes ............................................................................................... 45
2-2-2. Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp commands ................................................................ 45
2-2-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp operations ..................................................................... 47
2-2-4. Chuck 2 Open/Close confirmation limit switches .............................................. 48
2-2-5. Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp confirmation timer ..................................................... 49
2-2-6. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 50
2-2-7. Interlock............................................................................................................. 51
6467-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-2-9. Status indicator.................................................................................................. 52
2-3. No.3 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 53
2-3-1. Clamping Modes ............................................................................................... 53
2-3-2. Chuck 3 Clamp/Unclamp commands ................................................................ 53
2-3-6. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 58
2-3-7. Interlock............................................................................................................. 59
2-4. No.4 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 61
2-4-1. Chuck 4 clamp/unclamp commands ................................................................. 61
2-4-5. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 65
2-4-6. Interlock............................................................................................................. 66
2-5. No.5 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 68
2-5-5. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 72
2-5-6. Interlock............................................................................................................. 73
2-6. No.6 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 74
2-6-4. Chuck 6 open/close confirmation limit switches ................................................ 77
2-6-5. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 78
2-6-6. Interlock............................................................................................................. 79
2-7. No.7 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 80
2-7-4. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 83
6467-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-8. No.8 Chuck ...................................................................................................................... 85
2-8-1. Chuck 8 clamp/unclamp command ................................................................... 85
2-8-4. Timing chart....................................................................................................... 88
2-9. Chuck (jig) pressure switching......................................................................................... 90
2-9-1. No. 1 chuck (jig) ................................................................................................ 90
2-9-2. No.2 Chuck (Jig)................................................................................................ 96
2-9-3. No. 3 Chuck (Jig)............................................................................................. 102
2-10. Chuck air blow control ................................................................................................... 108
2-10-1. Chuck air blow commands .............................................................................. 108
2-10-2. Special cases .................................................................................................. 108
2-11. Input/Output Signal Name ............................................................................................. 109
SECTION 3 WORK SIT CONFIRMATION ............................................................113

3-1. Work Sit Condition Monitor ............................................................................................ 113
3-1-1. M Codes .......................................................................................................... 113
3-1-2. Entering the sit condition monitoring mode ..................................................... 113
3-1-3. Continuous monitoring in work sit condition monitoring mode ........................ 114
3-1-4. Exiting the sit condition monitoring mode........................................................ 115
3-1-5. Linking the seating air blow ............................................................................. 116
3-1-6. Protection against air outlet clogging matter ................................................... 116
3-1-7. Sit condition confirmation timer ....................................................................... 117
3-1-8. Robot/loader interface ..................................................................................... 117
3-1-9. Seating Error LED ........................................................................................... 118
3-1-10. Seating Alarm Reset button ............................................................................ 118
3-1-11. Normally Seated LED...................................................................................... 118
3-2. No. 2 Work Sit Condition Monitor .................................................................................. 119
3-2-1. M Codes .......................................................................................................... 119
3-2-2. Sit condition monitoring mode ON................................................................... 119
3-2-3. Constant monitoring in work sit condition monitoring mode ............................ 120
3-2-4. Sit condition monitoring mode OFF................................................................. 120
3-2-5. Link of workpiece seating air blow................................................................... 121
3-2-6. Preventing clogging at air outlet ...................................................................... 121
3-2-9. Workpiece seating error 2 LED ....................................................................... 123
3-2-10. Seating error reset button................................................................................ 123
3-2-11. Workpiece seating normal 2 LED.................................................................... 123
3-3. No.3 Work Sit Condition Monitor ................................................................................... 124
3-3-1. M codes........................................................................................................... 124
6467-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3-4. No.4 Work Sit Condition Monitor ................................................................................... 129
3-4-1. M codes........................................................................................................... 129
3-5. Input/Output Signal ........................................................................................................ 134
SECTION 4 OPERATION DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SPEC............................136

4-1. Automatic Operation Door Functions ............................................................................ 136
4-1-1. Contents of Functions ..................................................................................... 136
4-1-2. Timing chart..................................................................................................... 139
4-1-3. Door status monitoring .................................................................................... 140
4-1-4. Notes ............................................................................................................... 140
4-2. Operation door closing operation with both hands ........................................................ 141
4-2-1. Linking the dual-palm starting and operation door closing sequences
.............. 141
4-2-2. Operation door closing operation with both hands .......................................... 144
4-2-3. Ineffective M code commands......................................................................... 145
4-3. Prevention of entanglement by automatic operation door ............................................. 145
4-3-1. Content of sequence ....................................................................................... 145
4-4. Input/output signals ....................................................................................................... 146
SECTION 5 AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SHUTTER ON MACHINE SIDE.....................147

5-1. Contents of Functions.................................................................................................... 147
5-1-1. Shutter open/close operation with pushbutton commands.............................. 147
5-1-2. Shutter open/close operation by M commands ............................................... 148
5-1-3. Shutter open/close operation by robot/loader ................................................. 149
5-2. Shutter open/close monitor............................................................................................ 150
6467-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5-3. Precautions.................................................................................................................... 150

5-4. Input/Output Signals ...................................................................................................... 150
SECTION 6 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC .................................................151

6-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 151
6-2. Pallet Change Command .............................................................................................. 152
6-2-1. APC Screen..................................................................................................... 152
6-2-2. APC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode................................................. 153
6-2-3. APC Command in Manual Operation Mode .................................................... 154
6-3. APC manual operation panel......................................................................................... 156
6-4. APC Sequence .............................................................................................................. 158
6-5. Restoration Operations.................................................................................................. 162
6-6. Diagnosis Message ....................................................................................................... 163
6-6-1. Machine Diagnosis Message List.................................................................... 163
6-7. Pallet Judgment Function .............................................................................................. 166
6-7-1. System variable for pallet judgment ................................................................ 166
6-7-2. Pallet judgment command............................................................................... 166
6-7-3. Pallet A/B mode parameter ............................................................................. 167
6-8. APC Shutter................................................................................................................... 168
6-8-1. Splash Guard Open/Close Command by M Command .................................. 168
6-8-2. Alarm ............................................................................................................... 168
6-8-3. Reciprocal Interlock Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter Open .................... 169
6-9. Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 170
6-9-1. Interlock for X/Y/Z/A/C Axes............................................................................ 170
6-9-2. Manual Feed Operation Interlock .................................................................... 170
6-9-3. Coolant Interlock ............................................................................................. 170
6-10. Pallet Seating Retry ....................................................................................................... 171
6-11. Pallet Seating Monitoring............................................................................................... 172
6-12. Maintenance Screen...................................................................................................... 173
6-13. Parameter ...................................................................................................................... 175
6-13-1. Machine Axis Parameter ................................................................................. 175
6-13-2. Machine System Parameter (machine axis positioning point)......................... 176
6-14. Special Operations ........................................................................................................ 178
6-14-1. Special Operations with Carrier ST and Rotation Axis (PA-axis) .................... 178
6-14-2. Special Operations with Carrier ST and Travel Axis (PL-axis)........................ 179
6-14-3. Override during APC Sequences .................................................................... 180
6-15. Input/Output Bit.............................................................................................................. 181
6-16. Logic Table .................................................................................................................... 183
6-16-1. APC System Condition Code Table ................................................................ 183
6-16-2. APC Input Logic 1/4 ........................................................................................ 185
6-16-3. APC Input Logic 2/4 ........................................................................................ 186
6-16-4. APC Input Logic 3/4 ........................................................................................ 187
6-16-5. APC Input Logic 4/4 ........................................................................................ 188
6467-E P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6-16-6. APC Output Logic 1/4...................................................................................... 189

6-16-7. APC Output Logic 2/4...................................................................................... 190
6-16-8. APC Output Logic 3/4...................................................................................... 191
6-16-9. APC Output Logic 4/4...................................................................................... 192
6-16-10. APC Manual Interlock 1/4................................................................................ 193
SECTION 7 BLUEBE ECOBOOSTER EP SERIES ..............................................197

7-1. Semi-Dry Coolant .......................................................................................................... 197
7-1-1. Related Commands......................................................................................... 197
7-1-2. M Code Command and RT Command in the Same Block.............................. 197
7-1-3. Manual Operation............................................................................................ 199
7-1-4. ALL COOLANT OFF ....................................................................................... 199
7-1-5. Linkage with Chip Conveyor............................................................................ 200
7-1-6. Semi-Dry Unit Low Level Alarm ...................................................................... 200
SECTION 8 MATRIX MAGAZINE .........................................................................201

8-1. OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................... 201
8-2. TOOL CHANGE COMMAND......................................................................................... 202
8-2-1. ATC OPERATION Screen............................................................................... 202
8-2-2. ATC Commands in AUTO / MDI Operation Mode........................................... 204
8-2-3. ATC Commands in Manual Operation Mode .................................................. 209
8-2-4. Next Tool Command in Manual Operation Mode ............................................ 212
8-3. TOOL DATA SETTING.................................................................................................. 214
8-3-1. Registering Tool Numbers............................................................................... 214
8-3-2. Registering Tool Presence .............................................................................. 216
8-4. CALLING / STORING TOOLS IN MAGAZINE TOOL RACK......................................... 218
8-4-1. Magazine Manual Operation Panel ................................................................. 218
8-4-2. Storing Tools in Magazine Tool Rack.............................................................. 221
8-4-3. Calling Tools from Magazine Tool Rack.......................................................... 223
8-4-4. Errors during Magazine Manual Operation ..................................................... 224
8-4-5. Stopping Magazine Sequence ........................................................................ 225
8-4-6. Restoring after Magazine Sequence Stoppage............................................... 225
8-5. PARAMETER SETTING................................................................................................ 226
8-5-2. Matrix Magazine Positioning Data 1................................................................ 227
8-5-4. Machine Axis Positioning Point MC................................................................. 232
8-5-5. Change Arm Control Parameter...................................................................... 233
8-6. MAINTENANCE SCREEN............................................................................................. 235
8-6-1. ATC Maintenance............................................................................................ 235
8-6-2. Matrix Magazine Maintenance Parameter....................................................... 239
6467-E P-(vii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8-7. Maintenance Function ................................................................................................... 241

8-7-1. Feeding Tool Transfer Pot Using Pulse Generator ......................................... 241
8-7-2. Override during ATC Cycle ............................................................................. 242
8-7-3. Tool transfer pot override ................................................................................ 243
8-7-4. Magazine tool existence confirmation interlock ineffective.............................. 244
8-8. DIAGNOSIS MESSAGES ............................................................................................. 245
8-9. Input/output Signal......................................................................................................... 250
8-9-1. Input ................................................................................................................ 250
8-9-2. Output.............................................................................................................. 250
8-10. LOGIC TABLES............................................................................................................. 251
8-10-1. ATC System Condition Code Table ................................................................ 251
8-10-2. Logic Table...................................................................................................... 253
SECTION 9 ECOSAVER MADE BY KURODA PRECISION ................................273

9-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 273
9-2. Command ...................................................................................................................... 273
9-2-1. M code............................................................................................................. 273
9-2-2. Manual operation SW...................................................................................... 275
9-3. Semi-dry unit oil level normal signal .............................................................................. 278
9-4. Output OFF.................................................................................................................... 279
9-5. Chip conveyor in link operation ..................................................................................... 279
9-6. Door interlock in PL specification .................................................................................. 280
9-7. Simultaneous discharge port by thru-spindle and external nozzle ................................ 280
9-7-1. Effective condition ........................................................................................... 280
9-7-2. Specification detail .......................................................................................... 280
9-8. All coolant OFF .............................................................................................................. 282
9-8-1. Specification details......................................................................................... 282
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L

WITH THE MULTI-PALLET APC .......................................................284
10-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 284
10-2. APC Sequence .............................................................................................................. 285
10-3. APC Screen ................................................................................................................... 292
10-4-1. Restoration by APC screen ............................................................................. 294
10-4-2. Restoration by touch panel screen.................................................................. 295
10-5. Diagnosis Messages ..................................................................................................... 298
10-6. PPC Error ...................................................................................................................... 301
10-7. Machine System Parameter (machine axis position)..................................................... 302
10-8-1. Special operations with carrier station and rotation axis (PA-axis) ................. 304
6467-E P-(viii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10-8-2. Special operations with carrier station and travel axis (PL-axis) ..................... 305
10-8-3. Special operations on the touch panel screen ................................................ 306
10-9. PPC operation panel ..................................................................................................... 307
10-9-1. Setup ST clamp/unclamp switch ..................................................................... 307
10-9-2. Setup ST clamp LED....................................................................................... 307
10-10. Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 308
10-14. Logic Table .................................................................................................................... 315
10-14-1. APC system condition decision code table ..................................................... 315
10-14-2. Manual Interlock .............................................................................................. 317
10-14-3. Input Logic....................................................................................................... 323
10-14-4. Output Logic .................................................................................................... 329
SECTION 11 AIR TURBINE SPINDLE FUNCTION................................................333

11-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 333
11-2. Air Turbine Spindle Rotation/Stop Command................................................................ 333
11-2-1. Manual command............................................................................................ 333
11-2-2. M command..................................................................................................... 334
11-3. Special Cases................................................................................................................ 334
11-4. Tool Kind ....................................................................................................................... 335
11-5. Operation door lock, magazine door lock ...................................................................... 335
11-5-1. Operation door lock with air turbine spindle .................................................... 335
11-5-2. Magazine door lock by air turbine spindle ....................................................... 335
11-6. Status indicator lamp ..................................................................................................... 335
11-6-1. HL during air turbine spindle rotation .............................................................. 335
11-6-2. Operation door lock HL during air turbine spindle rotation .............................. 336
11-6-3. Magazine door lock HL during air turbine spindle rotation .............................. 336
SECTION 12 MATRIX MAGAZINE TOOL-ID FUNCTION ......................................337

12-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 337
12-2. Tool Change Command ................................................................................................ 338
12-2-1. ATC OPERATION screen ............................................................................... 338
12-2-2. ATC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode ................................................. 340
12-2-3. ATC Commands in Manual Operation Mode .................................................. 345
12-2-4. Next Tool Command in Manual Operation Mode ............................................ 347
12-3. Tool Data Setting ........................................................................................................... 349
12-3-1. Registering Tool Numbers............................................................................... 349
6467-E P-(ix)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12-3-2. Registering Tool Presence .............................................................................. 349

12-4. Tool Storage, Store and Recovery in Magazine Tool Rack........................................... 351
12-4-1. Magazine Manual Operation Panel ................................................................. 351
12-4-2. TOOL STORAGE /TOOL STORE/TOOL RENEW in Magazine Tool
Rack ................................................................................................................ 355
12-4-3. TOOL RECOVERY from Magazine Tool Rack ............................................... 357
12-4-4. Errors during Magazine Manual Operation ..................................................... 358
12-4-5. Stopping Magazine Sequence ........................................................................ 359
12-4-6. Restoring after Magazine Sequence Stoppage............................................... 359
12-5. Parameter Setting.......................................................................................................... 360
12-5-4. Machine Axis Positioning Point MC................................................................. 366
12-5-5. Change Arm Control Parameter...................................................................... 367
12-6-1. ATC Maintenance............................................................................................ 373
12-6-2. TOOL-ID Maintenance .................................................................................... 377
12-6-3. Matrix Magazine Maintenance Parameter....................................................... 379
12-7. Maintenance Function ................................................................................................... 381
12-7-1. Tool Tranfer Pot Override................................................................................ 381
12-7-2. Disabling Magazine Tool Exist Confirmation Interlock .................................... 382
12-7-3. Feeding Tool Transfer Pot Using Pulse Handle .............................................. 383
12-7-4. Override during ATC Cycle ............................................................................. 384
12-9-1. Input ................................................................................................................ 390
12-9-2. Output.............................................................................................................. 390
12-10. Logic Tables .................................................................................................................. 391
12-10-1. ATC System Condition Code Table ................................................................ 391
12-10-2. Input Logic 1/8................................................................................................. 393
12-10-3. Input Logic 2/8................................................................................................. 394
12-10-4. Input Logic 3/8................................................................................................. 395
12-10-5. Input Logic 4/8................................................................................................. 396
12-10-6. Input Logic 5/8................................................................................................. 397
12-10-7. Input Logic 6/8................................................................................................. 398
12-10-8. Input Logic 7/8................................................................................................. 399
12-10-9. Input Logic 8/8................................................................................................. 400
12-10-10. Output Logic 1/6 .............................................................................................. 401
12-10-11. Output Logic 2/6 .............................................................................................. 402
12-10-12. Output Logic 3/6 .............................................................................................. 403
12-10-13. Output Logic 4/6 .............................................................................................. 404
12-10-14. Output Logic 5/6 .............................................................................................. 405
12-10-15. Output Logic 6/6 .............................................................................................. 406
6467-E P-(x)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12-10-16. Manual Interlock 1/8 ........................................................................................ 407

SECTION 13 LHL GREASE LUBRICATION SYSTEM MADE BY LUBE................415

13-1. Turning on grease supply pump .................................................................................... 415
13-2. Behavior of grease supply pump ................................................................................... 416
13-3. Alarm with grease automatic oil supply pump ............................................................... 416
13-3-1. Abnormal pressure rise ................................................................................... 416
13-3-2. Abnormal pressure release ............................................................................. 417
13-3-3. Abnormal pump pressure rise ......................................................................... 417
13-3-4. Pump abnormality ........................................................................................... 418
13-3-5. Low oil level detection ..................................................................................... 418
13-4. Status indicator .............................................................................................................. 418
SECTION 14 MU-5000V/5000V-L 2-PALLET APC .................................................420

14-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 420
14-2-1. APC Screen..................................................................................................... 421
14-3. APC Manual Operation Panel ....................................................................................... 425
14-4. APC Sequence .............................................................................................................. 427
14-7. Pallet Judgment Function .............................................................................................. 436
14-7-1. System Variable for Pallet Judgment .............................................................. 436
14-7-2. Pallet Judgment Command ............................................................................. 436
14-7-3. Pallet A/B Mode Parameter............................................................................. 437
14-8. APC Shutter................................................................................................................... 438
14-8-2. Alarm ............................................................................................................... 438
14-8-3. Reciprocal Interlock between Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter
Open................................................................................................................ 439
14-8-4. Reciprocal Interlock between ATC Shutter and APC Shutter ......................... 439
14-9. Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 440
6467-E P-(xi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

14-12. Collision Detection with Carrier ST Fork........................................................................ 442
14-14. Parameter ...................................................................................................................... 446
14-16. Input/Output Bit.............................................................................................................. 452
14-17. Logic Table .................................................................................................................... 455
14-17-2. APC Input Logic 1/4 ........................................................................................ 457
14-17-3. APC Input Logic 2/4 ........................................................................................ 458
14-17-4. APC Input Logic 3/4 ........................................................................................ 459
14-17-5. APC Input Logic 4/4 ........................................................................................ 460
14-17-6. APC Output Logic 1/4...................................................................................... 461
14-17-7. APC Output Logic 2/4...................................................................................... 462
14-17-8. APC Output Logic 3/4...................................................................................... 463
14-17-9. APC Output Logic 4/4...................................................................................... 464
SECTION 15 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT SPECIFICATION WITH

KOSELL FILTER MADE BY OGURA CLUTCH ................................469
15-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 469
15-2. Specification Details ...................................................................................................... 470
15-2-1. Thru-coolant suction OK.................................................................................. 470
15-2-2. Thru-coolant suction pump command ............................................................. 470
15-2-3. Seven levels of thru-coolant discharge pressure ............................................ 471
15-2-4. Alarm by low oil level....................................................................................... 474
15-2-5. Suction pump abnormal behavior.................................................................... 475
15-2-6. Prefilter clogging detection .............................................................................. 475
15-2-7. Coolant in normal condition............................................................................. 475
6467-E P-(xii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 16 2ND AIR BLOW.................................................................................477

16-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 477
16-1-1. Pushbutton ...................................................................................................... 477
16-1-2. M code............................................................................................................. 477
16-1-3. ALL COOLANT OFF button ............................................................................ 478
SECTION 17 2ND COOLANT .................................................................................479

17-1. Command ...................................................................................................................... 479
17-1-1. Pushbutton ...................................................................................................... 479
17-1-2. M code............................................................................................................. 479
17-2. 2nd coolant OFF ............................................................................................................ 480
17-3. ALL COOLANT OFF button........................................................................................... 480
17-4. Door interlock ................................................................................................................ 481
17-5. Alarm ............................................................................................................................. 481
17-5-1. Motor overload ................................................................................................ 481
17-5-2. Low oil level..................................................................................................... 481
SECTION 18 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC SUPPORTING FMS ................482

18-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 482
18-2-1. APC Screen..................................................................................................... 483
18-3. APC Sequence .............................................................................................................. 487
18-6. APC Shutter................................................................................................................... 494
18-6-2. Alarm ............................................................................................................... 494
18-6-3. Reciprocal Interlock Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter Open .................... 495
18-7. Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 496
18-7-4. Stacker Crane Interlock................................................................................... 496
18-7-5. Unloading Pallet Presence Interlock ............................................................... 497
6467-E P-(xiii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
18-11. Parameter ...................................................................................................................... 502

18-13. Input/Output Bit.............................................................................................................. 508
18-14. Logic Table .................................................................................................................... 509
18-14-2. APC Input Logic 1/2 ........................................................................................ 510
18-14-3. APC Input Logic 2/2 ........................................................................................ 511
18-14-4. APC Output Logic 1/4...................................................................................... 512
18-14-5. APC Output Logic 2/4...................................................................................... 513
18-14-6. APC Output Logic 3/4...................................................................................... 514
18-14-7. APC Output Logic 4/4...................................................................................... 515
SECTION 19 MU-6300V/6300V-L STACKER CRANE INTERFACE ......................520

19-1. Link mode ...................................................................................................................... 520
19-2. Description of Input/Output Signals ............................................................................... 520
19-2-1. Input/Output Signal Table................................................................................ 520
19-2-2. Workpiece Preparation Completion................................................................. 523
19-3. Automatic power shutdown function .............................................................................. 524
19-3-1. Automatic Power Shutdown Effective Condition ............................................. 524
19-3-2. Execution of Automatic Power Shutdown ....................................................... 524
19-3-3. Other Conditions ............................................................................................. 525
19-3-4. Parameter........................................................................................................ 525
6467-E P-1
1-1. Robot/loader Interface Types

(1) Robot/loader interface type B
This is an NC-mastered system that controls the robot/loader operations according to
commands from the NC.
(2) Robot/loader interface type C

This is a robot/loader-mastered system that controls the NC according to commands from the
robot/loader.
(3) Robot/loader interface type D

The robot/loader interface type D is designed to enable switching between the type B and the
type C.
MC user parameter No. 21 Robot/loader interface type
1 Selects the robot/loader interface type B.
Not checked .... Robot/loader interface type C
Checked .... Robot/loader interface type B
1-2. Automatic Mode

"NC automatic mode" output is turned ON while the "system link switch" is kept ON in automatic
operation mode. The mode when "NC automatic mode" is ON is called "automatic mode.
1-3. NC Operation Interlock

When the robot/loader interface type C is selected, the operations listed below, which impede the
robot sequence, will be disabled when the "system link switch" is turned ON.
This function is not provided with the robot/loader interface type B.
(1) When the robot/loader interface type C is selected, the following operations will be disabled
when the "system link switch" is turned ON:
 Program selection
 Schedule program selection
 Pointer movements by moving the cursor on the program screen
 Sequence stop
 Program number search
 Schedule program number search
 Return search
 New schedule program registration

6467-E P-2
(2) NC start pushbutton invalid

When the robot/loader interface type C is selected, the start pushbutton is invalid with the
"system link mode" ON except for restarting after stops by single block ON, program stop or
slide hold.
The following alarm will be displayed when the NC start pushbutton on the panel is pressed
although it is ineffective:
"4720 Alarm D NC START ineffective 11"
6467-E P-3
1-4. List of Input and Output Signals
1-4-1. Inputs from the Robot/loader to the NC
ME61528R0100300040001
6467-E P-4
1-4-2. Outputs from the NC to the Robot/loader
ME61528R0100300050001
6467-E P-5
1-5. Description of Signals
1-5-1. Robot/loader Interface Type B
Inputs from the Robot/loader to the NC (Type B)
Signal name Description Signal level

Robot/loader abnormal Either of the following alarms occurs when the
(iRTER_b) "system link switch" is turned ON and this signal is
turned OFF.
The alarm level is changeable with the
appropriate parameter.
"8. Robot alarm is made alarm-C." of MC user

parameter ROBOT/LOADER I/F ME61528R0100300060001
"Not checked": "1709 Alarm A Outside"

"Checked": "3718 Alarm C Outside"
However, this signal will not be monitored during

warm-up program start wait or during NC
operation by warm-up program start.
6467-E P-6

Robot/loader at retract The NC start pushbutton on the panel and the
position "cycle start" command become ineffective when
(iRTRF_b) the "system link switch" is turned ON and this
signal is turned OFF.
The following alarm occurs when the NC start

pushbutton on the panel is pressed or the "cycle
start" signal is turned ON although NC start is
ineffective.
ME61528R0100300060002
The alarm remains displayed while the NC start
pushbutton on the panel is held down or the "cycle
start" signal is kept ON.
However, the above interlock becomes ineffective

when "2. Cycle start: STANDBY POS. I/L is made
ineffective" of MC user parameter ROBOT/
LOADER I/F is set to "Checked."
When "system link ON iSYLK" is ON and this

signal is OFF, axis travel operation is banned on
the machine without APC, and APC operation is
banned on the machine with APC.
However, this interlock is ignored when "Checked"
is set at "3. Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is
made ineffective" of the machine user parameter
ROBOT LOADER I/F.
For detail, refer to "1-6. Interlock".

signal is OFF, the door open/close command is
disabled.
is set at "4. Door move: STANDBY POS. I/L is
ROBOT LOADER I/F.
6467-E P-7

No material/full-work The operation end lamp lights while the "system
(iMTNO) link switch" is kept ON, the operation end lamp is
effective (described below), and this signal is kept
ON.
MC user parameter
"Not checked" is set at INDICATING LAMP (8.
Operation end lamp is made effect):
Operation end lamp is ineffective. ME61528R0100300060003
"Checked" is set at INDICATING LAMP (8.
Operation end lamp is made effect):
Operation end lamp is effective.
"5. Operation end lamp does not light on by M02/

M30" MC user parameter of ROBOT/LOADER I/F
"Not checked":
The standard operation end lamp function also
becomes effective.
"Checked":
The standard operation end lamp function
becomes ineffective when the "system link switch"
is turned ON.
Preparation work The "exchange pallet (work) command" is turned See the left figure.
completed OFF and work preparation is completed when this
(iWSFN) signal is turned ON.
Note: The work preparation completed status will
be retained even if the NC is reset or the power is
turned ON or OFF.
[Time chart]
ME61528R0100300060004
Cycle stop request The NC stops the ongoing cycle when this signal
(iCYSP) is turned OFF in "automatic mode."
ME61528R0100300060005
Robot automatic mode Request 1, 2, 3 or 4 becomes effective when this

(iRTGR) signal is turned ON in "automatic mode."
If M311, M312, M313 or M314 is issued when this
signal is OFF, nothing will take place, and an
answer will be given back immediately.
ME61528R0100300060006
6467-E P-8

Request answer The request output signal (request 1, 2, 3 or 4) is
(iRQAS) turned OFF when this signal is turned ON in
"automatic mode."
Turn OFF this signal when the request output

ME61528R0100300060007
Automatic power The power will be shut down automatically when

shutdown completed this signal is turned ON with the "automatic power
(iPOFC) shutdown command" output to the robot/loader in
"automatic mode."
For further information, see "SECTION 1, 1-9.

Automatic Power Shutdown".
ME61528R0100300060008
Door open command On the machine without APC, the operation door
(iDROC) opens with this signal ON. This signal, however,
becomes ineffective under the following
conditions:
 No link mode is established.
 The signal "Robot/loader retract position
iRTRF" is OFF. ME61528R0100300060009
(The robot/loader interface is ineffective when

"Checked" is set at the parameter "4. DOOR
MOVE: STANDBY POS. I/L IS MADE
INEFFECTIVE" in the MC USER
PARAMETER, ROBOT-LOADER I/F).
The APC door is opened when this signal is

turned to ON with the machine with APC.
However, this signal becomes ineffective under
the following conditions:
 APC is during APC cycle or is not located at
the start position.
 "Robot /loader retract position iRTRF_b" is
OFF
(The robot /loader retract position interlock is
ignored when "Checked" is set at "4. Door
move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made
ineffective" of the machine user parameter
ROBOT LOADER I/F.)
6467-E P-9

On the machine having the automatic open/close
shutter on the machine side, the automatic open/
close shutter on the machine side opens with this
signal ON. However, the signal becomes
ineffective under the following conditions:
 The operation door is not closed.
iRTRF" is OFF.

INEFFECTIVE" in the MC USER PARAMETER,
ROBOT-LOADER I/F).
Door close command On the machine without APC, the operation door
(iDRCS) closes with this signal ON. This signal, however,
conditions:
ME61528R0100300060010
iRTRF" is OFF.
the start position.
OFF
ROBOT LOADER I/F.)
6467-E P-10

On the machine having the automatic open/close
shutter on the machine side, the automatic open/
close shutter on the machine side closes with this
signal ON. However, the signal becomes
ineffective under the following conditions:
 The operation door is not closed.
iRTRF" is OFF.

INEFFECTIVE" in the MC USER PARAMETER,
ROBOT-LOADER I/F).
Robot home position When this signal is turned is turned ON while any
command of the requests 1, 2, 3, and 4 is being output, the
(iRTHP) robot is positioned at home position 8.
ME61528R0100300060011
6467-E P-11
Outputs from the NC to the Robot/loader (Type B)

NC system link mode This signal is turned ON when the following
(oNCGR) conditions are met:
 Automatic operation mode
 "System link switch" ON
However, this signal will not be turned ON during

operation by warm-up program start. ME61528R0100300070001
NC run This signal remains ON during NC operation.

(oNRUN)
ME61528R0100300070002
A-pallet is outside of M/ This signal comes ON when all the following APC sequence No.
C conditions are met:
(oPLTA)
 Pallet B mode is ON.
 Pallet A mode is ON when "Checked" is set at
"B pallet in M/C side, when APC Seq. No.1"
ME61528R0100300070003
of the machine user parameter CHUCK, SIT
CONFIRMATION, TAILSOTCK.
B-pallet is outside of M/ This signal comes ON when all the following APC sequence No.
(oPLTB)
 Pallet A mode is ON.
 Pallet B mode is ON when "Checked" is set at
"B pallet in M/C side, when APC Seq. No.1" ME61528R0100300070004
Exchange pallet (work) This signal is turned ON upon completion of the See the time chart shown on
command M60 command operation in automatic mode. the left.
(oPCRQ) This signal is turned OFF with the "preparation
work completed" signal turned ON.
This signal will be retained even if the NC is reset

or the power is turned ON or OFF.
[Time chart]
ME61528R0100300070005
6467-E P-12

NC alarm This signal is usually OFF, but will be turned ON An alarm (A, B or C)
(oNALM) when an alarm (A, B or C) occurs. NC reset will
turned OFF the signal again.
The signal will be reversed into a B contact by
hardware.
ME61528R0100300070006
Cycle stop request This signal is turned ON in one of the following

(oCYSP) cases. The signal is turned OFF in other cases:
 When the count of the NC work counter is full.
 When the tool can no longer serve.
 When the "no material/full-work" signal is
turned ON with the "system link switch" ME61528R0100300070007
turned ON.
Whenever "Checked" is set at the MC user

parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F "10. Cycle stop
request signal is B contact", this signal is turned
ON. However, it will be turned OFF in one of the
above cases. (B contact output)
ME61528R0100300070008
Request 1 This signal is turned ON with the M311 command

(M311) when the "robot automatic mode" signal is turned
oREQ1 ON in "automatic mode."
An answer will be given back with the request
answer signal turned ON, and this signal will be
turned OFF.
ME61528R0100300070009
Request 2 Same as request 1, except that the M command is

(M312) M312.
oREQ2
ME61528R0100300070010

(M313) M313.
oREQ3
ME61528R0100300070011
6467-E P-13

(M314) M314.
oREQ4
ME61528R0100300070012
Automatic power This signal is turned ON after the time set by “6.
shutdown command Power shutdown time” of MC user parameter
oPOFO POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN passes away if all of
the following conditions are met when the
automatic power shutdown effective parameter
(“3. ‘Automatic Power Shutdown’ is made
effective” of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/
SHUTDOWN) or automatic power shutdown ON/
OFF switch is turned ON in "automatic mode": ME61528R0100300070013
 Single block OFF in automatic operation

mode
 During existence of the machining cycle
completed signal or alarm A, B or C
When "Automatic power shutdown MC alone" (“9.

Automatic power shutdown MC alone” of MC user
parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F) is "Checked",
this signal will not be output, and the power to the
machine will be shut down.
Machine zero position This signal is turned ON when the following
(oRTHP) conditions are met.
 Machine is positioned at home position 8.
However, this signal output is not ON or OFF
with HP8 completion during the tool change
command (M06). ME61528R0100300070018
 When the operator door automatic open/

close function is provided, "door open
confirmation oDROP" is ON.
6467-E P-14
The conditions for outputting the operation door open/close confirmation signals vary with the
specifications as described below:
a. With the operation door auto open/close spec

For details regarding the operation door auto open/close spec, refer to "Section 4 OPERATION
DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SPEC".
Operation door open This signal comes ON when the following
(oDROP) conditions are met:
 Operation door open output ON
 Operation door open confirmation ON
 Operation door close confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300070014
Operation door close This signal comes ON when the following

(oDRCP) conditions are met:
 Operation door close output ON
 Operation door close confirmation ON
 Operation door open confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300070015
b. With the auto open/close shutter on the machine side

Side door open This signal comes ON when the following
confirmation conditions are being met (AND):
(oDROP)
 Machine side door open SOL (oCDRO): ON
 Machine side LS (iCDOP): ON
 Machine side door close LS (iCDCL): OFF
Side door close This signal comes ON when the following
confirmation conditions are met (AND):
(oDRCP)
 Machine side door close SOL (oCDRC): ON ME61528R0100300070016
 Machine side door close LS (iCDCL): ON

 Machine side door open LS (iCDOP): OFF
6467-E P-15
c. With the work set ST auto door spec

APC door open This signal comes ON when the following
 APC door open output ON
 APC door open confirmation ON
 APC door close confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300070019
APC door close This signal comes ON when the following

 APC door close output ON
 APC door close confirmation ON
 APC door open confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300070020
6467-E P-16
1-5-2. Robot/loader Interface Type C
Inputs from the Robot/loader to the NC (Type C)

Robot/loader abnormal Either of the following alarms occurs when the
(iRTER_b) "system link switch" is turned ON and this signal is
turned OFF. The alarm level is changeable with
the appropriate parameter.
"8. Robot alarm is made alarm C." of MC user

parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F
"Not checked": "1709 Alarm A Outside" ME61528R0100300080001
"Checked": "3718 Alarm C Outside"
However, this signal will not be monitored during

operation by warm-up program start.
Robot/loader at retract The NC start pushbutton on the panel and the
position "cycle start" command become ineffective when
(iRTRF_b) the "system link switch" is turned ON and this
The following alarm occurs when the NC start

pushbutton on the panel is pressed or the "cycle
start" signal is turned ON although NC start is
ineffective.
ME61528R0100300080002
The alarm remains displayed while the NC start
pushbutton on the panel is held down or the "cycle
start" signal is kept ON.
However, the above interlock becomes ineffective

when "2. Cycle start: STANDBY POS. I/L is made
ineffective" of MC user parameter ROBOT
LOADER I/F is "Checked".

signal is OFF, axis travel operation is banned on
the machine without APC, and APC operation is
banned on the machine with APC.
is set at "3. Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is
ROBOT LOADER I/F.
For detail, refer to "1-6. Interlock".

signal is OFF, the door open/close command is
disabled.
is set at "4. Door move: STANDBY POS. I/L is
ROBOT LOADER I/F.
6467-E P-17

Automatic power The power is automatically shut down after the
shutdown command time set by "6. Automatic power shutdown timer"
(iPWOF) of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/
SHUTDOWN passes away if all of the following
conditions are met when this signal is turned ON
in "automatic mode":
 Single block OFF in automatic operation
mode
 During existence of the machining cycle ME61528R0100300080003
completed signal or alarm A, B or C
This signal is not affected by the automatic power

shutdown effective switch ("3. 'Automatic Power
Shutdown' is made effective" of MC user
parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) or
automatic power shutdown ON/OFF switch.
When "6. Automatic Power shutdown switch is
made effective" of MC user parameter ROBOT
LOADER I/F is "Checked", this function becomes
effective only when the automatic power
shutdown effective switch ("3. 'Automatic Power
Shutdown' is made effective" of MC user
parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) is set to
"Checked" or the automatic power shutdown ON/
OFF switch is set to automatic power shutdown
ON.
When "4. Alarm is added as a requirement for
Shutdown" of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/
SHUTDOWN is "Not checked", the occurrence of
an alarm A or B is not included in the automatic
power shutdown conditions.
6467-E P-18

No material/full-work The operation end lamp lights while the "system
(iMTNO) link switch" is kept ON, the operation end lamp is
effective (described below), and this signal is kept
ON.
MC user parameter
"Not checked" is set at INDICATING LAMP, "8.
Operation end lamp is made effect":
Operation end lamp is ineffective.
"Checked" is set at INDICATING LAMP, "8. ME61528R0100300080004
Operation end lamp is made effect":

Operation end lamp is effective.
MC user parameter
"5. Operation end lamp does not light on by M02/
M30" of ROBOT LOADER I/F
"Not checked":
The standard operation end lamp function also
becomes effective.
"Checked":
The standard operation end lamp function
becomes ineffective when the "system link switch"
is turned ON.
Cycle start The NC starts to operate on the falling edge of this
(iSSTT) signal when all of the following conditions are met:
 "Automatic mode"
 "Robot/loader at retract position" ON
(The "robot/loader at retract position interlock
be-comes ineffective when "2. Cycle start:
STANDBY POS. I/L is made ineffective" of ME61528R0100300080005
MC user parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F is
"Checked".)
Preparation work The "exchange pallet (work) command" is turned See the figure shown on the
completed OFF and work preparation is completed when this left.
(iWSFN) signal is turned ON.
Note: The work preparation completed status will
be retained even if the NC is reset or the power is
turned ON or OFF.
ME61528R0100300080006
6467-E P-19

Door open command On the machine without APC, the operation door
(iDROC) opens with this signal ON. This signal, however,
conditions:
iRTRF" is OFF. ME61528R0100300080007

the start position.
OFF
ROBOT LOADER I/F.)
Door close command On the machine without APC, the operation door
(iDRCS) closes with this signal ON. This signal, however,
conditions:
ME61528R0100300080008
iRTRF" is OFF.
6467-E P-20

the start position.
OFF
ROBOT LOADER I/F.)
Outputs from the NC to the Robot/loader (Type C)

NC automatic mode This signal is turned ON when the following
(oNCGR) conditions are met:
 Automatic operation mode
 "System link switch" ON
However, this signal will not be turned ON during

operation by warm-up program start. ME61528R0100300090001
NC running This signal remains ON during NC operation.

(oNRUN)
ME61528R0100300090002
6467-E P-21

Machining cycle This signal is turned ON upon completion of NC See the time chart shown on
completed machining (at the end of M02, M30 or schedule the left.
(oCFUTF) program).
This signal is turned OFF on the rising edge of the

cycle star switch and NC run signal.
This signal does not come ON with M02 or M30

by warm-up program start. This signal does not go
OFF by warm-up program start because it is not
regarded as NC running.
[Machining time chart]
ME61528R0100300090003
A-pallet is outside of M/ This signal comes ON when all the following APC sequence No.
(oPLTA)
 Pallet B mode is ON.
 Pallet A mode is ON when "Checked" is set at
"B pallet in M/C side, when APC Seq. No.1" ME61528R0100300090004
B-pallet is outside of M/ This signal comes ON when all the following APC sequence No.
(oPLTB)
 Pallet A mode is ON.
 Pallet B mode is ON when "Checked" is set at
"B pallet in M/C side, when APC Seq. No.1"
of the machine user parameter CHUCK, SIT ME61528R0100300090005
6467-E P-22

Exchange pallet (work) This signal is turned ON upon completion of the See the time chart shown on
command M60 command operation in automatic mode. This the left.
(oPCRQ) signal is turned OFF with the "preparation work
completed" signal turned ON.

This signal will be turned OFF in a mode other
than automatic mode.
[Time chart]
ME61528R0100300090006
NC alarm This signal is usually OFF, but will be turned ON An alarm (A, B or C)
(oNALM) when an alarm (A, B or C) occurs. NC reset will
turn OFF the signal again.
The signal will be reversed into a B contact by

hardware.
ME61528R0100300090007
Cycle stop request This signal is turned ON in one of the following

(oCYSP) cases.
The signal will be turned OFF in none of the
following cases:
 When the count of the NC work counter is full.
 When the tool can no longer serve.
 When the "no material/full-work" signal is ME61528R0100300090008
"Checked" is set at MC user

turned ON with the "system link switch"
parameter ROBOT LOADER I/
turned ON.
F"10. Cycle stop request
signal is B contact".
Whenever "10. Cycle stop request signal is B
contact" of MC user parameter ROBOT LOADER
I/F is "Checked", this signal is turned ON.
However, it will be turned OFF in one of the above
cases. (B contact output)
ME61528R0100300090009
6467-E P-23

Work condition 1 This signal comes ON when M311 is issued
oREQ1 (immediate answer).
This signal goes OFF at the rising edge of the
cycle start signal or NC running signal. (The OFF
conditions are the same with those of the
machining end signal.)
This signal remains effective after NC reset or ME61528R0100300090010
power ON/OFF.
power ON/OFF.
power ON/OFF.
power ON/OFF.
Machine zero position This signal is turned ON when the following
(oRTHP) conditions are met.
 Machine is positioned at home position 8.
However, this signal output is not ON or OFF
with HP8 completion during the tool change
command (M06). ME61528R0100300090018
 When the operator door automatic open/

close function is provided, "door open
confirmation oDROP" is ON.
6467-E P-24
The conditions for outputting the door open/close confirmation signals vary with the specifications as
described below:
a. With the operation door auto open/close spec

For details regarding the operation door auto open/close spec, refer to "Section 4 Operation
Door Auto Open/Close Spec".
 Operation door open output ON
 Operation door open confirmation ON
ME61528R0100300090019
Operation door close This signal comes ON when the following

 Operation door close output ON
 Operation door close confirmation ON
 Operation door open confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300090020
b. Without the operation auto door spec

 Operation door open confirmation ON *
ME61528R0100300090021
* Without the operation door auto open/close, The
signal "Operation door open confirmation" is
provided as option.
Operation door close This signal comes ON when following conditions
(oDRCP) are met:
 Front door open confirmation ON
 Front door close confirmation OFF*
* Without the operation door auto open/close

ME61528R0100300090022
spec, The signal "Operation door close
confirmation" is provided as option.
6467-E P-25
c. With the work set ST auto door spec

 APC door open output ON
 APC door open confirmation ON
ME61528R0100300090014
APC door close This signal comes ON when the following

 APC door close output ON
 APC door open confirmation OFF
ME61528R0100300090015
d. Without the work set ST auto door spec

 APC door open confirmation ON *
ME61528R0100300090016
* Without work set ST auto spec, the APC door
open confirmation is provided as an optional
specification.
APC door close This signal comes ON when following conditions
(oDRCP) are met:
 APC door open confirmation OFF *
* Without work set ST auto spec, the APC door

ME61528R0100300090017
open confirmation is provided as an optional
specification.
6467-E P-26
1-6. Interlock
1-6-1. Axis Interlock

This interlock function disables movement of X, Y, and Z-axes when the system link switch is ON
and the robot/loader retract position signal is OFF.
However, this interlock is ignored when "Checked" is set at "3. Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is
made ineffective" of the machine user parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F.
* For the machine with APC, the X, Y, Z-axis can be moved even if the robot/loader retract position
signal is OFF.
1-6-2. APC Interlock

(1) The following alarm occurs when the APC is in operation (during a cycle), the "system link
switch" is turned ON, and the robot/loader at retract position signal is turned OFF:
"1744 Alarm A Robot/Loader condition 10"
However, the above interlock will be ignored when "3. Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made
ineffective" of MC user parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F is "Checked".
(2) When the "system link switch" is turned ON and the robot/loader at retract position signal is
turned OFF during execution of the M60 command, the APC cycle does not begin, and the
above-mentioned alarm occurs.
However, the above interlock will be ignored when "3. Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made
ineffective" of MC user parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F is "Checked".
6467-E P-27
1-7. Work Condition Display Function

When the indication of work condition display spec is provided for the ROBOT LOADER I/F type C,
"Checked" is set at the following parameter.
Machine user parameter ROBOT LOADER I/F

13 Indication of work condition is made effective.
Not checked ... Indication of work condition ineffective
Checked ... Indication of work condition effective
If "Checked" is set at the above parameter of ROBOT/LOADER I/F type C, the following signals
become effective.
 Work condition 1 (oREQ1)
Note
The robot loader I/F type B request 1 (oREQ1) to request 4 (oREQ4) signals are used (shared).
However, their ON/OFF conditions and M command answer conditions are different.
Note
This specification is ineffective for ROBOT LOADER I/F type B. For the robot loader I/F type B, the
existing request 1 (oREQ1) to 4 (oREQ4) can be selected.
Specifications: For details of the specifications, refer to “1-5-2. Robot/loader Interface Type C,
Outputs from the NC to the Robot/Loader (Type C)”.
6467-E P-28
1-8. Parameters
ME61528R0100300130001
ME61528R0100300130002
6467-E P-29
1-9. Automatic Power Shutdown
1-9-1. Effective Conditions

Any of the following states is called an "automatic power shutdown ON state".
(1) Robot/loader interface type C
a. In "automatic mode"
When the "automatic power shutdown command iPWOF" is input from the robot/loader.
[Supplement]
This function is not affected by the automatic power shutdown effective parameter ("3. 'Automatic
Power Shutdown' is made effective" of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) or
automatic power shutdown ON/OFF switch.
When "6. Automatic Power shutdown Switch is made effective" of MC user parameter ROBOT
LOADER I/F is "Checked", this function becomes effective only when the automatic power
shutdown effective parameter ("3. 'Automatic Power Shutdown' is made effective" of MC user
parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) is "Checked" or the automatic power shutdown ON/OFF
switch is set to automatic power shutdown ON (iPOFF)
b. In a mode other than "automatic mode"

When the automatic power shutdown effective parameter ("3. 'Automatic Power Shutdown'
is made effective" of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) is "Checked" or the
automatic power shutdown ON/OFF switch is set to automatic power shutdown ON
(iPOFF).
(2) Robot/loader interface type B
a. In "automatic mode" when automatic power shutdown robot/loader interlocking is

designated:
When "automatic power shutdown completed iPOFC" is input from the robot/loader while
the "automatic power shutdown command iPOFO" is output to the robot/loader.
* Automatic power shutdown robot/loader interlocking designation:
When the automatic power shutdown MC alone designation parameter ("9.
Automatic power shutdown MC alone" of MC user parameter ROBOT
LOADER I/F) is "Not checked".
The "automatic power shutdown command iPOFO" will be output in the power shutdown
state described in 1-9-2. Description of the Function when the automatic power shutdown
effective parameter ("3. 'Automatic Power Shutdown' is made effective" of MC user
parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) is "Checked" or the automatic power shutdown
ON/OFF switch is set to automatic power shutdown ON (iPOFF) in "automatic mode" with
automatic power shutdown robot/loader interlocking designated.
b. In a case other than automatic power shutdown MC alone designation or "automatic mode"
When the automatic power shutdown effective parameter ("3. 'Automatic Power Shutdown'
is made effective" of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) is "Checked" or the
automatic power shutdown ON/OFF switch is set to automatic power shutdown ON
(iPOFF).
6467-E P-30
1-9-2. Description of the Function

In "automatic operation mode" and "single block OFF" with "automatic power shutdown ON," the
power will be shut down automatically after the duration of one of the following states reaches the
time set by 6 "automatic power shutdown timer" of MC user parameter POWER SAVE/
SHUTDOWN:
(1) Schedule end during schedule program selection.
(2) After program end (M2 or M30) execution is completed except during schedule program
selection.
(3) When an alarm A, B or C occurs.

(This function is effective only when 4 "Alarm is added as a requirement for Shutdown" of MC
user parameter POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN is "Checked".)
- When an alarm A occurs and the setting of the automatic power shutdown timer is 30
seconds or less, the power will be shut down 30 seconds after the alarm A occurs.
- When an alarm B occurs, the main spindle will come to a stop 10 seconds after it is
confirmed that the all-axis in-position signal is ON, and the power will be shut down after
the time of the automatic power shutdown timer passes away.
However, if the setting of the automatic power shutdown timer is 30 seconds or less, the
power will be shut down 30 seconds after the main spindle comes to a stop.
- When an alarm C occurs, the power will be shut down after the time of the automatic power
shutdown timer passes away following turning OFF of NC run during schedule program
selection. This function does not become activated in cases except during schedule
program selection.
MC user parameter No. 2 Power save/power shutdown

4 Alarm is added as a requirement for Shutdown.
6 Automatic power shutdown timer
Command: Setting, addition
Initial value: 0
Minimum value: 10
Maximum value: 3600
Unit: Second
(4) Other conditions

Auto power shutoff is disabled during file operation. If auto power shutoff command is issued
during file operation, the NC activates the following alarm and waits until the file operation ends.
Then, the NC releases the alarm and executes auto power shutoff.
"4706 Alarm D Auto power shut-off impossible 2"
6467-E P-31
1-9-3. Parameters
ME61528R0100300160001
6467-E P-32
1-10. Input/Output Bit

The following screen allows you to check the input states of various switches mounted in the
machine and output states of the lamps, relays, and solenoid valves.
Both input and output states are displayed in reverse video, indicating that their signals are ON. For
the other input/output signals and the method of using I/O monitors, refer to MD-H/MA-H series
Maintenance Manual.
Procedure :
1 Press the (DIAGNOSE) key among the vertical function keys at the right end of the
screen.
ME61528R0100300170001
6467-E P-33
2 Press the (I/O MONITOR) key in the diagnosis menu. The I/O monitor starts up.
ME61528R0100300170002
6467-E P-34
3 The following I/O monitor screen appears.
ME61528R0100300170003
6467-E P-35
Input bit
Addr Bit Label Comment

0025 01 iRTER_b Robot-IF alarm
0025 02 iCYSP Robot-IF cycle stop request
0025 03 iRTGR Robot-IF ROBOT LINK ON
0025 04 iRTRF_b Robot-IF retract position
0025 05 iRQAS Robot-IF request answer
0025 06 iPWOF Robot-IF auto shout down request
0025 07 iMTNO Robot-IF No work/ Full work
0025 08 iSSTT Robot-IF cycle start command
0025 09 iPOFC Robot-IF auto shut down FIN
0025 10 iWSFN Robot-IF work set FIN
0025 14 iDROC Robot-IF auto door open command
0025 15 iDRCS Robot-IF auto door close command
0016 15 iSYLK Robot-IF SYSTEM LINK ON
Output bit

0529 0 oNCGR Robot-IF NC system link mode
0529 01 oNRUN Robot-IF NC run status
0529 02 oPOFO Robot-IF auto power shut down command
0529 03 oCUTF Robot-IF program end
0529 05 oPLTA Robot-IF A-pallet is outside of M/C
0529 06 oPLTB Robot-IF B-pallet is outside of M/C
0529 07 oPCRQ Robot-IF pallet change request
0529 08 oNALM Robot-IF NC alarm status
0529 09 oCYSP Robot-IF cycle stop request
0529 11 oREQ1 Robot-IF request 1
0525 14 oDROP Robot-IF auto door open confirm
0525 15 oDRCP Robot-IF auto door close confirm
6467-E P-36
2-1. No. 1 Chuck (Jig)
2-1-1. Clamping Modes

The chuck clamps the outer or inner diameter of the workpiece.
OD clamping ...The chuck clamps the workpiece as it closes and unclamps as it opens.
ID clamping ...The check clamps the workpiece as it opens and unclamps as it closes.
The clamping modes can be switched using the following parameter.
MC UNSER PARAMETER No.15-1 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK

1 The chuck clamps the inner diameter of the workpiece.
Not checked...The chuck clamps the outer diameter of the workpiece.
Checked...The chuck clamps the inner diameter of the workpiece.
2-1-2. Chuck clamp/unclamp commands

The chuck clamp/unclamp commands include pushbutton input, M code and robot/loader
commands.
(1) Pushbutton input commands

Press the Chuck Clamp button to clamp.
Press the Chuck Unclamp button to unclamp.
Conditions for executing the commands:
All of the following conditions should be met to execute the commands.
 The System Link switch is off (in case of the robot/loader interface).
 The NC is not active.
Note that the pushbutton input commands are only effective when the M code Chuck
Clamp/Unclamp Pushbuttons Validate command (M35) has been given.
(The M code Pushbuttons Validate command is cancelled by the M02/M30 command or by
pressing the RESET (or MODE RESET) button).
 Alarm A has not been pending, not during power save mode, and the machine not locked.
 The spindle is at rest.
This condition only applies to the Chuck Unclamp command.
 The operation door is closed.
Chuck Clamp command: Effective when the following parameter has been set to
"Checked."
25 The Work Clamp PB is ineffective when the door is open.
Not checked...The Work Clamp PB is effective even when the door is open.
Checked...The Work Clamp PB is ineffective when the door is open.
6467-E P-37
Chuck Unclamp command: Effective when the following parameter has been set to
"Checked."
57 The Work Unclamp PB is ineffective when the door is open.
Not checked...The Work Unclamp PB is effective even when the door is open.
Checked...The Work Unclamp PB is ineffective when the door is open.
Note: This does not depend on the NC operation mode.
[Single Chuck Clamp/Unclamp PB mode]
The single chuck clamp/unclamp PB mode is made effective using the following parameter.
11 Chuck clamp/unclamp PB 1 button spec
Not checked...Two chuck clamp/unclamp pushbuttons
Checked...A single chuck clamp/unclamp PB
If the Chuck Clamp pushbutton is pressed when the Chuck Unclamp command has been
given, the chuck clamps the workpiece. If it is pressed when the Chuck Clamp command
has been given, the chuck unclamps the workpiece.
If the Chuck Clamp PB is pressed when the workpiece is being clamped, the chuck stops
clamping and starts unclamping. Similarly, if the Chuck Clamp PB is pressed when the
workpiece is being unclamped, the chuck stops unclamping and starts clamping.
Chuck Clamp PB
Chuck Clamp signal
Chuck Unclamp signal
ME61528R0100400020001
6467-E P-38
(2) M code commands

M code Content
M148 Clamps with No. 1 chuck (jig).
M149 Unclamps with No. 1 chuck (jig).
 The Chuck Clamp command is answered back when the workpiece is completely clamped
(further described later).
 The Chuck Unclamp command is answered back when the workpiece is completely
unclamped (further described below).
 The Answer Ignore command is enabled when the operating time reduction mode has
been selected.
M149 M301.......Answered back without confirming the completion of clamping.
:
M302................Answered with confirmation.
M148 M301.......Answered back without confirming the completion of unclamping.

:
M302................Answered with confirmation.
 The M149 command, if given during the spindle revolution, does not unclamp the
workpiece and permits the STM to continue running.
The following diagnosis message appears if the chuck is interlocked as mentioned above.
"15203 Spindle has not stopped."
Note that this message only appears when the STM is permitted by the M149 command to
continue running.
(3) Robot/loader commands (in case of robot/loader interface)

The robot/loader commands are effective in the "linked" mode.
The workpiece is clamped when "Chuck Clamp command iCHCL" turns on.
The workpiece is unclamped when "Chuck Unclamp command iCHUC" turns on.
This does not apply under the following conditions.
 Alarm A is pending.
 The power has been saved.
 The machine has been locked.
 The workpiece is being clamped or unclamped according to an M code command.
 The spindle is revolving (for the Chuck Unclamp command only).
If the "Chuck Clamp" command turns off before the workpiece is completely clamped, the chuck
continues to clamp until the "Chuck Unclamp" command turns on.
If the "Chuck Unclamp" command turns off before the workpiece is completely unclamped, the
chuck continues to unclamp until the "Chuck Clamp" command turns on.
6467-E P-39
2-1-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp sequences

(1) OD clamping
 The Chuck Clamp command turns the Chuck Open SOL off and the Chuck Close SOL on.
The workpiece is considered completely clamped after the "Chuck Open" limit switch turns
off and the "Chuck Close" limit switch on and the work clamp timer (described later) counts
up.
Note that the workpiece is not considered completely clamped if the "Chuck Close" limit
switch remains off for 0.5 second or longer after the workpiece is completely clamped.
 The Chuck Unclamp command turns off the Chuck Close SOL and turns on the Chuck
Open SOL.
The workpiece is considered completely unclamped after the Chuck Close limit switch
turns off and the Chuck Open limit switch turns on and the work unclamp timer (described
later) counts up.
Note that the workpiece is not considered completely unclamped if the Chuck Open limit
switch remains OFF for 0.5 second or longer after the workpiece is completely unclamped.
(2) ID clamping
 The Chuck Clamp command turns the Chuck Close SOL off and the Chuck Open SOL on.
The workpiece is considered completely clamped after the "Chuck Closed" limit switch
turns off and the "Chuck Open" limit switch on and the work clamp timer (described later)
counts up.
Note that the workpiece is not considered completely clamped if the "Chuck Open" limit
switch remains off for 0.5 second or longer after the workpiece is completely clamped.
 The Chuck Unclamp command turns off the Chuck Open SOL and turns on the Chuck
Close SOL.
The workpiece is considered completely unclamped after the Chuck Open limit switch turns
off and the Chuck Closed limit switch turns on and the work unclamp timer (described later)
counts up.
Note that the workpiece is not considered completely unclamped if the Chuck Close limit
switch remains OFF for 0.5 second or longer after the workpiece is completely unclamped.
6467-E P-40
2-1-4. "Chuck Open/Closed" limit switches

The presence of the chuck open/close confirmation LS can be switched using the following
parameter.

4 The 'Chuck Closed' limit switch is made ineffective
Not checked...Makes "Chuck Closed" limit switch effective.
Checked...Makes "Check Closed" limit switch ineffective.
Note
If only the "Chuck Closed" LS is ineffective, the "Chuck Open" LS is checked in the chuck clamp/
unclamp sequences of 2-1-3. but the "Chuck Closed" LS is not.

5 The 'Chuck Open' limit switch is made ineffective
Not checked...Makes "Chuck Open" limit switch effective.
Checked...Makes "Chuck Open" limit switch ineffective.
Note
If only the "Chuck Open" LS is ineffective, the "Chuck Close" LS is checked in the chuck clamp/
unclamp sequences of 2-1-3. but the "Chuck Open" LS is not.
If both of the aforementioned parameters are set to "Checked" (both the "Chuck Closed" and "Chuck
Open" limit switches are ineffective), the sequence completes after the relevant SOL remains on for
the time preset by the timer after issue of the Chuck Clamp/Unclamp command. It is more
specifically described below.
(1) OD clamping
 The Chuck Clamp command turns the Chuck Open SOL off and the Chuck Close SOL on.
The workpiece is considered completely clamped after the work clamp timer (described
later) counts up.
 The Chuck Unclamp command turns the Chuck Close SOL off and the Chuck Open SOL
on. The workpiece is considered completely unclamped after the work unclamp timer
(described later) counts up.
(2) ID clamping
 The Chuck Clamp command turns the Chuck Close SOL off and the Chuck Open SOL on.
The workpiece is considered completely clamped after the work clamp timer (described
later) counts up.
 The Chuck Unclamp command turns the Chuck Open SOL off and the Chuck Close SOL
on. The workpiece is considered completely unclamped after the work unclamp timer
(described later) counts up.
6467-E P-41
2-1-5. Work clamp/unclamp timers

The work clamp/unclamp timers can be preset using the following parameters.

6 Work clamp timer
Commands: Set and Add
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Programmable unit: 10ms
7 Work unclamp timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Programmable unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-42
2-1-6. Timing chart
ME61528R0100400060001
Note: Chuck Clamp LS/SOL For OD clamping: Chuck Close LS/SOL

For ID clamping: Chuck Open LS/SOL
Chuck Unclamp LS/SOL For OD clamping: Chuck Open LS/SOL
For ID clamping: Chuck Close LS/SOL
T1: Work clamp timer
T2: Work unclamp timer
6467-E P-43
2-1-7. Interlocking
(1) Interlocking for inhibiting cutting feed
Cutting feed is inhibited when the workpiece has not been completely clamped.
Interlocking for cutting feed inhibition can be overridden using the following parameter.
(With the following parameter set to "Checked," cutting feed is permitted even when the
workpiece has not been completely clamped.)
2 Even if the chuck opens, cutting feed remains executable.
Not checked...Makes cutting feed executable even when the chuck is open.
Checked...Makes cutting feed inexecutable when the chuck is open.
The following diagnosis message appears when the aforementioned interlocking is active.
"15202 Chuck close LS in not ON."
Or, for some models:
"15204 Fixture clamp confirmation LS is not ON."
Note that this message only appears during NC operation or cutting process.
(2) Interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition

Spindle revolution is permitted when the workpiece has not been completely clamped.
Interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition can be activated using the following parameter.
(With the following parameter set to "Checked," spindle revolution is inhibited even when the
workpiece has not been completely clamped.)
Note that the spindle can be indexed even when the interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition
is active.
3 Spindle revolution is inhibited when the chuck opens.
Not checked...Inhibits spindle revolution when the chuck is open.
Checked...Permits spindle revolution when the chuck is open.
"15414 Chuck close LS is not ON"
"15421 Fixture clamping is not completed."
With the interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition active, the following alarm message
appears when the workpiece becomes no longer completely clamped during spindle revolution.
"1707 Alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C36"
"1707 Alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C3D"
6467-E P-44
2-1-8. Special conditions

 Each SOL remains off when alarm A has been pending or the power saved.
(The statuses are retained if the system is reset with RESET or RESET MODE.)
If alarm A is released, the power saving mode exited, or the system powered on, the system
returns to the status where alarm A has not been raised, the power saving mode not entered, or
the system not powered off.
 With the following parameter set to "Checked," the SOL does not turn off even with alarm A
pending or in the power saving mode.
MC UNSER PARAMETER No.15 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
23 Even if alarm A is pending or in the power saving mode, chuck SOL remains on.
Not checked...Turns SOL off with alarm A pending or in the power saving mode.
Checked...Keeps SOL on with alarm A pending or in the power saving mode.
2-1-9. Status indicators

The Chuck Clamp LED lights while the workpiece is clamped.
The Chuck Unclamp LED lights while the workpiece is unclamped.
6467-E P-45
2-2. No. 2 Chuck

OD clamping … The chuck clamps the workpiece as it closes and unclamps as it opens.
ID clamping … The check clamps the workpiece as it opens and unclamps as it closes.
MC USER PARAMETER No.15-4 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK

CHUCK2 GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPIECE
47 Not checked…The chuck clamps the outer diameter of the workpiece.
Checked…The chuck clamps the inner diameter of the workpiece.
2-2-2. Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp commands

The Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp commands are issued by the pushbutton input, M code and
commands from the robot/loader.

Press the Chuck 2 Clamp button to clamp.
Press the Chuck 2 Unclamp button to unclamp.
- The System Link switch is OFF (in case of the robot/loader interface).
- Not during NC operations.
- Alarm A has not been pending, not in the power save mode, and the machine lock not ON.
- The spindle is at rest.
- The operation door is closed.
Chuck clamp command : Effective when the following parameter has been set to
”Checked” except manual mode (or manual interruption
mode). When in manual mode (or manual interruption mode),
however, the chuck clamp command is enabled even when
the door is open by setting the following parameter to "Not
checked".

JIG2 CLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN
Not checked… The jig 2 clamp pushbutton is effective even when the
58 door is open.
Checked…The jig 2 clamp pushbutton is ineffective when the door is
open.
6467-E P-46
Chuck unclamp command : Effective only when the following parameter is set to "Checked".

JIG2 UNCLAMP PB IS INEFFECTIVE,WHEN DOOR OPEN
Not checked…The jig 2 unclamp pushbutton is effective even when
59 the door is open.
Checked… The jig 2 unclamp pushbutton is ineffective when the door
is open.

The single chuck 2 clamp/unclamp PB mode can be used by setting the following parameter.
CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE PB 1 BUTTON SPEC
11 Not checked…Two chuck 2 clamp/unclamp pushbuttons.
Checked…A single chuck 2 clamp/unclamp pushbutton.
If the Chuck 2 Clamp pushbutton is pressed when the Chuck 2 Unclamp command has been
given, the chuck 2 clamps the workpiece. If it is pressed when the Chuck 2 Clamp command
has been given, the chuck 2 unclamps the workpiece.
If the Chuck 2 Clamp pushbutton is pressed when the workpiece is being clamped with chuck 2,
the chuck 2 stops clamping and starts unclamping. Similarly, if the Chuck 2 Clamp pushbutton
is pressed when the workpiece is being unclamped with chuck 2, the chuck 2 stops unclamping
and starts clamping.
Chuck 2 clamp pushbutton

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Chuck 2 clamp output

↓ ↓ ↓
Chuck 2 unclamp output

ME61528R0100400150001
(2) M command
M code Content
M281 Chuck 2 clamp command
M282 Chuck 2 unclamp command
- The Chuck 2 Clamp command is answered back when the workpiece is completely
clamped with chuck 2 (to be further described later).
- The Chuck 2 Unclamp command is answered back when the workpiece is completely
unclamped with chuck 2 (further described below).
- Commands can be specified while ignoring the M281/M282 answers by specifying in the
following way.
M281 M301 ... Answered back without confirming the completion of clamping.
:
M302 ................. Answer confirmation.
M282 M301 ... Answered back without confirming the completion of unclamping.
:
6467-E P-47
- The M282 command, if given during spindle rotation, does not unclamp the workpiece with
chuck 2, resulting in continuing STM operation.
The following diagnosis message appears if the chuck is interlocked as mentioned above.
Note that this message appears only when the M282 command is issued during STM
operation.
(3) Commands from robot/loader (in case of robot/loader interface)

The commands from the robot/loader are effective in the "linked" mode.
The workpiece is clamped with chuck 2 when "Chuck 2 Clamp command" turns on.
The workpiece is unclamped with chuck 2 when "Chuck 2 Unclamp command" turns on.
- Alarm A is pending.
- The power save mode is ON.
- The machine has been locked.
- The spindle is not at rest. (For the chuck unclamp 2 command only)
If the Chuck 2 Clamp command turns off before the workpiece is completely clamped with
chuck 2, the chuck 2 continues to clamp until the Chuck 2 Unclamp command turns on.
If the "Chuck 2 Unclamp" command turns off before the workpiece is completely unclamped
with chuck 2, the chuck 2 continues to unclamp until the Chuck 2 Clamp command turns on.
2-2-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp operations

(1) OD clamping
 The Chuck 2 Clamp command turns off the Chuck 2 Open SOL and turns on the Chuck 2
Close SOL.
The chuck 2 completes clamping the workpiece after the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 2 clamp
confirmation timer time (described later) has elapsed.
Even after the chuck 2 has clamped the workpiece completely, however, the chuck 2 clamp
completion is released if the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more.
 The Chuck 2 Unclamp command turns off the Chuck 2 Close SOL and turns on the Chuck
2 Open SOL.
The chuck 2 completes unclamping the workpiece after the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 2 unclamp
Even after the chuck 2 has unclamped the workpiece completely, however, the chuck 2
unclamp completion is released if the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5
second or more.
(2) ID clamping
 The Chuck 2 Clamp command turns off the Chuck 2 Close SOL and turns on the Chuck 2
Open SOL.
The chuck 2 completes clamping the workpiece after the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 2 clamp
completion is released if the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more.
6467-E P-48
 The Chuck 2 Unclamp command turns off the Chuck 2 Open SOL and turns on the Chuck
2 Close SOL.
The chuck 2 completes unclamping the workpiece after the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 2 unclamp
Even after the chuck 2 has unclamped the workpiece completely, however, chuck 2
unclamp completion is released if the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5
second or more.
2-2-4. Chuck 2 Open/Close confirmation limit switches

The presence of the chuck 2 open/close confirmation LS can be switched by setting the following
parameter.

'JIG 2 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
37 Not checked…The jig 2 clamp confirmation PS is effective.
Checked…The jig 2 clamp confirmation PS is ineffective.
Note
When only the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS is not provided, only the Chuck 2 Open confirmation
LS is checked and the Chuck 2 Close confirmation LS is not checked in "2-2-3. Chuck clamp/
unclamp operations".

'JIG 2 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
38 Not checked…The jig 2 unclamp confirmation PS is effective.
Checked…The jig 2 unclamp confirmation PS is ineffective.
Note
When only the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS is not provided, only the Chuck 2 Close confirmation
LS is checked and the Chuck 2 Open confirmation LS is not checked in "2-2-3. Chuck clamp/
unclamp operations".
If both parameters above are set to "Checked” (both the Chuck Close confirmation LS and the
Chuck Open confirmation LS are not provided), the operation is complete with the timer time ON
with the SOL to the specified command after the chuck clamp and unclamp commands.
The detailed description is as follows.
(1) OD clamping
Close SOL. The chuck 2 completes clamping the workpiece after the chuck 2 clamp
2 Open SOL. The chuck 2 completes unclamping the workpiece after the chuck 2 unclamp
6467-E P-49
(2) ID clamping
Open SOL. The chuck 2 completes clamping the workpiece after the chuck 2 clamp
2 Close SOL. The chuck 2 completes unclamping the workpiece after the chuck 2 unclamp
2-2-5. Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp confirmation timer

The Chuck 2 Clamp/Unclamp confirmation timer can be set by setting the following parameter.

JIG 2 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
39
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
JIG 2 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
40
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-50
2-2-6. Timing chart
Chuck 2 clamp command
Chuck 2 clamp SOL
Chuck 2 unclamp SOL
Chuck 2 unclamp LS
Chuck 2 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 2 clamp completed
Chuck 2 unclamp command
Chuck 2 clamp SOL
Chuck 2 unclamp SOL
Chuck 2 clamp LS
Chuck 2 unclamp LS
T2
Chuck 2 unclamp completed

ME61528R0100400190001
Note: Chuck 2 Clamp LS/SOL For OD clamping : Chuck 2 Close LS/SOL

For ID clamping : Chuck 2 Open LS/SOL
Chuck 2 Unclamp LS/SOL For OD clamping : Chuck 2 Open LS/SOL
For ID clamping : Chuck 2 Close LS/SOL
T1: Chuck 2 Clamp confirmation timer
T2: Chuck 2 Unclamp confirmation timer
6467-E P-51
2-2-7. Interlock
(1) Interlock for inhibiting cutting feed
Cutting feed is inhibited when chuck 2 has not clamped the workpiece completely.
Interlock for inhibiting cutting feed can be set to ineffective by setting the following parameter.
(When the following parameter is set to "Checked", cutting feed is enabled even when chuck 2
clamp has not been completed.)
MC USER PARAMETER No.15 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
EVEN IF JIG 2 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE
Not checked… The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is activated
41 when chuck 2 is open.
Checked… The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is not activated
even when chuck 2 is open.
The following diagnosis message appears when the interlock above is triggered.
"15475 Chuck2 clamping is not completed."
Or, the following diagnosis message appears depending on the specifications.
"15476 Fixture2 clamping is not completed."
(2) Interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation

Spindle rotation is enabled even when chuck 2 clamp has not been completed.
By setting the following parameter, the interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation can be activated.
(When the following parameter is set to "Checked", spindle rotation is disabled when chuck 2
However, spindle indexing is enabled even when the interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is
effective.
SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 2 OPENS
Not checked…The interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is ineffective
Checked… The interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is effective
when chuck 2 is open.
When the interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is effective, and the chuck is opened (not
completely clamped) during spindle rotation, the following alarm message appears
"1707 Spindle rotation interlock 3C73"
Or, the following alarm message appears depending on the specifications.
"1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C74"
6467-E P-52

 Solenoids are turned OFF while an alarm A has been pending, or during power save mode.
(The output signals are retained even after RESET or RESET MODE.)
When the alarm A is released, the power save mode is cancelled, or the power is supplied, the
NC retains the status before the alarm A was raised, the power saving mode was set, or the
power was shut down.
 When the following parameter is "Checked", the SOL is not turned OFF even if an alarm A is
raised or the power save mode is put on.
EVEN IF ALARM A, SOL IS KEPT
Not checked… The SOL is turned OFF during an alarm A or the
48 power save mode.
Checked… The SOL is not turned OFF even during an alarm A or the
power save mode.
2-2-9. Status indicator

The chuck 2 clamp LED is ON during chuck 2 clamping.
The chuck 2 unclamp LED is ON during chuck 2 unclamping.
6467-E P-53
2-3. No.3 Chuck

OD clamping … The chuck clamps the workpiece as it closes and unclamps as it opens.
ID clamping … The check clamps the workpiece as it opens and unclamps as it closes.

CHUCK3 GRIPS THE INNER DIAMETER OF THE WORKPIECE
55 Not checked…The chuck clamps the outer diameter of the workpiece.
Checked…The chuck clamps the inner diameter of the workpiece.
2-3-2. Chuck 3 Clamp/Unclamp commands


”Checked” except manual mode (or manual interruption mode).
When in manual mode (or manual interruption mode), however,
the chuck clamp command is enabled even when the door is
open by setting the following parameter to "Not checked".

Not checked…The jig 3 clamp pushbutton is effective even when the
60 door is open.
open.
6467-E P-54

Checked…The jig 3 unclamp pushbutton is ineffective when the door
is open.

11 Not checked…Two chuck 3 clamp/unclamp pushbuttons
Checked…A single chuck 3 clamp/unclamp pushbutton

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

↓ ↓ ↓

ME61528R0100400240001
(2) M command
M code Content
M287 Chuck 3 clamp command
M288 Chuck 3 unclamp command
following way.
M287 M301 ... Answered back with Chuck 3 Close SOL ON.
:
:
6467-E P-55
“15203 Spindle has not stopped.”
operation.
(3) Commands from robot/loader


(1) OD clamping
Close SOL.
The chuck 3 completes clamping the workpiece after the Chuck 3 Open confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 3 Close confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 3 clamp
more.
3 Open SOL.
turns off and the Chuck 3 Open confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 3 unclamp
second or more.
(2) ID clamping
Open SOL.
The chuck 3 completes clamping the workpiece after the Chuck 3 Close confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 3 Open confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 3 clamp
completion is released if the Chuck 3 Open confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more.
6467-E P-56
3 Close SOL.
The chuck 3 completes unclamping the workpiece after the Chuck 3 Open confirmation LS
turns off and the Chuck 3 Close confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 3 unclamp
Even after the chuck 3 has unclamped the workpiece completely, however, chuck 3
unclamp completion is released if the Chuck 3 Close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5
second or more.

parameter.

'JIG 3 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
49 Not checked… The jig 3 clamp confirmation is effective.
Checked… The jig 3 clamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
When only the Chuck 3 Close confirmation is not provided, only the Chuck 3 Open confirmation is
checked and the Chuck 3 Close confirmation is not checked in "2-3-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp
operations".

'JIG 3 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
50 Not checked… The jig 3 unclamp confirmation is effective.
Checked… The jig 3 unclamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
When only the Chuck 3 Open confirmation is not provided, only the Chuck 3 Close confirmation is
checked and the Chuck 3 Open confirmation is not checked in "2-3-3. Chuck clamp/unclamp
operations".
If both parameters above are set to "Checked” (both the Chuck Close confirmation and the Chuck
Open confirmation are not provided), the operation is complete with the timer time ON with the SOL
to the specified command after the chuck clamp and unclamp commands.
(1) OD clamping
Close SOL. The chuck 3 completes clamping the workpiece after the chuck 3 clamp
3 Open SOL. The chuck 3 completes unclamping the workpiece after the chuck 3 unclamp
6467-E P-57
(2) ID clamping
Open SOL. The chuck 3 completes clamping the workpiece after the chuck 3 clamp
3 Close SOL. The chuck 3 completes unclamping the workpiece after the chuck 3 unclamp


JIG 3 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
51
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
JIG 3 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
52
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
6467-E P-58
2-3-6. Timing chart
Chuck 3 clamp SOL
Chuck 3 unclamp SOL
Chuck 3 unclamp LS
Chuck 3 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 3 clamp SOL
Chuck 3 unclamp SOL
Chuck 3 clamp LS
Chuck 3 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400280001
Note: Chuck 3 clamp LS/SOL For OD clamping : Chuck 3 Close LS/SOL

Chuck 3 unclamp LS/SOL For OD clamping : Chuck 3 Open LS/SOL
6467-E P-59
2-3-7. Interlock
EVEN IF JIG 3 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE
“15237 Chuck3 clamping is not completed.”
“15238 Jig3 clamping is not completed.”

effective.
SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 3 OPENS
Not checked…The interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is ineffective
when chuck 3 is open.
"15478 Jig3 clamping is not completed."
"1707 Spindle rotation interlock 3C75"
Or, the following alarm occurs depending on the specifications.
"1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C76"
6467-E P-60

Specification can be switched using the following parameter.
ENEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,CHUCK3 SOL IS KEPT
56 power save mode.
power save mode.

6467-E P-61
2-4. No.4 Chuck
2-4-1. Chuck 4 clamp/unclamp commands


"Checked” except manual mode (or manual interruption mode).

69 door is open.
open.

is open.

6467-E P-62

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

↓ ↓ ↓

ME61528R0100400320001
(2) M command
M code Content
M450 Jig 4 clamp command
M451 Jig 4 unclamp command
following way.
:
:
operation.
6467-E P-63
(3) Commands from robot/loader (when robot/loader IF is provided)


 The Chuck 4 Clamp command turns off the Chuck 4 Open SOL and turns on the Chuck 4 Close
SOL.
The chuck 4 completes clamping the workpiece after the Chuck 4 Open confirmation LS turns
off and the Chuck 4 Close confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 4 clamp confirmation timer
time (described later) has elapsed.
more.
 The Chuck 4 Unclamp command turns off the Chuck 4 Close SOL and turns on the Chuck 4
Open SOL.
turns off and the Chuck 4 Open confirmation LS turns on and the chuck 4 unclamp confirmation
timer time (described later) has elapsed.
second or more.

parameter.

‘JIG4 CLOSE’ LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
Checked… The jig 4 clamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
operations".
6467-E P-64

‘JIG4 OPEN’ LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
72 Not checked… The jig 4 unclamp confirmation is effective.
Checked… The jig 4 unclamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
operations".
SOL. The chuck 4 completes clamping the workpiece after the chuck 4 clamp confirmation
Open SOL. The chuck 4 completes unclamping the workpiece after the chuck 4 unclamp


JIG4 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
73
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
JIG4 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
74
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-65
2-4-5. Timing chart
Chuck 4 clamp SOL
Chuck 4 unclamp SOL
Chuck 4 unclamp LS
Chuck 4 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 4 clamp SOL
Chuck 4 unclamp SOL
Chuck 4 clamp LS
Chuck 4 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400360001

6467-E P-66
2-4-6. Interlock
EVEN IF JIG4 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE
“15244 Fixture4 clamping is not completed.”

effective.
SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG4 OPEN
Not checked… The interlock for inhibiting spindle rotation is
76 ineffective when jig 4 is open.
when jig 4 is open.
”1707 Alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C7D”

Specification can be switched using the following parameter.
EVEN IF ALARM A OR POWER SAVE,JIG4 SOL IS KEPT
78 power save mode.
power save mode.
6467-E P-67

6467-E P-68
2-5. No.5 Chuck



187 door is open.
open.

is open.
6467-E P-69

CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE PB 1 BUTTON SPEC.

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

↓ ↓ ↓

ME61528R0100400400001
(2) M command
M code Content
- The Chuck5 Clamp command is answered back when the workpiece is completely clamped
with chuck 5 (to be further described later).
following way.
:
:
However, appears only when the M453 command is issued during STM operation.
6467-E P-70


SOL.
more.
Open SOL.
second or more.

parameter.

86 Not checked…The jig 5 clamp confirmation is effective.
Checked…The jig 5 clamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
operations".
6467-E P-71

87 Not checked…The jig 5 unclamp confirmation is effective.
Checked…The jig 5 unclamp confirmation is ineffective.
Note
operations".


JIG5 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
161
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
JIG5 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
162
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
6467-E P-72
2-5-5. Timing chart
Chuck 5 clamp SOL
Chuck 5 unclamp SOL
Chuck 5 unclamp LS
Chuck 5 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 5 clamp SOL
Chuck 5 unclamp SOL
Chuck 5 clamp LS
Chuck 5 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400440001

6467-E P-73
2-5-6. Interlock
Not checked…The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is effective
171 when jig 5 is open.
Checked… The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is ineffective when
jig 5 is open.

effective.
when jig 5 is open.
“1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock. 42D0”


6467-E P-74
2-6. No.6 Chuck



189 door is open.
open.

is open.

CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE PB 1 BUTTON SPEC.
6467-E P-75

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

↓ ↓ ↓

ME61528R0100400480001
(2) M command
M code Content
following way.
:
:
6467-E P-76


SOL.
more.
Open SOL.
second or more.

parameter.

Note
operations".
6467-E P-77

Note
operations".
2-6-4. Chuck 6 open/close confirmation limit switches


JIG6 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
163
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
JIG6 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
164
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10ms
6467-E P-78
2-6-5. Timing chart
Chuck 6 clamp SOL
Chuck 6 unclamp SOL
Chuck 6 unclamp LS
Chuck 6 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 6 clamp SOL
Chuck 6 unclamp SOL
Chuck 6 clamp LS
Chuck 6 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400520001

6467-E P-79
2-6-6. Interlock
Not checked…The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is effective
172 when jig 6 is open.
Checked… The interlock for inhibiting cutting feed is ineffective when
jig 6 is open.

effective.
when jig 6 is open.
"1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock. 42D1"


6467-E P-80
2-7. No.7 Chuck

The Chuck 7 Clamp/Unclamp commands are issued by the pushbutton input and M code.

(2) M command
M code Content
following way.
:
:
6467-E P-81

SOL.
more.
Open SOL.
second or more.

parameter.

Note
operations".

Note
operations".
6467-E P-82
6467-E P-83
2-7-4. Timing chart
Chuck 7 clamp SOL
Chuck 7 unclamp SOL
Chuck 7 unclamp LS
Chuck 7 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 7 clamp SOL
Chuck 7 unclamp SOL
Chuck 7 clamp LS
Chuck 7 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400590001

6467-E P-84


6467-E P-85
2-8. No.8 Chuck
2-8-1. Chuck 8 clamp/unclamp command

The Chuck 8 Clamp/Unclamp commands are issued by the pushbutton input and M code.

(2) M command
M code Content
following way.
:
:
6467-E P-86

SOL.
more.
Open SOL.
second or more.

parameter.

Note
operations".

Note
operations".
6467-E P-87
6467-E P-88
2-8-4. Timing chart
Chuck 8 clamp SOL
Chuck 8 unclamp SOL
Chuck 8 unclamp LS
Chuck 8 clamp LS
T1
Chuck 8 clamp SOL
Chuck 8 unclamp SOL
Chuck 8 clamp LS
Chuck 8 unclamp LS
T2

ME61528R0100400650001
T1: Chuck 8 clamp confirmation timer

T2: Chuck 8 unclamp confirmation timer
6467-E P-89


6467-E P-90
2-9. Chuck (jig) pressure switching
2-9-1. No. 1 chuck (jig)

(1) Outline
The clamping pressure for the first chuck (jig) can be switched between high and low levels.
 If the Chuck Clamp command is given using the pushbutton or code M148 or from the
robot/loader with the workpiece unclamped, the workpiece is clamped at the high pressure.
 Giving the M148 command with the workpiece clamped at the low pressure changes the
pressure from the low to the high level.
Giving the Chuck Clamp command using the pushbutton or from the robot/loader with the
workpiece clamped at the low pressure does not change the pressure.
 Giving the Chuck Unclamp command using the pushbutton or code M149 or from the
robot/loader also gives the high pressure command.
Purpose: A higher clamping force may deform the workpiece and consequently affects the
machining accuracy. Using the high pressure for rough grinding and the low
pressure for finishing improves the machining accuracy.
(2) Conditions for supporting the function

The chuck pressure switching function is supported when the fixture control is effective and the
following parameter set to "Checked."
Machine user parameter No.15-3 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
27 High/low chuck pressure is made switchable.
Not checked...Chuck pressure is not switchable.
Checked...Chuck pressure is switchable.
6467-E P-91
(3) Pressure switching commands
a. High Pressure Clamp Command

Giving the Chuck Clamp command using the pushbutton or code M149 or from the robot/
loader also gives the high pressure command.
(1) High Pressure Clamp command with workpiece unclamped
If the Chuck Clamp command is given using the pushbutton or code M148 or from the
robot/loader with the workpiece unclamped, the workpiece is clamped at the high
pressure.
(2) High Pressure Clamp command with workpiece clamped at low pressure
Giving the M148 command with the workpiece clamped at the low pressure changes
the pressure from the low to the high level.
Giving the Chuck Clamp command using the pushbutton or from the robot/loader with
the workpiece clamped at the low pressure does not change the pressure.
b. High Pressure Unclamp command

Giving the Chuck Unclamp command using the pushbutton or code M149 or from the
robot/loader also gives the high pressure command.
(1) High Pressure Unclamp command
If the Chuck Unclamp command is given using the pushbutton or code M149 or from
the robot/loader, the workpiece is unclamped at the high pressure.
c. Low Pressure Chuck Clamp command

The M385 command executes the low pressure clamp command.
M code Description
M385 Low Pressure Chuck Clamp command
[Conditions for interlocking: When commanded]
 The same as for M148 command.
[Condition for answering]
 Answered when the workpiece is completely clamped at the low pressure.
[Time reduction mode]
M385 M301..... Answered back without confirming the completion of clamping.
M302............... Answered with confirmation.
(1) Low Pressure Clamp command with workpiece unclamped
If the M385 command is given with the workpiece unclamped, the workpiece is
clamped at the low pressure.
(2) Low Pressure Clamp command with workpiece clamped at high pressure
Giving the M385 command with the workpiece clamped at the high pressure changes
the pressure to the low level.
6467-E P-92
(4) Operation
a. Chuck high pressure clamp/unclamp operations (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck high pressure clamp operations
The chuck open SOL is turned OFF and the chuck close SOL is turned ON by the
chuck high pressure clamp command.
At this time, if the command is the M148 command, the low pressure SOL is turned
OFF and the high pressure SOL is turned ON.
After the low pressure SOL is turned OFF, the high pressure SOL is turned ON, the
chuck high pressure open confirmation LS is turned OFF, and the chuck high pressure
close confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck high pressure clamp is completed when the
time set in the workpiece clamp confirmation timer (to be described later) has elapsed.
However, if the chuck high pressure (jig) close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5
second or more after chuck high pressure clamp is completed, the completion of chuck
high pressure clamp is cancelled.
(2) Chuck high pressure unclamp operations
The chuck close SOL is turned OFF and the chuck open SOL is turned ON by the
chuck high pressure unclamp command.
If the low pressure SOL is ON at this time, the low pressure SOL is turned OFF and
the high pressure SOL is turned ON after 0.3 second.
After the low pressure SOL is turned OFF, the high pressure SOL is turned ON, the
chuck high pressure close confirmation LS is turned OFF, and the chuck high pressure
open confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck high pressure unclamp is completed when
the time set in the workpiece unclamp confirmation timer (to be described later) has
elapsed.
b. Chuck low pressure clamp operations (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck low pressure clamp operations
The chuck open SOL is turned OFF and the chuck close SOL is turned ON by the
chuck low pressure clamp command.
At this time, the low pressure SOL is turned ON and the high pressure SOL is turned
OFF.
When the time set in the workpiece clamp confirmation timer for low pressure (to be
described later) has elapsed with all the following conditions met, chuck low pressure
clamp is completed.
 Chuck open SOL OFF/chuck close SOL ON

 Low pressure SOL ON
 High pressure SOL OFF
 Chuck high pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck high pressure close confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck low pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck low pressure close confirmation LS ON
However, if the low pressure chuck close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more after chuck low pressure clamp is completed, the completion of low pressure chuck
clamp is cancelled.
6467-E P-93
c. Chuck high pressure clamp, high pressure unclamp, low pressure clamp (ID clamping)
Operations with ID clamping are the same with the manner of OD clamping, except the
open close SOL and the confirmation (LS) are reversed as follows.
OD clamping ID clamping
Chuck open SOL Chuck close SOL
Chuck close SOL Chuck open SOL
Chuck high pressure open confirmation Chuck high pressure close confirmation
Chuck high pressure close confirmation Chuck high pressure open confirmation
Chuck low pressure open confirmation Chuck low pressure close confirmation
Chuck low pressure close confirmation Chuck low pressure open confirmation
(5) Parameters
a. The "Chuck Low Pressure Open/Closed" LSs can be made effective or ineffective using
the following parameters
Machine User Parameter No.15-3 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
28 'Chuck Closed' Low PS is made ineffective.
Not checked...Makes "Chuck Closed" low PS effective.
Checked...Makes "Chuck Closed" low PS ineffective.

29 'Chuck Open' Low PS is made ineffective.
Not checked...Makes "Chuck Open" low PS effective.
Checked...Makes "Chuck Open" low PS ineffective.
b. Work clamp/unclamp timers

The work clamp/unclamp timers can be preset using the following parameters.
6 Work clamp timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
7 Work unclamp timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Programmable Unit: 10ms
30 Low pressure work clamp timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
6467-E P-94
(6) Special conditions
a. Low pressure SOL
 The statuses are retained even with alarm A pending, in the power saving mode or
RESET or MODE RESET pressed.
b. High pressure SOL
 The status is retained even while an alarm A is pending, during power save mode, or
after reset/mode reset.
(7) Status indicators
a. Chuck Clamp LED

The Chuck Clamp LED lights under either of the following conditions.
 For high pressure command: The workpiece is completely clamped by the chuck (jig)
at the high pressure.
 For low pressure command: The workpiece is completely clamped by the chuck (jig) at
the low pressure.
b. Chuck Unclamp LED

The Chuck Unclamp LED lights when the workpiece is completely unclamped by the chuck
(jig) at the high pressure.
(8) Interlocking
a. Interlocking for cutting feed inhibition

Cutting feed is inhibited when the workpiece has not been completely clamped at the high
or low pressure.
Interlocking for cutting feed inhibition can be overridden using the following parameter.
2 Even if chuck opens, cutting feed remains executable.
Not checked...Makes cutting feed disabled even when the chuck is open.
Checked...Makes cutting feed executable when the chuck is open.
"15202 Chuck Close LS is not ON."
"15024 Fixture clamp confirmation LS is not ON."
Note that this message only appears during NC operation or cutting process.
6467-E P-95
b. Interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition

Spindle revolution is permitted when the workpiece has not been completely clamped at
the high or low pressure.
Interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition can be activated using the following parameter.
Note that the spindle can be indexed even when the interlocking for spindle revolution
inhibition is active.
MC USER PARAMETER No.15-1 CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
3 Spindle revolution is inhibited when the chuck opens.
Not checked...Inhibits spindle revolution when the chuck is open.
Checked...Permits spindle revolution when the chuck is open.
"15414 Chuck clamping is not completed."
"15421 Fixture clamping is not completed."
With the interlocking for spindle revolution inhibition active, the following alarm message
appears when the workpiece becomes no longer completely clamped.
"1707 Spindle rotation interlock 3B62"
6467-E P-96
2-9-2. No.2 Chuck (Jig)

(1) Overview
It is possible to switch the chuck (jig) 2 clamp pressure between the high/low settings.
 The pushbutton command and the M281 command from a chuck unclamped state, and the
chuck clamp command from the robot/loader operate chuck clamp at high pressure.
 The M281 command from a chuck clamped state at low pressure changes the pressure
from low to high.
The pushbutton command from a chuck clamped state at low pressure and the chuck
clamp command from the robot/loader do not change the pressure between low and high
settings.
 The high pressure commands are executed by the pushbutton, M282 command, and
chuck unclamp command from the robot/loader.
Choose high pressure in roughing since if the clamping force is strong the workpiece may
be deformed, and then the machining accuracy may be degraded. In finishing choose low
pressure to increase machining accuracy.
(2) Command effective conditions

When jig control is enabled and by setting the following parameter to "Checked", the chuck
pressure can be switched between low and high settings.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 15 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
80 CHUCK2 HIGH/LOW PRESSURE IS EFFECTED
Not checked…The low/high pressure cannot be switched.
Checked…The high/low pressure can be switched.
(3) High/low pressure switching command
a. Chuck 2 high pressure clamp command

The high pressure commands are executed by the pushbutton, M281 command, and
chuck 2 clamp command from the robot/loader.
(1) Chuck 2 high pressure clamp command from chuck 2 unclamped state
The pushbutton command and the M281 command from a chuck 2 unclamped state,
and the chuck 2 clamp command from the robot/loader operate chuck clamp at high
pressure.
(2) Chuck 2 high pressure clamp command from chuck 2 low pressure clamped state
The M281 command from a chuck 2 clamped state at low pressure changes the
pressure from low to high.
The pushbutton command from a chuck 2 clamped state at low pressure and the
chuck 2 clamp command from the robot/loader do not change the pressure between
low and high settings.
b. Chuck 2 high pressure unclamp command

chuck 2 unclamp command from the robot/loader.
(1) Chuck 2 high pressure unclamp command
The pushbutton command, M282 command, and chuck 2 unclamp command from the
robot/loader operate chuck 2 unclamp at high pressure.
6467-E P-97
c. Chuck 2 low pressure clamp command

The low pressure clamp command is executed by the M459 command.
M code Content
M459 Chuck 2 low pressure clamp command
[Interlock condition at the time of command]
 The conditions are the same as the M281command.
[Answer condition]
 The answer is returned with a chuck 2 clamp at low pressure completed.
[Running time shortening]
M459 M301 ... Answered back without confirming the completion of chuck 2 clamp.
:
M302 .............. Answer confirmation
(1) Chuck 2 low pressure clamp command from chuck 2 unclamped state
The M459 command from a chuck 2 unclamped state operates chuck clamp at low
pressure.
(2) Chuck 2 low pressure clamp command from a chuck 2 high pressure clamped state
The M459 command from a chuck 2 clamped state at high pressure changes the
pressure to low pressure.
6467-E P-98
(4) Operations
a. Chuck 2 clamp/unclamp operations at high pressure (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck 2 clamping at high pressure
The chuck 2 high pressure clamp command turns OFF the chuck 2 open SOL, and
then the chuck 2 close SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the M281 command turns OFF the chuck 2 low pressure SOL and turns
ON the chuck 2 high pressure SOL.
After the chuck 2 low pressure SOL is turned OFF and the chuck 2 high pressure SOL
is turned ON, and the chuck 2 high pressure open confirmation LS is turned OFF and
the chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck 2 high pressure
clamp is complete after the time set in the jig 2 workpiece clamp confirmation timer (to
be described later) has elapsed.
However, if the chuck 2 (jig) close confirmation LS at high pressure remains OFF for
0.5 second or more after chuck 2 clamping at high pressure is completed, the
completion of chuck 2 clamp at high pressure is cancelled.
(2) Chuck 2 unclamping at high pressure
The chuck 2 high pressure unclamp command turns OFF the chuck 2 close SOL , and
then the chuck 2 open SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the chuck 2 low pressure SOL is turned OFF and the chuck 2 high
pressure SOL is turned ON 0.3 second later if the chuck 2 low pressure SOL is ON.
is turned ON, and the chuck 2 high pressure confirmation LS is turned OFF and the
chuck 2 high pressure open confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck 2 high pressure
unclamp is complete after the jig 2 workpiece clamp confirmation timer (to be
described later) has elapsed.
b. Chuck 2 clamp operations at low pressure (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck 2 clamping at low pressure
The chuck 2 low pressure clamp command turns OFF the chuck 2 open SOL, and then
the chuck 2 close SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the chuck 2 low pressure SOL is turned ON and the chuck 2 high pressure
SOL is turned OFF.
Chuck 2 clamp at low pressure is complete when the time set in the workpiece clamp
confirmation timer (to be described later) for chuck 2 low pressure has elapsed with all the
following conditions met.
 Chuck 2 open SOL OFF/chuck 2 close SOL ON
 Chuck 2 low pressure SOL ON
 Chuck 2 high pressure SOL OFF
 Chuck 2 high pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 2 low pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation LS ON
However, if the chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more after chuck 2 clamping at low pressure is completed, the completion of chuck clamp
at low pressure is cancelled.
6467-E P-99
c. Chuck 2 high pressure clamp, high pressure unclamp, low pressure clamp (ID clamping)
open/close SOL and the confirmation (LS) are reversed as follows.
Chuck 2 open SOL Chuck 2 close SOL
Chuck 2 close SOL Chuck 2 open SOL
Chuck 2 high pressure open confirmation Chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation
Chuck 2 high pressure close confirmation Chuck 2 high pressure open confirmation
Chuck 2 low pressure open confirmation Chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation
Chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation Chuck 2 low pressure open confirmation
(5) Parameter
a. It is possible to switch effective/ineffective with the chuck 2 low pressure open/close

confirmation LS by setting the following parameter.
81 'CHUCK2 CLOSE' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
Not checked… The chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation PS is effective.
Checked… The chuck 2 low pressure close confirmation PS is ineffective.

82 'CHUCK2 OPEN' LOW PS IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
Not checked…The chuck 2 low pressure open confirmation PS is effective.
Checked… The chuck 2 low pressure open confirmation PS is ineffective.
b. Jig 2 workpiece clamp/unclamp confirmation timer

The jig 2 workpiece clamp/unclamp confirmation timer can be set by the following
parameter.
39 JIG 2 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
40 JIG 2 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
83 CHUCK2 MIDDLE PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-100
(6) Special states
a. Low pressure SOL

 The low pressure SOL state is retained even if an alarm A occurs, in the power save
mode, or after reset (or mode reset).

 The high pressure SOL state is retained even if an alarm A occurs, in the power save
(7) Status indicator
a. Chuck 2 clamp LED

The chuck 2 clamp LED is turned on with the following conditions met.
 High pressure command: The chuck 2 high pressure (jig) clamp is completed.
 Low pressure command: The chuck 2 low pressure (jig) clamp is completed.
b. Chuck 2 unclamp LED

The chuck 2 unclamp LED is turned on when the chuck 2 high pressure (jig) unclamp is
completed.
(8) Interlock
a. Cutting feed inhibition interlock

Cutting feed is inhibited when chuck 2 clamp at either high or low pressure has not been
completed.
The cutting feed inhibition interlock can be disabled by checking the following parameter.
41 EVEN IF JIG 2 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE
Not checked… The cutting feed inhibition interlock is effective if chuck 2 is
open.
Checked…The cutting feed inhibition interlock is ineffective if chuck 2 is
open.
If the interlock is activated from the condition mentioned above, the following diagnosis
message is displayed.
“15235 Chuck2 clamping is not completed."
“15236 Jig2 clamping is not completed."
This diagnosis message appears, however, only during cutting with NC running or manual
cutting feed.
6467-E P-101
b. Spindle rotation inhibition interlock

Spindle rotation is enabled even while chuck 2 clamp at high or low pressure has not been
completed.
By checking the following parameter, spindle rotation inhibition interlock can be set to
effective.
However, spindle index is enabled even while spindle rotation inhibition interlock is
effective.
42 SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 2 OPENS
Not checked…The spindle rotation inhibition interlock is ineffective when
chuck 2 is open.
Checked…The spindle rotation inhibition interlock is effective when chuck 2
is open.
When the spindle rotation inhibition interlock is effective, the following alarm occurs if chuck
2 clamped state is released during spindle rotation.
“1707 Spindle rotation interlock 3C73”
“1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C74"
6467-E P-102
2-9-3. No. 3 Chuck (Jig)

(1) Overview
It is possible to switch the chuck (jig) 3 clamp pressure between the high/low settings.
 The pushbutton command and the M287 command from a chuck unclamped state, and the
chuck clamp command from the robot/loader operate chuck clamp at high pressure.
 The M287 command from a chuck clamped state at low pressure changes the pressure
from low to high.
The pushbutton command from a chuck clamped state at low pressure and the chuck
clamp command from the robot/loader do not change the pressure between low and high
settings.
 The high pressure commands are executed by the pushbutton, M288 command, and
chuck unclamp command from the robot/loader.
Choose high pressure in roughing since if the clamping force is strong the workpiece
may be deformed, and then the machining accuracy may be degraded. In finishing
choose low pressure to increase machining accuracy.
(2) Command effective conditions

When jig control is enabled and by setting the following parameter to "Checked", the chuck
pressure can be switched between low and high settings.
175 CHUCK3 HIGH/LOW PRESSURE IS EFFECTED
Not checked…The low/high pressure cannot be switched.
Checked…The high/low pressure can be switched.
(3) High/low pressure switching command
a. Chuck 3 high pressure clamp command

chuck 3 clamp command from the robot/loader.
(1) Chuck 3 high pressure clamp command from chuck 3 unclamped state
The pushbutton command and the M287 command from a chuck 3 unclamped state,
and the chuck 3 clamp command from the robot/loader operate chuck clamp at high
pressure.
(2) Chuck 3 high pressure clamp command from chuck 3 low pressure clamped state
The M287 command from a chuck 3 clamped state at low pressure changes the
pressure from low to high.
The pushbutton command from a chuck 3 clamped state at low pressure and the
chuck 3 clamp command from the robot/loader do not change the pressure between
low and high settings.
b. Chuck 3 high pressure unclamp command

chuck 3 unclamp command from the robot/loader.
(1) Chuck 3 high pressure unclamp command
The pushbutton command, M288 command, and chuck 3 unclamp command from the
robot/loader operate chuck 3 unclamp at high pressure.
6467-E P-103
c. Chuck 3 low pressure clamp command

The M command (M572) for low pressure clamp has been added to execute the low
pressure command with the chuck clamp command.
M code Content
M572 Chuck 3 low pressure clamp command
[Interlock condition at the time of command]
 The conditions are the same as the M287 command.
[Answer condition]
 The answer is returned with a chuck 3 at low pressure clamp completed.
[Running time shortening]
M572 M301 ... Answered back without confirming the completion of chuck 3 clamp.
:
M302 .............. Answer confirmation
(1) Chuck 3 low pressure clamp command from chuck 3 unclamped state
The M572 command from a chuck 3 unclamped state operates chuck clamp at low
pressure.
(2) Chuck 3 low pressure clamp command from a chuck 3 high pressure clamped state
The M572 command from a chuck 3 clamped state at high pressure changes the
pressure to low pressure.
6467-E P-104
(4) Operations
a. Chuck 3 clamp/unclamp operations at high pressure (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck 3 clamping at high pressure
The chuck 3 high pressure clamp command turns OFF the chuck 3 open SOL, and
then the chuck 3 close SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the M287 command turns OFF the chuck 3 low pressure SOL and turns
ON the chuck 3 high pressure SOL.
is turned ON, and the chuck 3 high pressure open confirmation LS is turned OFF and
the chuck 3 high pressure close confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck 3 high pressure
clamp is complete after the time set in the jig 3 workpiece clamp confirmation timer (to
be described later) has elapsed.
However, if the chuck 3 (jig) close confirmation LS at high pressure remains OFF for
0.5 second or more after chuck 3 clamping at high pressure is completed, the
completion of chuck 3 clamp at high pressure is cancelled.
(2) Chuck 3 unclamping at high pressure
The chuck 3 high pressure unclamp command turns OFF the chuck 3 close SOL , and
then the chuck 3 open SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the chuck 3 low pressure SOL is turned OFF and the chuck 3 high
pressure SOL is turned ON 0.3 second later if the chuck 3 low pressure SOL is ON.
is turned ON, and the chuck 3 high pressure close confirmation LS is turned OFF and
the chuck 3 high pressure open confirmation LS is turned ON, chuck 3 high pressure
unclamp is complete after the jig 3 workpiece unclamp confirmation timer (to be
described later) has elapsed.
b. Chuck 3 clamp operations at low pressure (OD clamping)

(1) Chuck 3 clamping at low pressure
The chuck 3 low pressure clamp command turns OFF the chuck 3 open SOL, and then
the chuck 3 close SOL is turned ON.
At this time, the chuck 3 low pressure SOL is turned ON and the chuck 3 high pressure
SOL is turned OFF.
Chuck 3 clamp at low pressure is complete when the time set in the workpiece clamp
confirmation timer (to be described later) for chuck 3 low pressure has elapsed with all the
following conditions met.
 Chuck 3 open SOL OFF/chuck 3 close SOL ON
 Chuck 3 low pressure SOL ON
 Chuck 3 high pressure SOL OFF
 Chuck 3 high pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 3 high pressure close confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 3 low pressure open confirmation LS OFF
 Chuck 3 low pressure close confirmation LS ON
However, if the chuck 3 low pressure close confirmation LS remains OFF for 0.5 second or
more after chuck 3 clamping at low pressure is completed, the completion of chuck clamp
at low pressure is cancelled.
6467-E P-105
c. Chuck 3 high pressure clamp, high pressure unclamp, low pressure clamp (ID clamping)
open/close SOL and the confirmation (LS) are reversed as follows.
Chuck 3 open SOL Chuck 3 close SOL
Chuck 3 close SOL Chuck 3 open SOL
Chuck 3 high pressure open confirmation Chuck 3 high pressure close confirmation
Chuck 3 high pressure close confirmation Chuck 3 high pressure open confirmation
Chuck 3 low pressure open confirmation Chuck 3 low pressure close confirmation
Chuck 3 low pressure close confirmation Chuck 3 low pressure open confirmation
(5) Parameter
a. It is possible to switch effective/ineffective with the chuck 3 low pressure open/close

confirmation LS by setting the following parameter.
49 'JIG 3 CLOSE' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
Not checked… The jig 3 (high pressure) clamp confirmation PS is effective.
Checked… The jig 3 (high pressure) clamp confirmation PS is ineffective.
50 'JIG 3 OPEN' LIMIT SWITCH IS MADE INEFFECTIVE
Not checked… The jig 3 (high pressure) unclamp confirmation PS is
effective.
Checked… The jig 3 (high pressure) unclamp confirmation PS is ineffective.
b. Jig 3 workpiece clamp/unclamp confirmation timer

The jig 3 workpiece clamp/unclamp confirmation timer can be set by the following
parameter.
51 JIG 3 CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
52 JIG 3 UNCLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
183 CHUCK3 LOW PRESSURE CLAMP TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
Unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-106
(6) Special states
a. Low pressure SOL

 The low pressure SOL state is retained even if an alarm A occurs, in the power save

 The high pressure SOL state is retained even if an alarm A occurs, in the power save
(7) Status indicator
a. Chuck 3 clamp LED

The chuck 3 clamp LED is turned on with the following conditions met.
 High pressure command: The chuck 3 high pressure (jig) clamp is completed.
 Low pressure command: The chuck 3 low pressure (jig) clamp is completed.
b. Chuck 3 unclamp LED

The chuck 3 unclamp LED is turned on when the chuck 3 high pressure (jig) unclamp is
completed.
(8) Interlock
a. Cutting feed inhibition interlock

Cutting feed is inhibited when chuck 3 clamp at either high or low pressure has not been
completed.
The cutting feed inhibition interlock can be disabled by checking the following parameter.
53 EVEN IF JIG 3 OPENS,CUTTING FEED IS EFFECTIVE
Not checked…The cutting feed inhibition interlock is effective if chuck 3 is
open.
Checked…The cutting feed inhibition interlock is ineffective if chuck 3 is
open.
message is displayed
This diagnosis message appears, however, only during cutting with NC running or manual
cutting feed.
6467-E P-107
b. Spindle rotation inhibition interlock

Spindle rotation is enabled even while chuck 3 clamp at high or low pressure has not been
completed.
By checking the following parameter, spindle rotation inhibition interlock can be set to
effective.
However, spindle index is enabled even while spindle rotation inhibition interlock is
effective.
54 SPINDLE ROTATION INHIBIT WHEN JIG 3 OPENS
Not checked…The spindle rotation inhibition interlock is ineffective when
chuck 3 is open.
Checked…The spindle rotation inhibition interlock is effective when chuck 3
is open.
When the spindle rotation inhibition interlock is effective, the following alarm occurs if chuck
3 clamped state is released during spindle rotation.
“1707 Spindle rotation interlock 3C75"
“1707 alarm A Spindle rotation interlock 3C76”
6467-E P-108
2-10. Chuck air blow control
2-10-1.Chuck air blow commands

The chuck air blow commands include pushbutton input, M code and robot/loader commands.
(1) Pushbutton input command

The pushbutton command is effective when the System Link mode is ON except for some
special specifications.
If the pushbutton is pressed, the Air Blow SOL turns on.
Note that the pushbutton input command is ineffective while the M code Chuck Air Blow On
command is being executed.
This does not affect the NC operation mode.
(2) M code commands

M code Content
M146 Turns chuck air blow off.
M147 Turns chuck air blow on.
 The M147 command turns the Chuck Air Blow SOL on and then is answered.
 The M146 command turns the Chuck Air Blow SOL off and then is answered.
 M02 and M30 also turn the Chuck Air Blow SOL off.
Note
These commands are effective regardless of the System Link switch position.
The M00 and M01 commands also turn the Chuck Air Blow SOL off.
Note that this function can be switched using the following parameter.
Machine user parameter No.1-2 COOLANT
20 M00/M01 don't turn off the spindle/coolant group.
Not checked...M00/M02 stop the spindle and coolant group.
Checked...M00/M01 do not stop the spindle and coolant group.
(3) Robot/loader command

The robot/loader command is effective in the "linked" mode.
The Chuck Air Blow SOL remains on while the Air Blow command is ON.
Note that the air blow command from the robot/loader is ineffective while the M code Air Blow
On command is being executed.
2-10-2.Special cases
The commands are cancelled and the Chuck Air Blow SOL turns off when RESET (or MODE
RESET) is pressed, the machine locked or alarm A raised or in the power saving mode.
6467-E P-109
2-11. Input/Output Signal Name

(1) Chuck 1
Input signal
0016 08 iCHCL1 Robot-IF JIG No.1 clamp command
0016 09 iCHUC1 Robot-IF JIG No.1 unclamp command
0021 15 iJGCL Clamp JIG
0021 14 iJGUC Unclamp JIG
0067 00 iJCLQ1 Jig (chuck) No.1 clamp confirm
0067 01 iJUCQ1 Jig (chuck) No.1 unclamp confirm
0067 02 iJCLLQ1 Jig (chuck) No.1 clamp low press. confirm
0067 03 iJULLQ1 Jig (chuck) No.1 unclamp low press. confirm
Output signal
0525 08 oCHCL1 Robot-IF JIG No.1 clamp confirm
0525 09 oCHUC1 Robot-IF JIG No.1 unclamp confirm
0552 00 oJCLY1 Jig (chuck) No.1 clamp SOL
0552 01 oJUCY1 Jig (chuck) No.1 unclamp SOL
0527 02 oJCLF1 No1 clamp fin
0552 02 oJUCF1 Jig (chuck) No.1 unclamp fin. LED
0552 03 oJCLLY1 Jig (chuck) No.1 low press. SOL
0552 04 oJCLHY1 Jig (chuck) No.1 high press. SOL
(2) Chuck 2
Input signal
0016 11 iCHCL2 Robot-IF JIG No.2 clamp command
0016 12 iCHUC2 Robot-IF JIG No.2 unclamp command
0067 04 iJGCL2 Jig (chuck) No.2 clamp SB
0067 05 iJGUC2 Jig (chuck) No.2 unclamp SB
Output signal
0525 11 oCHCL2 Robot-IF JIG No.2 clamp confirm
0525 12 oCHUC2 Robot-IF JIG No.2 unclamp confirm
0527 03 oJCLF2 No2 clamp fin
6467-E P-110
(3) Chuck 3
Input signal
0068 00 iCHCL3 Robot-IF Jig No.3 clamp command
0068 01 iCHUC3 Robot-IF Jig No.3 unclamp command
Output signal
0553 00 oCHCL3 Robot-IF Jig No.3 clamp confirm
0553 01 oCHUC3 Robot-IF Jig No.3 unclamp confirm
0552 12 oJCLF3 Jig (chuck) No.3 clamp fin. LED
(4) Chuck 4
Input signal
Output signal
6467-E P-111
(5) Chuck 5
Input signal
Output signal
(6) Chuck 6
Input signal
Output signal
6467-E P-112
(7) Chuck 7
Input signal
Output signal
(8) Chuck 8
Input signal
Output signal
(9) Input/output signal: air blow

Input signal
0068 10 iJARB Jig (chuck) air blow SB
0068 11 iARBW Robot-IF Jig (chuck) air blow command
Output signal
0553 10 oJARBY Jig (chuck) air blow SOL
0553 11 oJABHL Jig (chuck) air blow LED
0613 13 oJARBY2 Jig air blow 2 YV
6467-E P-113
3-1. Work Sit Condition Monitor
3-1-1. M Codes
M code Content
M340 Work sit condition monitor ON
M341 Work sit condition monitor OFF.
Note
 With the workpiece unclamped, the M340 command does not turn the work sit condition monitor
on and will be immediately answered.
This only applies when the chuck is provided.
 The M340 command is immediately answered when the work sit condition monitor is on and the
M341 command is immediately answered when it is off.
 The commands are ignored and immediately answered when the machine has been locked.
3-1-2. Entering the sit condition monitoring mode

The work sit condition monitoring mode can be entered in either of the following ways.
(1) The M340 command starts the workpiece seating air blow (answered) and, after the timer (see
3-1-7. Sit condition confirmation timer) counts up, initiates the sit condition monitoring mode
where the work sit confirmation signal is checked.
(2) If the Chuck Clamp PB command is accepted with the sit condition monitor switch on, it starts
the workpiece seating air blow and, after the workpiece is completely clamped and the timer
(see 3-1-7. Sit condition confirmation timer) counts up, initiates the sit condition monitoring
mode where the work sit confirmation signal is checked.
This only applies when the chuck is provided.
The sit condition monitor is activated in either of the aforementioned ways and operates as
described below depending on the status of the work sit confirmation signal at that time.
 Sit condition confirmation signal: On

...The system starts continuously monitoring the sit condition confirmation signal.
(The air blow does not turn off.)
 Sit condition confirmation signal: Off

...The following alarm message appears.
" 2736 Alarm B Work clamp miss *** "
*** 1: The sit condition confirmation signal 1 went OFF within the time set at the "work
sitting confirmation timer" when the monitoring function was ON.
*** 201: The sit condition confirmation signal 2 went OFF within the time set at the "work
*** 301: The work sit confirmation signal 3 went OFF within the time set at the "work
6467-E P-114
3-1-3. Continuous monitoring in work sit condition monitoring mode

 If the sit condition confirmation signal remains off for 0.5 sec or longer in the sit condition
monitoring mode with the spindle revolving, the following alarm message appears.
" 1731 Alarm A Work clamp miss *** "
*** 1: The work sit confirmation signal 1 went OFF while the spindle was running.
 If the work sit confirmation signal remains off for 0.5 sec or longer in the sit condition monitoring
mode with the spindle at rest and the NC active, the following alarm message appears.
" 2736 Alarm B Work clamp miss *** "
*** 2: The work sit confirmation signal 1 remained OFF for more than 0.5 seconds
when the spindle was at rest with the monitoring function ON.
 If the work sit confirmation signal remains off for 0.5 sec or longer in the sit condition monitoring
mode with the spindle at rest and the NC not active, the following alarm message appears.
" 4770 Alarm D Work clamp miss *** "
* This alarm is available when a chuck (jig) and N seating sensors are supported by the
user's specifications.
6467-E P-115
3-1-4. Exiting the sit condition monitoring mode

The sit condition monitoring mode is exited under one of the following four conditions.
Exiting the sit condition monitoring mode does not turn the workpiece seating air blow off.
Note that this turns the workpiece seating air blow off if machine user parameter No. 15 "CHUCK,
SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK, 14, turns seating air blow off when the sit condition
monitor stops" or "CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK, 9, turns seating air blow off
when workpiece is unclamped" has been set to "Checked."
* No. 15, CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
14. Turns seating air blow off when the sit condition monitor stops.
9. Turns seating air blow off when workpiece is unclamped.
(1) The M341 command is accepted.
(2) Machine user parameter No. 15 "CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK, 14, turns
seating air blow off when the sit condition monitor stops" is set to "Checked."
If the aforementioned parameter is set to "Checked," the sit condition monitoring mode is exited
as mentioned above. In this case, however, this parameter should be set back to "Not
checked."
This parameter is provided to forcibly exit the sit condition monitoring mode and thus release
the alarm when any seating error is detected.
* No. 15, CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
13. MC: Stop watching work sit
(3) The Chuck Unclamp command (M149, pushbutton input or robot/loader command) is accepted:
(4) Seating Sensor Switch On: Off

This only applies when the sit condition monitoring mode has been entered by the pushbutton
input Chuck Clamp command with the sit condition monitor switch of (2), 3 "Entering the sit
condition monitoring mode" set to On.
This does not apply when the sit condition monitoring mode has been entered by the M340
command.
Note
 The seating air blow is continuously on in the sit condition monitoring mode.
 The sit condition monitoring mode is not exited when alarm A is raised or RESET pressed.
 For (1) to (3) above, the sit condition monitoring mode is exited if it has been entered by the
M340 command or the PB Chuck Clamp command with the seating sensor switch on.
6467-E P-116
3-1-5. Linking the seating air blow

(1) With machine user parameter No. 15 "CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK, 10,
turns seating air blow on when workpiece is clamped" set to "Checked," the Chuck Clamp
command (M148, pushbutton input or robot/loader command) turns the seating air blow on.
This only applies when the specification code "chuck type" is on.
* No.15 CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
10. Turns seating air blow on when workpiece is clamped
(2) With machine user parameter No. 15 "CHUCK, SEATING CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK, 24,
turns seating air blow on when seating/system link SW turns on" set to "Checked," the
workpiece seating air blow remains on while the seating sensor switch or System Link SW is on
(in case of robot/loader interface).
* No.15 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
24.Work sit air turns on while system-link SW turns on.
Note
With this parameter set to "Checked," the following parameter becomes ineffective.
 No.15 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK
 9. Turns seating air blow off when workpiece is unclamped.
 14. Turns seating air blow off when sit condition monitor stops.
Note
Changing the value of this parameter from "Checked" to "Not checked" in the monitoring mode
does not turn the seating air blow off
3-1-6. Protection against air outlet clogging matter

The seating air blow can be independently turned on/off using M codes.
 The M342 command turns the seating air blow on and then is answered.
 The M343 command turns the seating air blow off and then is answered.
Note
 In the sit condition monitoring mode, the M343 command is ignored and immediately answered
back.
 The command is ignored and immediately answered when the machine has been locked.
 The seating air blow started by the M code command can be stopped by pressing RESET (or
MODE RESET).
6467-E P-117
3-1-7. Sit condition confirmation timer

8 Work sit confirmation timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 6000
3-1-8. Robot/loader interface

The following signals are effective for type C robot/loader with the specification code "Chuck Air
Miss Detectable" on.
(1) Seating air blow command (robot/loader -> NC)

The seating air blow remains on while the Seating Air Blow On command is on in the "linked"
mode.
Seating air blow command
Seating air blow
ME61528R0100500080001
[Interlocking of command]
The command is ineffective under either of the following conditions.
 Not in the linked mode (see “1-5-2. Robot/loader Interface Type C”).
 The machine has been locked, the power saved, or alarm A pending.
Note
The command is ignored when the seating air blow has been started by a sit condition confirmation
function other than the command.
For all the functions, the signal turns off when no condition any longer exists for keeping it on.
(2) Seating error (robot/loader -> NC)

The following alarm message appears when the seating error signal turns on in the "linked"
mode.
"3731 Alarm C Sitting abnormal 1"
(3) Sit condition confirmation signal (NC -> robot/loader)

The sit condition confirmation signal (NC -> robot/loader) remains on while the sit condition
confirmation PS is on.
(4) Seating NG (NC -> robot/loader)

The Seating NG signal (NC -> robot/loader) remains on while the sit condition confirmation PS
is off.
6467-E P-118
3-1-9. Seating Error LED

The Seating Error LED lights while the following alarm message is shown.
"1731 Alarm A Work clamp miss *"
"2736 Alarm B Work clamp miss *"
*: Alarm code
3-1-10.Seating Alarm Reset button

Press the Seating Alarm Reset button with the Seating Error LED lit to exit the sit condition
monitoring mode and reset the system.
The Seating Alarm Reset button is ineffective when the Seating Error LED is off.
(Pressing the button with the Seating Error LED off does not quit the sit condition monitoring mode
or reset the system.)
3-1-11.Normally Seated LED

The Normally Seated LED lights while the workpiece is normally seated (the Seating Error LED is
off) in the sit condition monitoring mode.
6467-E P-119
3-2. No. 2 Work Sit Condition Monitor
3-2-1. M Codes
M code Content
M341 Work sit condition monitor OFF
Or, the following M codes may be used depending on the specifications.
M code Content
Note
 For the answer conditions refer to "3-1-1."
3-2-2. Sit condition monitoring mode ON

(1) The M340 (or M484) command outputs the workpiece seating air blow 2 (to be answered back),
and after the timer (see "3-2-7. Sit condition confirmation timer") counts up, the sit condition
monitoring mode is turned ON to check the workpiece seating confirmation 2 PS.
(2) If the Chuck Clamp PB command is accepted with the sit condition monitor switch ON, the
workpiece seating air blow 2 is output. Then after the chuck clamp has been completed and the
timer (see "3-2-7. Sit condition confirmation timer") counts up, the sit condition monitoring mode
is turned ON to check the workpiece seating confirmation 2 PS.
The sit condition monitor is activated in either of the ways mentioned above. Then it operates
depending on the status of the workpiece seating confirmation PS at that time as follows.
 Workpiece sit confirmation 2 PS: ON

…The NC starts constant monitoring for the workpiece sit confirmation 2 PS. (The air blow is
not turned OFF.)
 Workpiece sit confirmation 2 PS: OFF

… The following alarm message appears.
"2736 alarm B Work clamp miss *** ‘$$$’"
*** = 1 : The seated condition confirmation signal 1 went OFF within the
time set at the "work sitting confirmation timer" when the
monitoring function was ON.
$$$ = R : Work right side
6467-E P-120
3-2-3. Constant monitoring in work sit condition monitoring mode

 If the work sit condition confirmation 2 PS remains OFF for 0.5 second or more in the work sit
condition monitoring mode during spindle rotation, the following alarm message appears.
"1731 alarm A Work clamp miss *** ‘$$$’"
*** = 1 : The seated condition confirmation signal 1 went OFF while the
spindle was running
*** = 201 : The seated condition confirmation signal 2 went OFF while the
spindle was running.
condition monitoring mode when the spindle is at a standstill and the NC is running, the
following alarm message appears.
"2736 alarm B Work clamp miss *** ‘$$$’"
*** = 202 : The seated condition confirmation signal 2 remained OFF for
more than 0.5 seconds when the spindle was at rest with the
monitoring function ON.
condition monitoring mode when the spindle is at a standstill and the NC is not running, the
"4770 alarm D Work clamp miss *** ‘$$$’"
more than 0.5 seconds when spindle was at rest with the
3-2-4. Sit condition monitoring mode OFF

The sit condition monitoring mode can be turned OFF from one of the following fours conditions.
Exiting the sit condition monitoring mode does not turn the workpiece seating air blow 2 OFF.
If MC USER PARAMETER "No. 15 CHUCK 14. WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY STOP WATCHING
WORK SIT" or "No. 15 CHUCK 9. WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY CHUCK OPEN" has been
"Checked", however, the workpiece seating air blow 2 is turned OFF.
(1) The M341 (or M485) command is accepted.
(2) MC USER PARAMETER "No. 15 CHUCK 13. MC: STOP WATCHING WORK SIT" has been
"Checked".
If the parameter above has been set to "Checked", the sit condition monitoring mode is turned
OFF as described above. When the sit condition monitoring mode is turned OFF, the setting
value in this parameter is switched to "Not checked".
This parameter is provided to exit the sit condition monitoring mode forcibly when releasing the
alarm of seating error detection.
6467-E P-121
(3) The chuck unclamp command (M282 or M149 command, pushbutton command, or command
from the robot/loader) is accepted.
(4) The seating monitor switch ON is turned OFF.

This condition does not apply when the sit condition monitoring mode has been entered by the
M340 (or M484) command.
Note
 The workpiece seating air blow 2 is constantly ON in the sit condition monitoring mode.
 The sit condition monitoring mode is not turned OFF even if an alarm A occurs or if reset.
 Regarding the conditions (1) to (3) above, the sit condition monitoring mode is turned OFF no
matter if it has been activated by the M340 (or M484) command or the chuck clamp command
from PB with the seating monitor switch ON.
3-2-5. Link of workpiece seating air blow

(1) When MC USER PARAMETER "No. 15 CHUCK 10. WORK SEATED AIR IS ON BY CHUCK
CLOSE" is "Checked", the workpiece seating air blow 2 is turned ON by the chuck clamp
command (M281 or M148, pushbutton command, or command from the robot/loader).
(2) When MC USER PARAMETER "No. 15 CHUCK 24. WORK SEATED AIR IS ON DURING
SYSTEM-LINK SW ON" is "Checked", the workpiece seating air blow 2 is turned ON while the
seating monitor switch ON is ON or the system link switch ON is ON (when the robot/loader IF
is provided.)
Note
 When this parameter is "Checked", the following parameters are ineffective.
"No. 15-9. WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY CHUCK OPEN"
"No. 15-14. WORK SEATED AIR IS OFF BY STOP WATCHING WORK SIT"
 The workpiece seating air blow 2 is not turned OFF even when this parameter is changed from
"Checked" to "Not checked" during the monitoring mode.
3-2-6. Preventing clogging at air outlet

Only the workpiece seating air blow 2 can be turned ON or OFF by the M codes.
 The M342 command turns ON the workpiece seating air blow and the answer is returned.
 The M343 command turns OFF the workpiece seating air blow and the answer is returned.
Note
 The M343 command is ignored during the sit condition monitoring mode, and the answer is
returned immediately.
 The answer is returned immediately during machine lock ON, and the command is ignored.
 The workpiece seating air blow output by these M commands is turned OFF by reset (including
mode reset).
6467-E P-122
MC USER PARAMETER No. 15-1 CHUCK, SIT CONFIRMATION, TAILSTOCK

8 WORK SEATED CONFIRMATION TIMER
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value : 0
Min. value : 0
Max. value : 6000
Unit : 10ms

(1) Seating air blow 2 command (robot/loader → NC)
The workpiece seating air blow 2 is ON while the seating air blow 2 command is ON in the Link
mode.
Seating air blow 2 command
Workpiece seating air blow 2
ME61528R0100500200001
 Not in the Link mode.
 During machine lock ON, power save mode, or an alarm A.
Note
The command is ignored if the seating air blow 2 has been turned ON by the workpiece seating
confirmation other than this command. The output is turned OFF when all the conditions to turn ON
the output are not satisfied any more with any functions.
(2) Seating error (robot/loader →NC)

The following alarm occurs if the seating error signal 2 turns on in the Link mode.
"3731 alarm C Seating abnormal 11"
(3) Workpiece seating confirmation 2 (NC →robot/loader)

The workpiece seating confirmation 2 (NC →robot/loader) is turned ON while the workpiece
seating confirmation 2 PS is ON.
(4) Workpiece seating NG 2 (NC →robot/loader)

The workpiece seating NG 2 (NC → robot/loader) is turned ON while the workpiece seating
confirmation 2 PS is OFF.
6467-E P-123
3-2-9. Workpiece seating error 2 LED

The workpiece seating error 2 LED is ON while the following alarm is being displayed.
"1731 alarm A Work clamp miss *"
"2736 alarm B Work clamp miss *"
"4770 alarm D Work clamp miss *"
*: alarm code
3-2-10.Seating error reset button

When the seating error reset button is pressed with the seating error 2 LED lit up, reset is
processed, along with turning OFF the sit condition monitoring mode.
When the seating error 2 LED is OFF, the seating error reset button is disabled.
(When the seating error 2 LED is OFF, the seating mode is not turned OFF nor is reset started even
if the button is pressed.)
3-2-11.Workpiece seating normal 2 LED

The workpiece seating normal 2 LED is ON while the workpiece seating 2 is normal (workpiece
seating error 2 LED is OFF) with the work sit condition monitor mode ON.
6467-E P-124
3-3. No.3 Work Sit Condition Monitor
3-3-1. M codes
M code Content
OR, the following M codes may be used depending on the specifications.
M code Content
Note

(1) The M340 (or M548) command outputs the workpiece seating air blow 3 (to be answered back)
after completion of chuck clamp is confirmed, and after the timer (see "3-3-7. Sit condition
confirmation timer") counts up, the sit condition monitoring mode is turned ON to check the
workpiece seating confirmation 3 PS.

… The NC starts constant monitoring for the workpiece sit confirmation 3 PS. (The air blow is
not turned OFF.)

"2736 alarm B Work clamp miss *** "

***: 301 : The seated condition confirmation signal 3 went OFF within the
However, constant monitoring for the workpiece seating confirmation 3 PS is continued without
turning OFF the air blow.
6467-E P-125

"1731 alarm A Work clamp miss *** "
***: 301 : The seated condition confirmation signal 3 went OFF while the
***: 302 : The seated condition confirmation signal 3 remained OFF for
"4770 alarm D Work clamp miss *** "

"Checked".
(3) The linked chuck unclamp command (M288, M149 or M450 command, pushbutton command,
or command from the robot/loader) is accepted.

6467-E P-126
Note

command (M287, M148 or M450, pushbutton command, or command from the robot/loader).
seating monitor switch ON is ON or the system link switch ON is ON (when the robot/loader IF
is provided.)
Note
 When this parameter is "Checked", the following parameters are ineffective.

Note
mode reset).

Command: SET, ADD
Initial value : 0
Min. value : 0
Max. value : 6000
Unit : 10ms
6467-E P-127

(1) Seating air blow 3 command (robot/loader →NC)
mode.
ME61528R0100500310001
Note




*: alarm code

6467-E P-128

6467-E P-129
3-4. No.4 Work Sit Condition Monitor
3-4-1. M codes
M code Content
Or, the following M codes may be used depending on the specifications.
M code Content
Note

(1) The M340 (or M595) command outputs the workpiece seating air blow 4 (to be answered back)
after completion of chuck clamp is confirmed, and after the timer (see "3-4-7. Sit condition
confirmation timer") counts up, the sit condition monitoring mode is turned ON to check the
workpiece seating confirmation 4 PS.

… The NC starts constant monitoring for the workpiece sit confirmation 4 PS. (The air blow is
not turned OFF.)


***: 401 : The seated condition confirmation signal 4 went OFF within the
However, constant monitoring for the workpiece seating confirmation 4 PS is continued without
turning OFF the air blow.
6467-E P-130

"1731 alarm A Work clamp miss *** "
***: 401 : The seated condition confirmation signal 4 went OFF while the
"4770 alarm D Work clamp miss ***"

"Checked".
(3) The linked chuck unclamp command (M149 or M451 command, pushbutton command, or
command from the robot/loader) is accepted.

6467-E P-131
Note

command (M148 or M450, pushbutton command, or command from the robot/loader).
seating monitor switch ON is ON.
Note
 When this parameter is "Checked", the following parameter is ineffective.

Note
mode reset).

Command: SET, ADD
Initial value : 0
Min. value : 0
Max. value : 6000
Unit : 10ms
6467-E P-132

(1) Seating air blow 4 command (robot/loader →NC)
mode.
ME61528R0100500420001
Note




*: alarm code

6467-E P-133

6467-E P-134
3-5. Input/Output Signal

(1) Common signal for workpiece seating
Input signal
0022 02 iSERE Seating alarm reset
0022 03 iWSIT Seating detection ON
Output signal
0527 04 oWSER Seating alarm
(2) Workpiece seating No. 1

Input signal
0068 12 iWSIA1 Work sit confirm No. 1
0016 10 iWCAI1 Robot-IF JIG No. 1 seating air blow command
0068 13 iWSNG1 Robot-IF work sit error No. 1
Output signal
0527 05 oWSIA1 Work seating confirm air blow No. 1
0553 12 oWSNGH1 Work sit error No. 1 LED
0553 13 oWSOKH1 Work sit normal No. 1 LED
0525 10 oWSOK1 Robot-IF JIG No. 1 seating confirm
0553 14 oWSNG1 Robot-IF work sit error No. 1

Input signal
0016 13 iWCAI2 Robot-IF JIG No. 2 seating air blow command
Output signal
0527 07 oWSIA2 Work seating confirm air blow No. 2
0525 13 oWSOK2 Robot-IF JIG No. 2 seating confirm
6467-E P-135

Input signal
0069 01 iWCAI3 Robot-IF work sit air blow command
Output signal
0554 02 oWSIA3 Work sit air blow No. 3
0554 05 oWSOK3 Robot-IF work sit confirm No. 3

Input signal
0138 00 iWCAI4 Robot-IF work sit air blow command No. 4
Output signal
0627 06 oWSIA4 Work sit air blow No. 4
0627 07 oWSOK4 Robot-IF work sit confirm No. 4
6467-E P-136
SECTION 4 OPERATION DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE

SPEC
4-1. Automatic Operation Door Functions
4-1-1. Contents of Functions

The Door Open/Close commands include pushbutton input, M code and robot/loader commands.
(1) Operation door operation with pushbutton commands

[Conditions for executing the commands]
The Door Open/Close commands using pushbuttons are effective when all of the following
conditions are met.
 The NC is not running.
 The operation door has been unlocked.
 The operation door is not being opened or closed by M code or robot/loader command.
 The following condition will be added for type B or C robot/loader interface.
The "robot/loader standby position" (iRTRF_b) remains on while "System Linked" (iSYLK)
is on.
With machine user parameter "Robot/loader interface," 4 "Makes Door Open/Close
commands & robot standby position interlock ineffective" set to "Checked," the robot/loader
standby position interlock becomes ineffective.
* "ROBOT LOADER I/F"
4. Door move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made ineffective
[Contents of sequences]
Pressing the "Door Open" button with the operation door unlocked turns the "Door Open" SOL
on and the "Door Close" SOL off.
The operation door is considered completely open when the "Door Open" LS turns on.
Pressing the "Door Close" button with the operation door unlocked turns the "Door Close" SOL
on and the "Door Open" SOL off.
The operation door is considered completely closed when the "Door Closed" LS turns on.
For pushbutton input commands, the last input one takes precedence.
The manually (PB) input Door Open/Close commands are always effective regardless of the
operation mode.
[Special sequences]
Pressing the Reset button during the opening sequence initiated by the pushbutton cancels the
command and turns the "Door Open" signal off.
Pressing the Reset button during the closing sequence initiated by the pushbutton cancels the
command and turns the "Door Close" signal off.
6467-E P-137
(2) Operation door open/close sequences by M code commands

The Door Open/Close commands use the following M codes.
M code Content
M32 Operation door close
M33 Operation door open
The operation door unlock is effective.
The following condition will be added for type B or C robot/loader interface.
 The "robot/loader standby position" (iRTRF_b) remains on when System Linked (iSYLK) is
on.
With machine user parameter "Robot/loader interface," 4 "Makes door open/close
* M command ineffective.
The operation door close command (M32) and the operation door open command (M33)
may be ineffective with some special specifications.
[Content of M32 sequence]
The M32 command unlocks the operation door and then turns the Door Close SOL on and the
Door Open SOL off.
[Conditions for answering M32]

The M32 is answered back 500ms after all of the following conditions are met.
 "Door Open" LS off
 "Door Closed" LS on
 Door Open SOL off
 Door Close SOL on
[Content of M33 sequence]

The M33 command unlocks the operation door and then turns the Door Open SOL on and the
Door Close SOL off.
[M33 answering conditions]

The M33 is answered back when all of the following conditions are met.
 "Door Open" LS on
 "Door Closed" LS off
 Door Open SOL on
 Door Close SOL off
6467-E P-138

Selecting the operating time reduction mode enables the Answer Ignore command.
M32 command
M32 M301......Answered back when the Door Close SOL turns on.
:
M302............Confirms the answer to M32.
M33 command
M33 M301......Answered back when the Door Open SOL turns on.
:
M302...............Confirms the answer to M33.
[Special conditions]
Pressing the RESET button with the M32 command being given cancels the command and
turns the Door Close signal off.
Pressing the RESET button with the M33 command being given cancels the command and
turns the Door Open signal off.
(3) Operation door open/close sequences by robot/loader

The Operation door Open/Close commands from the robot/loader are effective when all of the
following conditions are met.
 The operation door is not being opened or closed by M code command.
 The system is in the "linked" mode.
 The "robot/loader standby position" (iRTRF_b) is on.
With machine user parameter "Robot/loader interface," 4 "Makes door open/close
[Contents of sequences]
The operation door opens when the "Door Open command" (iDROC) turns on.
The operation door closes when the "Door Close command" (iDRCS) turns on.
If the "Door Open command (iDROC)" turns off before the operation door completely opens, the
operation door continues to open until the "Door Close command" (iDRCS) turns on.
If the "Door Close command (iDRCS)" turns off before the operation door completely closes,
the operation door continues to close until the "Door Open command" (iDROC) turns on.
6467-E P-139
4-1-2. Timing chart
Door Open command Door Close command
Door Lock signal

(oODLK)
"Door Closed" LS
(iFDCL)
"Door Open" LS
(iFDOP)
Door Unlock signal

(oODUK)
"Door Lock Pin Inserted" LS

(iDRRP)
Door Open SOL

(oFDRO)
Door Close SOL

(oFDRC)
Answer to M33
(when M33 is specified)
Answer to M32
(when M32 is specified)
ME61528R0100600020001
6467-E P-140
4-1-3. Door status monitoring

If the limit switch does not respond to the Door Open/Close command (Door Open/Close SOL)
within the time preset by the following parameter, the following alarm message appears and the
Door Open/Close SOLs turn off.
"1738 Alarm A Door open/close answer *" (*: code)
Code 1: The opening of the door was not confirmed.

2: The closing of the door was not confirmed.
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER DOOR

1 Door open/close watching timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 600
Programmable unit: 0.1 sec
Note
If the parameter is set to 0, it will be reset to the maximum value (600).
4-1-4. Notes
 The SOL remains off while alarm A is pending or the power is saved.
 The power-off condition is retained and the SOL is kept on during power-up.
Note that, after alarm A is released or the power saving mode is exited or during power-up, the
SOL only turns on when the command and confirmation LS have the same status.
In other words, the Door Open SOL turns on if the "Door Open" LS is found to be on after the
system is powered off and on with the operation door open.
If the "Door Open" LS is found to be off, the Door Open SOL turns off.
In this case, the SOL turns on when an M code command is given.
6467-E P-141
4-2. Operation door closing operation with both hands
4-2-1. Linking the dual-palm starting and operation door closing

sequences
To prevent inadvertent operations and ensure the safety, the system can only be started by pressing
two start buttons with both hands. The two pushbuttons include the NC Start and dual-palm start
buttons.
The start command and operation door closing sequence are linked with each other to eliminate the
need for closing the operation door and improve the operability.
When the operation door is closed, the safety, which is the purpose of the dual-palm start button,
has been ensured and the system can be started with one hand as in usual cases.
(1) Pre-requisite conditions

The dual-palm start button is effective under the condition described below.
The operation door is open in the automatic operation mode and either of the following
conditions exists.
 Starting at the head of the program.
 Starting after M00/M01.
Note that the dual-palm start button is ineffective under the condition described below even if
the above conditions are met.
 The "robot/loader standby position" (iRTRF_b) has been set to "Not checked" for type B or
C robot/loader interface in the linked mode.
With machine user parameter "Robot/loader interface," 2 "Makes cycle start & robot
standby position interlock ineffective" set to "Checked," the above condition will be ignored.
(2) Specifications
If both the NC Start button and dual-palm start button are pressed, the operation door closes.
After the door completely closes (the "Door Close" LS turns on), the both inputs turn off to start
the NC.
The NC Start button and dual-palm start button input signals should turn on/off one second later
or earlier than the other.
Note
This function is only effective when the operation door is not closed. With the door closed, single-
palm starting applies as in usual cases.
ME61528R0100600050001
6467-E P-142
a. Turning-on timing of NC Start and dual-palm start buttons

The one should be pressed within a second after the other is pressed. The door closes if
both are pressed within a second.
If the one is not pressed within a second after the other is pressed, the operation door does
not close and the NC does not start. In this case, the following alarm message appears.
"4727 Alarm D Dual palm cycle start 1"
Code 1: The two start pushbuttons do not become activated within one second.
This alarm is released when both pushbutton inputs turn off.
b. Turning-off timing of NC Start and dual-palm start buttons

With the operation door closed, the one should be pressed within a second after the other
is pressed. The NC starts if both are pressed within a second.
If the one is not pressed within a second after the other is pressed, the NC does not start
(the operation door remains closed). In this case, the following alarm message appears
(after the elapse of one second).
"4727 Alarm D Dual palm cycle start 2"
Code 2: The two start pushbuttons do not become inactivated within one second.
This alarm is released when the NC is reset or started next as described below. (As the
operation door has been closed, the NC can be started next with one hand only.)
0.1 sec
ME61528R0100600050002
c. If either turns off before the operation door completely closes (the "Door Closed" LS turns
on), the door stops closing and starts opening to prevent the NC from starting.
6467-E P-143
(3) Sequences under special conditions
a. If the door closing sequence is not linked, the NC Start signal turns on without performing
the door closing sequence.
[Prerequisite conditions]
This applies under the following conditions with the operation door open.
 Starting in the MDI mode.
 Starting in the manual operation mode.
 One of the following conditions exists in the automatic operation mode.
 Starting with the machine locked.
 Starting by sequence number search or cursor search.
 Starting after completion of block search by return search operation with the
predominant sequence return function.
 Starting after internal operation stop by the predominant sequence return function.
 Starting after sequence return.
 Starting with Single Block on.
* Note that, for starting at the head of the program or after M00/M11, the door closes
as usual even with Single Block on.
 Starting after a pause.
[Content of sequence]
A signal rise triggers the start.
The off-timing is not checked. Only the on-timing is checked.
0.1 sec
ME61528R0100600050003
b. Single-palm starting
With the door closed, the NC starts when the NC Start button is pressed.
 The dual-palm start button input will be ignored.

(The NC does not start if the dual-palm start button is pressed.)
 For type S door interlock, the NC does not start if the NC Start button is pressed after
power-up with the door closed.
6467-E P-144
c. For type B or C robot/loader interface

For the conditions for starting via the robot/loader interface, see Section 1 "Specifications
for Robot/loader Interface Types."
4-2-2. Operation door closing operation with both hands

(1) Outline
The door close pushbuttons should need to be operated with both hands to prevent
entanglement by the door.
The two pushbuttons include the Door Close and dual-palm start buttons.
Note
The Door Open button is operated with one hand as usual (should be pressed solely).
(2) Specifications
If the time lag between the two inputs used for dual-palm door closing operation does not
exceed one second, the Door Close signal turns on.
If either or both of the two inputs turn off before the "Door Closed" LS turns on, the "Door
Closed" LS remains off and the Door Open signal turns on.
After the "Door Closed" LS turns on, the Door Close signal remains on regardless of the status
of the two inputs.
If the time lag between the two inputs used for dual-palm door closing operation exceeds one
second, the following alarm message appears and the operation door does not close.
"4728 Alarm D Dual palm operation 1"
(3) Door status monitoring

If the relevant limit switch does not respond to the Door Open/Close command (Door Open/
Close SOL) within the time preset by the parameter, the following alarm message appears and
the Door Open/Close SOL turns off.
"1738 Alarm A Door open/close answer *" (*: code)
Code 1: The opening of the door was not confirmed.

2: The closing of the door was not confirmed.
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER DOOR

1 Door open/close watching timer
Default: 0
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 600
Programmable unit: 0.1 sec
Note
If the parameter is set to 0, it will be reset to the maximum value (600).
6467-E P-145
4-2-3. Ineffective M code commands

For the system where dual-palm starting and door closing sequences are linked, the door closing
sequence starts as the dual-palm start button is pressed and, after confirmation of the door closed
condition, the Program Start command is accepted.
Therefore, the M code Door Close command in the program becomes unnecessary.
The M code command is made ineffective to prevent entanglement, which would occur if the M code
Door Close command remains effective.
[Specifications]
The M code Door Close command (M32) is ignored without raising an alarm (immediately
answered).
Note that the M code Door Close command (M32) remains effective for the robot/loader interface
type in the linked mode.
Note that the M code Door Open command (M33) remains effective in any case.
4-3. Prevention of entanglement by automatic operation door

A rubber switch is provided at the contact part of the door edge and its status is continuously
monitored to prevent entanglement by the operation door.
4-3-1. Content of sequence

(1) Front safety rubber switch check upon the issue of Door Close command
If entanglement has been detected when the Door Close command is given, the following alarm
message appears and the door does not close regardless of the operation mode.
"1723 Alarm A Door interlock 10"
(2) Front safety rubber switch check during door closing sequence
If entanglement is detected during the door closing sequence, the door stops closing and starts
opening regardless of the operation mode.
 The door opening sequence ends when the Door Open LS turns on, the RESET button is
pressed or an alarm A occurs.
 After the door opening sequence is cancelled by the rubber safety door switch:
a. If the M code Door Close command is given:

If the Open command is given from the robot/loader:
"1723 Alarm A Door interlock 11"
b. If the Door Close command is given using the pushbutton, no alarm is raised.
When the door opening sequence is triggered by the rubber safety door switch input,
the door continues to open until the "Door Open" LS turns on regardless of the
pushbutton status.
6467-E P-146
4-4. Input/output signals

Input bit

0015 01 iFDCL Operation door close SQ
0015 02 iDRRP Operation Door Lock Pin confirm
0021 08 iDROP Automatic door open
0021 09 iDRCP Automatic door close 1
0021 10 iDULC Confirm of Door lock pin pulled out
0021 12 iDRCP2 Automatic door close 2
0027 15 iFDOP Operation Door open SQ
0057 04 iFDSF Operation door safety rubber switch
Output bit

0534 00 oFDRC Operation door close
0534 01 oFDRO Operation door open
0534 03 oODLK Operation door lock SCHMERSAL YV
6467-E P-147
SECTION 5 AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SHUTTER ON

MACHINE SIDE
5-1. Contents of Functions

The automatic open/close shutter commands for the robot/loader installed on the machine side
include pushbutton input, M code and robot/loader commands.
5-1-1. Shutter open/close operation with pushbutton commands

The shutter open/close commands using the pushbuttons are effective when all of the following
conditions are met.
 The NC is not running.
 No alarm A is being raised, not in the power save mode, and not during machine lock ON.
 The shutter open/close command by the M code or the robot/loader is not being executed.
 The "robot /loader retract position (iRTRF_b)" remains ON while "system linked" (iSYLK) is ON.
However, if "4. Door move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made ineffective" of machine user parameter
"ROBOT LOADER I/F" is set to "Checked", the robot/loader retract position interlock is ignored.

However, if the door interlock is set to OFF, the operation door close interlock is ignored.
[Alarm display]
When the command is ineffective, the following alarm is displayed while the pushbutton is held
down.
4774 ALARM-D Command invalid condition * (*: code)
Code 4 : The side door open/close command is issued when the operation door is not
closed.
5 : The side door open/close command is issued when the "robot/loader retract
position" signal is not ON.
6467-E P-148
5-1-2. Shutter open/close operation by M commands

The shutter open/close commands use the following M codes.
M code Description
M32 Shutter close
M33 Shutter open

The M code commands are effective when all of the following conditions are met.
 The "robot /loader retract position (iRTRF_b)" remains ON while "system linked" (iSYLK) is ON.

[Alarm display]
When the command is ineffective, the following alarm is displayed if the M command is executed.
2727 ALARM-B Improper M code * (*: code)
closed.
[M32 answer condition]
M32 is answered back when all of the following conditions are met.
 Automatic open/close shutter close confirmation ON
 Automatic open/close shutter open confirmation OFF
 Automatic open/close shutter close SOL ON
 Automatic open/close shutter open SOL ON
[M33 answer condition]

M33 is answered back when all of the following conditions are met.
 Automatic open/close shutter open confirmation ON
 Automatic open/close shutter close confirmation OFF
 Automatic open/close shutter open SOL ON
 Automatic open/close shutter close SOL ON

6467-E P-149

If the operating time reduction mode is selected, the answer Ignore command can be used.
M32 M301.... Answered back when the shutter close SOL turns ON.
:
M302............... Answer confirmation
M33 M301.... Answered back when the shutter open SOL turns ON.
:
M302............... answer confirmation
5-1-3. Shutter open/close operation by robot/loader

The shutter open/close commands by the robot/loader are effective when all of the following
conditions are met.
 No alarm A is being raised, not in the power save mode, and not during machine lock ON.
 The shutter open/close command by the M code is not being executed.
 The link mode is ON.
 The "robot/loader retract position (iRTRF_b)" is ON.


[Alarm display]
When the command is ineffective, the following alarm is displayed if the open/close command is
issued by the robot/loader.
2727 ALARM-B Improper M code * (*: code)
closed.
6467-E P-150
5-2. Shutter open/close monitor

After the shutter open/close command (open/close SOL output) is executed, if the confirmation LS is
not returned to the command within 60 seconds, the following alarm is displayed to turn OFF the
shutter open/close SOL output.
1738 ALARM-A Door open/close answer * (*: code)
Code 4 : The side door open confirmation is not found.
5 : The side door close confirmation is not found.
5-3. Precautions
 The SOL is turned OFF during an alarm A or power save mode.
 After the power is supplied, the last state when the power is shut off is retained, and the SOL is
output.
 The SOL is output only when the LSs between the command and the confirmation are the same
for the following cases: "after an alarm A is released", "after the power save mode is released",
and "when the power is supplied".
This means, when the power is turned off with the shutter open and then the power is turned on,
the shutter open SOL is turned ON if the shutter open confirmation is ON.
Moreover, if the shutter open confirmation is OFF, the shutter open SOL is also turned OFF.
In that case, the SOL is output when the next shutter open/close command is executed.
5-4. Input/Output Signals

Input
Label Comment
iCDOP Automatic open/close shutter open confirmation
iCDCL Automatic open/close shutter close confirmation
ipCDROP Automatic open/close shutter open PB
ipCDRCP Automatic open/close shutter close PB
Output
Label Comment
oCDRO Automatic open/close shutter open YV
oCDRC Automatic open/close shutter close YV
6467-E P-151
6-1. Overview
This document describes the operations and maintenance of the 2-pallet APC on MU-6300V/ MU-
6300V-L.
The 2-pallet APC is installed on the rear of the machine; which consists of the setup station (setup
ST) that mounts and dismounts workpieces, the pallet station (pallet ST) where pallets finished with
workpiece preparation are placed temporarily, and the carrier station (carrier ST) that carries pallets
between stations.
The carrier ST is driven by the motor power (rotation: PA-axis/travel: PL-axis) and the hydraulic
power (shifter advance/retract, rising/lowering).
ME61528R0100800010001
6467-E P-152
6-2. Pallet Change Command
6-2-1. APC Screen

APC operation status can be checked on the following screen.
Procedure :
1 Press the MACHINE OPERATION key on the additional panel.
2 The machine operation window appears on the right side of the operation screen.
3 Press the APC button in the machine operation window.

1528R0100800020001
4 Then the following APC OPERATION appears.
ME61528R0100800020002
The information details to be displayed are as follows.
APC SEQ. NO. Indicates the APC sequence no.

START OK : Indicates that the APC is ready for start.
Status CYCLE RUN : Indicates that the APC is in cycle operation.
APC INT : Indicates that the APC is operated by manual interruption.
Indicates the APC system condition no.
SYS CON. NO. For the numbers and details to be displayed, refer to "6-16-1. APC System
Condition Code Table" in this manual.
Machine diagnosis messages regarding the APC are displayed.
APC DIAG. For the details of diagnosis message, refer to "6-6-1. Machine Diagnosis
Message List" in this manual.
6467-E P-153
The details of the function keys are as follows.
(1) [F3] (1 CYCLE START)

This function key is enabled when a green triangle is indicated at the upper left of the key.
Pressing this key executes all the APC sequences automatically.
(2) [F4] (RETURN CYCLE)

If the ATC has stopped in middle of operation, press this key to execute operations successively
until APC sequence no. 1.
(3) [F5] (1 STEP ADVANCE)

This function key is enabled when a green triangle is indicated at the upper left of the key. APC
sequence is advanced one step at a time.
(4) [F6] (1 STEP RETURN)

sequence is returned one step at a time.
(5) [F7] (WINDOW CHANGE)

This function key switches the active window. The active window is displayed in a frame.
(6) [F8] (CLOSE)

This function key closes the APC OPERATION screen.
6-2-2. APC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode
Pallet change command
This command exchanges the pallet on the machine table with the pallet on the pallet station.
M code Description Simul/After axis travel

M60 Pallet change command After axis travel
(1) If the pallet change command (M60) is issued when the APC is not at the start position, the
following alarm is displayed.
“2714 ALARM-B APC M command ”1
Code: 1… The M60 command is specified when the APC is not at the start position.
(2) If the pallet change command (M60) is issued when workpiece preparation is not complete, the
“4773 ALARM-D Work preparation unfinished ”
Workpiece preparation completion command
This command completes workpiece preparation by transferring the pallet on the setup station to the
pallet station.

M334 Workpiece preparation completion set Simultaneous with axis travel
6467-E P-154
6-2-3. APC Command in Manual Operation Mode

Manual operation is enabled by using the function keys in the APC screen.
ME61528R0100800050001
(1) 1 CYCLE START

This function key performs the all APC sequences in series.
However, this key is enabled only when the following conditions are met.
 In the manual operation mode
 When a green triangle mark is indicated at the left top of the function key
 When START OK of APC is indicated in green
(2) RETURN CYCLE

This key is disabled with this specification.
(3) 1 STEP ADVANCE

The APC sequences are advanced one step at a time. However, if the mechanical conditions
are insufficient, CYCLE RUN remains displayed. In this case, press the reset button to delete
the CYCLE RUN display, and the press the function key again.
Moreover, this function key is enabled only when the following conditions are met.
 When the operation status is not CYCLE RUN

6467-E P-155
(4) 1 STEP RETURN

The APC sequences are returned one step at a time. However, if the mechanical conditions are
insufficient, CYCLE RUN remains displayed. In this case, press the reset button to delete
CYCLE RUN display, and the press the function key again.

6467-E P-156
6-3. APC manual operation panel

The APC manual operation panel has the following switches, buttons, and lamps.
ME61528R0100800060001
6467-E P-157
(1) WORK LOAD FINISHED lamp

This lamp is lit up when workpiece preparation is complete.
(2) PALLET IN-POSITION lamp

ON: The lamp is lit up when the pallet on the setup station is set at the correct position by
the positioning pin.
Blink: If the PALLET IN-POSITION lamp is turned OFF during APC cycle start, the APC
sequence stops and the PALLET IN-POSITION lamp flashes.
The APC sequence is resumed by pressing the RESTART button after returning the
pallet to the correct position.
(3) WORK LOAD FINISHED button

When the WORK LOAD FINISHED button is pressed after a new workpiece is set to the pallet,
the pallet on the setup station is transferred to the pallet station. Then the WORK LOAD
FINISHED lamp is lit up, enabling the next APC change command.
(4) WORK LOAD RESET button

Press the WORK LOAD RESET button to return the pallet loaded with the workpiece on the
pallet station to the setup station. Then the WORK LOAD FINISHED lamp goes off, transferring
the pallet on the pallet station to the setup station.
(5) Pallet operation lamp

The pallet operation lamp is lit up when a pallet is moving between the setup station and the
pallet station.
(6) MANUAL INT. switch

Turn the MANUAL INT. switch to ON to set the APC in manual interruption mode.
The MANUAL INT. switch should be turned ON so that the APC will not operate erroneously
when attaching or removing a workpiece to/from the pallet.
(7) MANUAL INT. lamp

The MANUAL INT. lamp is lit up when the APC manual interruption mode is ON.
(8) PALLET CLAMP lamp

The PALLET CLAMP lamp is lit up when the pallet on the setup station is clamped.
(9) PALLET CLAMP button

Press the PALLET CLAMP button to clamp the pallet on the setup station.
The button is enabled when APC sequence no. is "1" and when it is not during cycle start.
(10) PALLET UNCLAMP button

Press the PALLET UNCLAMP button to unclamp the pallet on the setup station.
(11) DOOR INTERLOCK lamp

The DOOR INTERLOCK lamp is lit up when the setup door is open during APC cycle start. The
APC sequence stops when the DOOR INTERLOCK lamp is lit up. To resume the APC
sequence, close the setup door properly and then press the RESTART button.
(12) RESTART button

When the APC sequence is stopped with the DOOR INTERLOCK lamp lit or with the PALLET
IN-POSITION lamp flashing, press the RESTART button to resume the APC sequence.
6467-E P-158
6-4. APC Sequence

Pallet change sequence 1/2
7
8
ME61528R0100800070001
6467-E P-159
30
33
35
37
38
Splash guard close/position movement in X-axis travel range (HP4)
ME61528R0100800070002
6467-E P-160
Workpiece preparation completion sequence
50
53
55
57
58
ME61528R0100800070003
6467-E P-161
Workpiece preparation release sequence
70
73
75
ME61528R0100800070004
6467-E P-162
6-5. Restoration Operations

If an APC sequence needs to be restored after a sequence interruption status such as when the
status check limit switch or solenoid had a faulty operation or the emergency stop button was
pressed, the restoration procedure varies depending on the APC sequence no. Perform the
following procedure.
If a sequence is stopped by a faulty operation of the status check limit switch or other switch during
an APC sequence, it is indicated with the diagnosis message.
Do not perform operations other than specified as the machine may be damaged by an erroneous
operation.
Be sure to check that the APC sequence no. is “1” after restoration operation.
If the sequence cannot be restored even after the operation above is performed, contact Okuma
service center.
(1) Press the NC reset button.
(2) Select the manual operation mode.
(3) Press 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP RETURN in the APC operation screen and set APC SEQ.
NO. to "1".
6467-E P-163
6-6. Diagnosis Message

When a condition is not met in mechanical operations and which interferes the operation, the
diagnosis message function displays the insufficient condition.
Procedure :
1 Select a mode from AUTO, MDI, and MANUAL.
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to select MACHINE DIAGNOSIS from the
display change menu.
Then the following MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen appears, in which diagnosis messages are
displayed.
ME61528R0100800090001
6-6-1. Machine Diagnosis Message List
Diagnosis
Diagnosis message Description
no.
15801 APC manual interruption is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
APC manual interruption switch is not set to
OFF.
15822 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not OFF.
15823 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not ON.
15824 Pallet seated PS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine or setup station pallet seating
confirmation signal is not ON.
6467-E P-164
Diagnosis
no.
15825 Pallet seated PS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine or setup station pallet seating
confirmation signal is not OFF.
15826 APC door OPEN LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when
APC shutter open confirmation signal is not
ON.
15831 Pallet EXIST LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when any
of the following cases applies.
[Pallet change sequence]
The pallet presence confirmation signal of the
setup station is not OFF.
[Workpiece preparation sequence]
pallet station is not OFF.
[Workpiece preparation release sequence]
15832 Pallet EXIST LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when any
pallet station is not ON.
setup station is not ON.
pallet station is not ON.
15833 HP3 is not completed. This diagnosis message is displayed when
travel to home position 3 is not complete.
15834 APC door CLOSE LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
APC shutter close confirmation signal is not
ON.
15839 APC arm RISE LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier ST rising confirmation signal is not ON.
15840 APC arm DESCEND LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station lowering confirmation signal is
not ON.
15841 APC arm RISE LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier S station T rising confirmation signal is
not OFF.
15842 APC arm DESCEND LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station lowering confirmation signal is
not OFF.
15843 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
ON. setup station pallet presence confirmation
signal is not ON.
15844 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
OFF. setup station pallet presence confirmation
signal is not OFF.
6467-E P-165
Diagnosis
no.
15846 HP4 is not completed. This diagnosis message is displayed when
travel to home position 4 is not complete.
15847 Shifter advance LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station advance confirmation signal is
not ON.
15848 Shifter advance LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station advance confirmation signal is
not OFF.
15849 Shifter retract LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station retract confirmation signal is not
ON.
15850 Shifter retract LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station retract confirmation signal is not
OFF.
15861 SETUP ST. pallet right position LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the
not ON. pallet in-position confirmation signal of the
15862 STATION pallet EXIST LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
pallet presence confirmation signal of the pallet
station is not ON.
15863 STATION pallet EXIST LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
OFF. pallet presence confirmation signal of the pallet
station is not OFF.
16550 Touch sensor retract is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
completed. touch sensor retract operation is not complete
with the touch sensor specification.
16553 Station side pallet unclamp PS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
ON. setup station pallet unclamp confirmation signal
is not ON.
16554 Station side pallet unclamp PS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
OFF. setup station pallet unclamp confirmation signal
is not OFF.
16992 Movement of Circulation ST. is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
completed. carrier station positioning is not complete.
16993 Pallet unclamp coupler cutting This diagnosis message is displayed when the
confirm is not ON. machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler
disconnection confirmation signal is not ON.
confirm is not OFF. machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler
disconnection confirmation signal is not OFF.
16997 ATC sequence is in machine pallet This diagnosis message is displayed when the
exchange inhibit. ATC sequence no. is not the one to allow pallet
exchange.
6467-E P-166
6-7. Pallet Judgment Function

It is possible to judge whether pallet A or pallet B is set in the table in the machine at present in the
machining program.
To conduct judgment, use either the system variable or the pallet judgment command.
6-7-1. System variable for pallet judgment
Name VPLTK
Description Pallet type in machine
Attribute Read only
Data 1: pallet A
2: pallet B
(0: None or cannot judge)
6-7-2. Pallet judgment command
Command format
RP = * M289
RP = *: pallet data in machine
*:1.....pallet A
*:2.....pallet B
Usage example (program)
:
N100 M60
N200 RP = 1 M289
:
The pallet in machine is determined after pallet change. When the pallet in machine is pallet A, the
program is carried on; if not, an alarm B is raised to stop operation with program N200.
Alarm
 If a command that is not for the pallet in machine is specified, the following alarm is displayed.
2730 ALARM-B Pallet discrimination NG *
Code: 1 Pallet judgment by M289RP = 1. This is not the expected pallet.
2 Pallet judgment by M289RP = 2. This is not the expected pallet.
 If a value other than 0, 1, and 2 is specified in the RP command, the following alarm is
displayed.
2731 ALARM-B Data word: RP *
Code: hex data of command
6467-E P-167
6-7-3. Pallet A/B mode parameter

The pallet is determined according to the data in the following parameter. The parameter is switched
by the control in pallet change operation. Do not change the parameter unless otherwise needed.
MC SYS.PARA: No.3 APC

2 Pallet A/B mode
Command: SET, ADD
Default: 1
Minimum value: 1
Maximum value: 2
Description: 1 = Pallet in machine is pallet A.
2 = Pallet in machine is pallet B.
6467-E P-168
6-8. APC Shutter
6-8-1. Splash Guard Open/Close Command by M Command

The splash guard open/close command is specified with the following M codes.

M32 Splash guard close Simultaneous
M33 Splash guard open Simultaneous
6-8-2. Alarm
(1) If the APC shutter open confirmation LS remains OFF for one second or longer after the APC
shutter has been opened, the following alarm occurs so that the APC shutter does not interfere
with the workpiece while being loaded or unloaded due to air pressure drop during APC
operations.
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation ”
However, if the following parameter is set to "1", the alarm above does not occur.
MC USER PARA: No.17 APC
1. Does not judge "APC door open LS is OFF" Alarm-A
0: Alarm A is raised when the APC door open confirmation LS is OFF.
1: Alarm A is not raised even when the APC door open confirmation LS is OFF.
Default: 0
(2) If the APC shutter open confirmation LS does not turn ON exceeding one second after the APC
shutter open command, the following alarm occurs.
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation ”10’
Default: 0
(3) If the APC shutter open confirmation LS remains ON for five second or longer during the APC
shutter close output, the following alarm occurs.
"1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation OFF "
Default: 0
6467-E P-169
(4) If the APC shutter open confirmation LS has been ON at the APC cycle start with the APC start
position, the following alarm occurs.
"1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation" 11’
However, the alarm condition above is exempted when the splash guard open command has
been specified with the M command.
(5) If the operator door or the stacker crane safety fence is open when the APC shutter open/close
M command is issued, the following alarm occurs.
"4708 ALARM-D Safety interlock" 75’
The alarm is deleted by closing the operator door and pressing the restart button, allowing the
operation to restart.
(6) If the APC shutter open M command is issued during a workpiece preparation cycle, the
following alarm occurs.
The alarm is deleted by pressing the restart button after completion of the workpiece
preparation cycle, allowing the operation to restart.
6-8-3. Reciprocal Interlock Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter Open

The APC splash guard open command (M command) is disabled during coolant discharge (coolant,
thru coolant, and shower washing).
When the APC shutter is not closed, coolant is not discharged even if the coolant discharge
command (coolant, thru coolant, shower washing) is executed (the coolant discharge is not stopped
even if the APC shutter becomes out of closed state during coolant discharge.)
6467-E P-170
6-9. Interlock
6-9-1. Interlock for X/Y/Z/A/C Axes

(1) X/Y/Z/A/C axes travel is banned between APC sequence nos. 6 and 38.
When the movement is banned with interlock, the following diagnosis message appears.
"15327 APC sequence is in axis move inhibit."
(2) X/Y/Z/A/C axes travel is banned when the pallet unclamp confirmation PS is ON.
"15329 Pallet UNCLAMP PS is not OFF."
6-9-2. Manual Feed Operation Interlock

Manual axis feeding is banned between APC sequence nos. 6 and 38.
6-9-3. Coolant Interlock

Coolant discharge is turned OFF during APC cycles.
6467-E P-171
6-10. Pallet Seating Retry

When clamping a pallet with the M60 command, if the pallet seating confirmation does not turn ON
after five seconds after the pallet unclamp output turned OFF, the operation sequence, unclamp →
carrier ST rising → carrier ST lowering → clamp, is repeated again.
ME61528R0100800230001
However, retry is given up to three times, and if the seating confirmation signal is not turned ON after
retry, the following alarm occurs.
"2711 ALARM-B Clamp confirmation" 'APC'

Character string: APC = During a pallet change with the M60 command, the pallet seating
confirmation signal does not turn ON.
ME61528R0100800230002
6467-E P-172
6-11. Pallet Seating Monitoring

To avoid the pallet from falling down during machining due to an abnormal load and pressure
dropping at a pallet clamp piston, the pallet seating state is constantly monitored during machine
operations other than APC sequences.
When the pallet seating monitoring is turned ON and then five seconds have elapsed, and if the
pallet seating detection (iPSIT) remains OFF exceeding the time set in the parameter below, the
"1756 ALARM-A Sitting abnormal" 2

Code: 2 = The pallet seating detection signal remains OFF exceeding the parameter setting time.
Pallet seating detection timer
MC SYS.PARA: No.3-3 APC

36 Pallet sitting watch time
Command: SET, ADD
Default: 10
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 100
Unit: 10ms
Note: Do not change the pallet seating detection timer unless otherwise needed.
6467-E P-173
6-12. Maintenance Screen

The maintenance screen to check the APC state is described below.
Procedure :
1 Select the AUTO, MDI or MANUAL operation mode.
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, the extension key ( ), and the [F1] (MENU
CHANGE) function key. Check the box for APC MAINTENANCE and press [F7] (OK).
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, and select APC MAINTENANCE from the
[APC MAINTENANCE]
ME61528R0100800250001
Displayed label Label Description

PLUS OUT oPLUS Pallet unclamp YV
PUCL IN iPUCL Pallet unclamp confirmation PS
PLSIT OUT oPLSIT Pallet seating air blow YV
PSIT IN iPSIT Pallet seating detection confirmation PS
PARS OUT oPARS Pallet seating face cleaning air blow YV
PLCUT OUT oPLCUT Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection YV
PLCUC IN iPLCUC Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection
confirmation PS
PLCNC OUT oPLCNC Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler connection YV
PFHAD OUT oAPFHAD APC fork high-speed advance YV
PFLAD OUT oAPFLAD APC fork low-speed advance YV
APFAD IN iAPFAD APC fork advance confirmation SQ
PFHRT OUT oAPFHRT APC fork high-speed retract YV
6467-E P-174

PFLRT OUT oAPFLRT APC fork low-speed retract YV
APFRT IN iAPFRT APC fork retract confirmation SQ
PLES IN iPLES Setup station pallet presence confirmation SQ
PARD IN iPARD Setup station pallet in-position SQ
PLE02 IN iPLE02 Pallet station 2 presence confirmation SQ
SGOS OUT oSGOS Splash guard open YV
SPGO IN iSPGO Splash guard open end confirmation SQ
SGCS OUT oSGCS Splash guard close YV
SPGC IN iSPGC Splash guard close end confirmation SQ
APDC IN iAPDC APC door close confirmation SQ
SDLK OUT oSDLK AAPC door lock YV
APDL IN iAPDL APC door lock pin IN confirmation SQ
SPLUS OUT oSTPLUS Setup station pallet unclamp YV
SPUCL IN iSTPUCL Setup station pallet unclamp confirmation PS
SPSIT OUT oSTPLSIT Setup station pallet seating detection YV
SPSIT IN iSTPSIT Setup station pallet seating detection confirmation PS
SPARS OUT oSTPARS setup station seating face cleaning air blow YV
APAU OUT oAPAU APC fork rising YV
IN iAPAU APC fork rising confirmation SQ
APAD OUT oAPAD APC fork lowering YV
IN iAPAD APC fork lowering confirmation SQ
APMI OUT oAPMI APC manual interruption HL
WKPL OUT oWKPL Workpiece preparation completion HL
PLMVL OUT oPLMVL Pallet movement HL
PLTCLP OUT oPLTCLP Pallet clamp LED
HP3 gSHPF3 HP completion 3
6467-E P-175
6-13. Parameter
The parameters for this machine specification are summarized in this section.
Since the parameters have been set properly as default, however, do not change them unless
otherwise specially required.
6-13-1.Machine Axis Parameter

The carrier station consists of the rotation axis (PA) and the travel axis (PL).
Set the zero, P travel limit, and N travel limit in the MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER screen. The axis
name of rotation axis and travel axis is "PA" and "PL", respectively.
Procedure :
1 Select the PARAMETER mode.
CHANGE) key. Check the box for MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER and press [F7] (OK).
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, and select MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER
from the display change menu.
ME61528R0100800270001
Item Description
P TRAVEL LIMIT Software limit in positive direction
N TRAVEL LIMIT Software limit in negative direction
ZERO OFFSET Machine zero
6467-E P-176
6-13-2.Machine System Parameter (machine axis positioning point)

The positioning positions of carrier ST are set.
Procedure :
CHANGE) key. Check the box for MC SYS.PARA: (PLC AXIS POSITION)) and press [F7]
(OK).
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, and select MC SYS.PARA: (PLC AXIS
POSITION) from the display change menu. The pages are displayed by using the page change
key.
[Page 1]
Set positioning data of rotation axis "PA".
ME61528R0100800280001
NO Item Description
1 POSITIONING 1 Setup station position
2 POSITIONING 2 Pallet station position
13 POSITIONING 13 Initial position
14 POSITIONING 14 Pallet clamp position
* Setting values of each positioning point vary depending on the machine specifications.
6467-E P-177
[Page 2]
Set positioning data of travel axis "PL".
ME61528R0100800280002
NO Item Description
6467-E P-178
6-14. Special Operations

The operations described in this section are enabled with the motor axis of the carrier ST. These
operations have been prepared for machine maintenance and adjustment; and are not used in
general operations.
6-14-1.Special Operations with Carrier ST and Rotation Axis (PA-axis)
Procedure :
1 Select the MANUAL mode.
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to display MC USER PARA: (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE)).
4 Locate the cursor to No.1 SYSTEM CHECK MODE. Press the [F1] (SET) function key and
enter "44".
By setting the parameter, "2713 ALARM-B Axis interlock releasing 44" appears.
5 Select the X-axis with the axis selector key (or pulse handle axis selector key).
With the operations above, PA-axis operations are enabled with the rapid traverse key (or pulse
handle).
To cancel the special operation, set the parameter above to "0" and press the reset button.
ME61528R0100800300001
6467-E P-179
6-14-2.Special Operations with Carrier ST and Travel Axis (PL-axis)
Procedure :
CHECK MODE).
enter "44".
5 Select the Y-axis with the axis selector key (or pulse handle axis selector key).
With the operations above, the PL-axis operations are enabled with the rapid traverse key (or pulse
handle).
To cancel the special operation, set the parameter above to “0” and press the reset button.
ME61528R0100800310001
6467-E P-180
6-14-3.Override during APC Sequences

After re-adjusting positioning, the rapid feed override switch is enabled with PA/PL-axis positioning
to check the operation.
Procedure :
3 Press the [F8 (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to display MC USER PARA: (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE).
enter "126".
By setting the parameter, "4703 Alarm-D System check 126" appears.
With the operations above, the rapid feed override switch is enabled for PA/PL-axis positioning
operations.
To cancel the special operation, set the parameter above to “0”.
ME61528R0100800320001
6467-E P-181
6-15. Input/Output Bit

It is possible to check the input state of various machine switches and the output state of lamp, relay,
solenoid valve, and others on the I/O monitor screen.
In this section the input/output bit label names regarding the 2-pallet APC are described. For the
other input/output bits and the usage method of I/O monitor, refer to the maintenance manual.
[Input]
Label Description
iAPFAD APC fork advance confirmation SQ
iAPFRT APC fork retract confirmation SQ
iAPAU APC fork rising confirmation SQ
iAPAD APC fork lowering confirmation SQ
iPLES Setup station pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPLE02 Pallet station pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPARD Setup station pallet in-position SQ
iSTPUCL Setup station pallet unclamp confirmation PS
iSTPSIT Setup station pallet seating confirmation PS
iAPDC Setup station door close confirmation SQ
iAPDL Setup station door lock pin IN confirmation SQ
iPUCL Machine pallet unclamp confirmation PS
iPSIT Machine pallet seating detection confirmation PS
iPLCUC Machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation PS
iSPGO APC shutter door open end confirmation SQ
iSPGC APC shutter door close end confirmation SQ
iHDLPNM APC hydraulic unit pressure normal
iHDL_b APC hydraulic unit oil level normal
iHDM_b APC hydraulic unit ON confirmation
6467-E P-182
[Output]
Label Description
oAPFHAD APC fork high-speed advance YV
oAPFLAD APC fork low-speed advance YV
oAPFHRT APC fork high-speed retract YV
oAPFLRT APC fork low-speed retract YV
oAPAU APC fork rising YV
oAPAD APC fork lowering YV
oSTPLUS Setup station pallet unclamp YV
oSTPLSIT Setup station pallet seating detection air blow YV
oSTPARS Setup station pallet seating face cleaning air blow YV
oSDLK Setup station door lock YV
oPLUS Pallet unclamp YV
oPLSIT Pallet seating detection YV
oPARS Pallet seating face cleaning air blow YV
oPLCNC Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler connection YV
oPLCUT Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection YV
oSGOS APC shutter door open YV
oSGCS APC shutter door close YV
oHDUN APC hydraulic unit ON confirmation
[Operation panel input]
Label Description
iPMIT APC manual interruption ON SA
iAPRST APC restart SB
iWPRE Workpiece preparation completion SB
iWPRR Workpiece preparation release SB
iPLTCLP Pallet clamp SB
iPLTUCL Pallet unclamp SB
iWWGN Workpiece washing gun for setup side SB
[Operation panel output]
Label Description
oAPMI APC manual interruption HL
oWKPL Workpiece preparation completion HL
oPLMVL During pallet operation HL
oPLTCLP Pallet clamp HL
oAPIL During door interlock HL
oPARP Pallet in-position HL
6467-E P-183
6-16. Logic Table
6-16-1.APC System Condition Code Table

The judgment codes **** when "3714 ALARM-C APC system condition ****" occurs are listed in the
table below.
Diagnosis
Code Description
message no.
0101 Pallet unclamp PS on setup side is not OFF. 16554
0102 Pallet unclamp PS on setup side is not ON. 16553
0104 Pallet unclamp LS on machine side is not OFF. 15822
0108 Pallet unclamp LS on machine side is not ON. 15823
0110 Pallet seating PS on machine side is not ON. 15824
0120 Pallet seating PS on machine side is not OFF. 15825
0140 Pallet seating PS on setup side is not ON. 15824
0180 Pallet seating PS on setup side is not OFF. 15825
0201 APC door open LS is not ON. 15826
0202 APC door close LS is not ON. 15834
0204 Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation is not ON. 16993
0208 Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation is not OFF. 16994
0210 Touch sensor retract is not complete. 16550
0280 APC manual interruption is not OFF. 15801
0301 Setup ST pallet presence LS is not ON. 15843
0302 Setup ST pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15844
0304 Pallet ST pallet presence LS is not ON. 15862
0308 Pallet ST pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15863
0310 Pallet presence LS is not ON. 15832
0320 Pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15831
0401 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to setup ST. 16992
0402 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to setup ST. 16992
0404 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to pallet ST. 16992
0408 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to pallet ST. 16992
0540 HP4 is not complete. 15846
0580 ATC sequence no. is not the one for pallet exchange in the machine. 16997
0701 Carrier ST arm advance LS is not ON. 15847
0702 Carrier ST arm advance LS is not OFF. 15848
0704 Carrier ST arm retract LS is not ON. 15849
0708 Carrier ST arm retract LS is not OFF. 15850
0710 Carrier ST arm rising confirmation LS is not ON. 15839
0720 Carrier ST arm rising confirmation LS is not OFF. 15841
0740 Carrier ST arm lowering confirmation LS is not ON. 15840
0780 Carrier ST arm lowering confirmation LS is not OFF. 15842
0880 Setup ST pallet in-position LS is not ON. 15861
0901 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to the initial position. 16992
6467-E P-184
Diagnosis
Code Description
message no.
0902 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to the initial position. 16992
0910 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to the pallet clamp position. 16992
0920 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to the pallet clamp position. 16992
6467-E P-185
6-16-2.APC Input Logic 1/4
ME61528R0100800350001
6467-E P-186
ME61528R0100800360001
6467-E P-187
ME61528R0100800370001
6467-E P-188
ME61528R0100800380001
6467-E P-189
6-16-6.APC Output Logic 1/4
ME61528R0100800390001
6467-E P-190
ME61528R0100800400001
6467-E P-191
ME61528R0100800410001
6467-E P-192
ME61528R0100800420001
6467-E P-193
6-16-10.APC Manual Interlock 1/4
ME61528R0100800430001
6467-E P-194
ME61528R0100800440001
6467-E P-195
ME61528R0100800450001
6467-E P-196
ME61528R0100800460001
6467-E P-197
7-1. Semi-Dry Coolant
7-1-1. Related Commands

The semi-dry coolant discharge can be specified with “the M code command and RT command in
the same block” or “manual operation”.
Regardless of whether the command is given with M code or by manual operation, the last-specified
command remains effective.
7-1-2. M Code Command and RT Command in the Same Block
M Code Commands
During/after axis During machine

M code Description Sequence restart
movement lock
During axis Immediate answer Immediate answer
M285 Semi-dry coolant ON
movement without action without action
Immediate answer Immediate answer
M09 Semi-dry coolant OFF After axis movement
without action without action
RT Command
On receiving an RT command, the machine turns ON and OFF the pump-driving solenoid valve and
supplies oil by the amount required for the purpose of machining.
The pump ON/OFF intervals (pump operation frequency) can be specified in 10 steps.
Command Format
Specify the RT command by entering RT=* (*: an integer between 1 and 10 inclusive) in the block
which includes M285 in the part program.
The larger is the RT command value, the more frequent is the pump operation. This results in
increase in the oil supply amount.
[Example command format]

M285 RT=4
Improper Command Alarm
If the RT value is less than 1 or larger than 10, the following alarm occurs and retains the RT
command specified before occurrence of the alarm.
Alarm B 2784 Data word: RT *

Code*: Improper command value in hexadecimals
6467-E P-198
Pump Operation
When the RT command is normally executed (without alarm 2874) by oil mist ON signal, the
machine turns ON and OFF the oil mist unit according to the RT command value.
The initial RT command value is “4”.
When the power is turned OFF and then ON, the RT value becomes the value specified last.
Pump Operation Timing at Each RT Setting
The diagram below shows the pump ON/OFF timing at each RT value.
RT=4 (Pump operation frequency: once per second)
0.5 sec 0.5 sec
1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec

ME61528R0100900080001
Pump operation Pump operation Pump operation Pump operation

RT command
times/sec frequency ON/OFF time intervals
1 0.25 Once in 4.00 sec 2 sec 4 sec
2 0.33 Once in 3.00 sec 1.5 sec 3 sec
3 0.50 Once in 2.00 sec 1 sec 2 sec
4 1.00 1.00 time in 1.00 sec 500 ms 1 sec
5 1.50 1.50 times in 1.00 sec 333 ms 670 ms
6 2.00 2.00 times in 1.00 sec 250 ms 500 ms
7 2.50 2.50 times in 1.00 sec 200 ms 400 ms
8 3.00 3.00 times in 1.00 sec 167 ms 333 ms
9 4.00 4.00 times in 1.00 sec 125 ms 250 ms
10 5.00 5.00 times in 1.00 sec 100 ms 200 ms
6467-E P-199
7-1-3. Manual Operation

Press the [MACHINE OPERATION] key on the operation panel to display the MACHINE
OPERATION screen. Press the [MIST] button, and then press [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) to
discharge semi-dry coolant. The pump operation frequency is based on the previously specified RT
value.
Manual operation is not affected by the selected NC operation mode.
ME61528R0100900090001
7-1-4. ALL COOLANT OFF

The ALL COOLANT OFF flat key is used to temporarily stop or restart the discharge of all coolant.
E61528R0100900100001
ALL COOLANT OFF key
 During semi-dry coolant discharge, when the above panel button is pressed, the machine turns
off semi-dry coolant output. When pressed again, the machine restarts the discharge of semi-
dry coolant.
 If the semi-dry coolant ON command is issued when all coolant is stopped, the machine ignores
the command. In this case, press the ALL COOLANT OFF button again and then issue the
semi-dry coolant ON command.
* If, however, the semi-dry coolant OFF command is issued before canceling the temporary
stoppage of all coolant, the machine does not output semi-dry coolant even if the ALL
COOLANT OFF button is pressed again.
 The coolant temporary stoppage ON/OFF state is backed up, and the last command remains
effective after machine is rebooted.
6467-E P-200
7-1-5. Linkage with Chip Conveyor

When “Checked” is set at the following parameter, the machine rotates the internal conveyor in
forward direction while the semi-dry coolant signal is ON.
Machine User Parameter COOLANT

Chip conveyor turns on with dry coolant
Not checked: Chip conveyor is not linked with dry coolant.
42
Checked: Chip conveyor is linked with dry coolant.
Initial value: 0
7-1-6. Semi-Dry Unit Low Level Alarm

The following alarm occurs if the oil mist unit level normal signal kept OFF for three seconds or
longer during activation of the semidry coolant unit.
3728 Alarm C Oilmist unit

Code 2-> The oil mist level normal signal kept OFF for more than three seconds when an oil mist
command was issued.
6467-E P-201
8-1. OVERVIEW
On machines with this matrix magazine specification, the tool transfer pot in the tool rack is used to
transfer tools. Then the tools are changed from the spindle to those in the machine.
Tool supply / storage position Next tool preparation station
ME61528R0101000010001
6467-E P-202
8-2. TOOL CHANGE COMMAND
8-2-1. ATC OPERATION Screen

The ATC operating status can be checked in the following screen.
Procedure :
1 Press the Machine Operation key on the machine operation panel. Then the ATC
OPERATION selection screen appears by pressing the ATC button on the right
side of the screen.
1528R0101000020001
ME61528R0101000020002
The information to be displayed is as follows.
ATC SEQ. NO. ATC sequence No.

MAGAZINE POS. NONE is constantly displayed.
ACT TOOL NO. Tool number currently mounted in the spindle
NXT TOOL NO. Next tool number
RET TOOL NO. Return tool number
POT/TOOL Magazine pot number and tool number correspondence table
ACT POSI X: The current position of the X-axis
Y: The current position of the Y-axis
Z: The current position of the Z-axis
6467-E P-203
CONDITION START OK Indicates that the ATC can be started.

CYCLE RUN Indicates that it is during ATC cycle start.
MG INT. Indicates that it is during magazine manual
interruption.
SYS CON. NO. Displays the input logic number required for ATC to
advance.
ATC DIAG. Displays diagnosis messages such as insufficient conditions.
The following describes the details of each function key.
(1) [F1] (SET)

Press this key to set the actual tool number and the next tool number in the manual operation
mode.
This key is enabled only in the manual operation mode.
(2) [F2] (INT LOCK RELEASE)

While this key is being pressed, the conditions for the spindle indexing completion and the tool
change position are disregarded. However, other mechanical conditions are valid.

This key is enabled when a green triangle is displayed on the upper left of the function key.
Pressing this key executes all the ATC sequences automatically.

If the ATC has stopped during operation, press this key to execute operations successively until
ATC sequence no. 1.

Pressing this key advances ATC sequence by one step at a time.

Pressing this key returns ATC sequence by one step at a time.

Switches the active window.
The active window is indicated boxed in the pane.
(8) [F8] (CLOSE)

Closes the ATC OPERATION screen.
6467-E P-204
8-2-2. ATC Commands in AUTO / MDI Operation Mode
Tool Preparation Command to Next Tool Preparation Area
TPRET = **
The magazine provides an area in which 4 tools can be stored in order to reduce the next tool
preparation time.
This command prepares tools to the next tool preparation area. The specified tools are transferred
from the magazine tool rack to the next tool preparation area.
This command can be specified in series, however, the command must be specified prior to the next
tool command (T**) and no next tool command (M63).
Program example
:
M06
TPRET = **
TPRET =∆∆
TPRET =□□
TPRET =◊◊
T**
:
[Command valid conditions]
(1) Not during magazine manual interruption.
(2) The next tool command is not complete.
(3) The command tool no. exists in the tool rack.
(4) The command tool no. is not the "current tool".
(5) There is available space in the next tool preparation area.
If the conditions above are not satisfied, the command is disregarded and tool preparation to the
next tool preparation area is not performed. Then the following alarm appears, allowing the machine
to proceed to the next program.
4774 Alarm D Command invalid condition 36
36: The command is specified when the conditions for TPRET command are not met.
The alarm above is cleared by the M6, M366, or M64 command or by reset.
6467-E P-205
Tool Return Command from Next Tool Preparation Area
TRETT = **
This command returns tools from the next tool preparation area. The specified tool is transferred
from the next tool preparation area to the magazine tool rack.
This command can be specified in series, however, the command must be specified prior to the tool
preparation command to the next tool preparation area, the next tool command (T**) and no next
tool command (M63).
Program example
:
M06
TRETT = ** Tool return command for tool **
TRETT =∆∆ Tool return command for tool ∆∆
TPRET =□□ Tool preparation command for tool □□
TPRET =◊◊ Tool preparation command for tool ◊◊
T**
:
(1) Not during magazine manual interruption
(3) The command tool no. exists in the next tool preparation area.
37: The command is specified when the conditions for TRETT command are not met.
6467-E P-206
Next Tool Command
T**
The specified tool is transferred from the magazine tool rack to the tool delivery position with the
main unit. At this time, the ATC operates until main unit standby.
T00 (Enabled in MDI operation mode only)

This command cancels the next tool. If the sequence number is returned to “1” with a command
such as 1 STEP RETURN, the next tool command may not be accepted. Use this command in such
cases. This command is not accompanied by any machine operations.
(1) Same T command

With this magazine specification, it is possible to specify the same T command as the one that
has already been specified for the next tool.
However, if the specified T command differs from the command that has already been specified
as the next tool, the following alarm appears disabling the T command.
2715 Alarm B Wrong T command 2
2: The T command was executed twice.
(2) T command same as the one for the current tool

If the same T command as the one for the current tool is specified, the following alarm appears,
disabling the T command.
1: The T command same as the one for current tool no. is specified.
(3) If no tool exists in the magazine

Tool presence in the magazine tool rack is managed by the tool presence data set by the
parameter. If there is no tool presence data for the tool rack applicable for the T code, the
following alarm appears, disabling the T command.
However, if the T command is the same as the one for the current tool to be returned or the one
for the return tool, no alarm message appears even if the data indicates that no tool is present
in the tool rack.
51: With the machine equipped with a matrix magazine, there is no pot in the tool rack
for the next tool.
If a T command is specified for a tool not registered in the pot / tool correspondence table, the
following alarm appears and the T command is disabled.
14: The tool number specified with a T command is not registered in the pot / tool
correspondence table.
6467-E P-207
Tool Change Command
M06
Specify this command to mount the next tool waiting at the tool delivery position for the machine to
the spindle.
If the tool change command is specified during magazine manual interruption, the following alarm
appears, allowing the mode to change to STM operation.
34: The tool change command is specified when MG manual operation is not complete.
After the magazine manual operation has been completed, switch the magazine manual interruption
to OFF and press the magazine restart button. This cancels the alarm and resumes ATC sequence.
Current Tool Return (No Next Tool) Command
M63
This command returns the spindle tool to the tool rack. The tool transfer pot is moved to the tool
delivery position for the machine. The ATC operates until main unit standby. The ATC carries out
the sequences before the sequence of waiting for the machine.
(1) If the M63 command is specified after a T command is specified, the following alarm appears,
disabling the M63 command.
2703 Alarm B ATC M command 1
1: The M63 command is specified after a T command.
(2) If the M63 command is specified when no current tool exists, the following alarm appears,
2: The M63 command is specified when no current tool exists.
(3) The presence of tools in the tool rack is managed by the tool presence data set by the
parameter. If the tool presence data indicates that there is already a tool in the tool rack to
which a tool is to be returned, the following alarm appears, disabling the M63 command.
50: A pot exists in the magazine to which the tool is to be returned.
6467-E P-208
Next Tool Return Command
M64
This command cancels the next tool command once specified. Specify this command to store the
next tool in the magazine tool rack moving from the tool delivery position for the machine.
The ATC carries out the sequences from the waiting for the machine status to the ATC start status.
(1) If the M64 command is specified without specifying the next tool command, the following alarm
appears, disabling the M64 command.
4: The M64 command is specified when no next tool exists.
(2) If the M64 command is specified during magazine manual interruption, the following alarm
After the magazine manual operation has been completed, switch the magazine manual
interruption to OFF and press the magazine restart button. This cancels the alarm and resumes
ATC sequence.
6467-E P-209
8-2-3. ATC Commands in Manual Operation Mode

In the manual operation mode, the ATC operation can be performed using the manual operation
function keys on the ATC OPERATION screen.
ME61528R0101000090001
(1) SET
mode.
This key is enabled only in the manual operation mode.
(2) 1 CYCLE START

Performs all ATC sequences in series.
This button is enabled only when the following conditions are met:
 In the manual operation mode.
 The green triangle is displayed on the upper left of the function key.
 The START OK for ATC is indicated in green.
 The ATC sequence no. is “1”
(3) RETURN CYCLE

If the ATC has stopped during operation, press this key to execute sequences continuously until
the sequence number comes to "1".
The operation can be divided into two parts, one part before and the other part after the tool
change arm rotates 180°. If the RETURN CYCLE button is pressed before the arm rotates, the
tool is returned from that position without being changed with the spindle tool. If the RETURN
CYCLE button is pressed after the arm rotates, the cycle starts and the ATC sequence is
performed from that position.
 The START OK for ATC is not indicated in green.
 The change arm has been retracted.
 Step return operation has not been performed.

6467-E P-210
(4) 1 STEP ADVANCE

The ATC sequences are advanced one step at a time. The “CYCLE RUN” display goes off after
completing one step of operation. To advance the sequence further, check that a cycle is not
running, and press the 1 STEP ADVANCE button.
If the spindle indexing completion conditions are not met, the operation permission lamp does
not turn on and the cycle running status is maintained. In this case, the above conditions are
disregarded only while the interlock release button is being pressed and the operation
permission lamp turns on to indicate that the 1-step advance is possible. However, if the
mechanical conditions are not satisfied, the conditions are not disregarded even while the
interlock release button is pressed. In this case, use the diagnosis messages to recover the
conditions that are not satisfied.
 The CYCLE RUN for ATC is not indicated in green.
(5) 1 STEP RETURN

The ATC sequences are returned one step at a time. The “CYCLE RUN” display goes off after
completing one step of operation. To return the sequence further, check that a cycle is not
running, and press the 1 STEP RETURN button.
permission lamp turns on to indicate that the 1-step return is possible. However, if the
 The return cycle operation has not been started.
Note
When an ATC step operation is performed, check the current tool number and the next tool number
and also check that the tool data in the pot / tool correspondence table corresponds with the tool
that is actually inserted before specifying the ATC command in AUTO / MDI mode.
6467-E P-211
(6) INT LOCK RELEASE

Although the conditions for spindle indexing completion are disregarded only while this button is
being pressed during 1-step advance and 1-step return, other mechanical conditions are
regarded. In addition, this button is used to recover the ATC sequence if it stops due to a
sudden power failure. In order to start the ATC sequence, the INT LOCK RELEASE button is
used to forcibly disregard conditions which normally need to be checked. The operator must
check that it is safe to start the ATC sequence, and then press the 1 STEP ADVANCE button or
the 1 STEP RETURN button while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button.
Note
The tool CHANGE arm may collide with the drive key on the spindle if the ATC sequence is
performed without considering the spindle indexing.
If possible, remove tools from the spindle, the tool transfer pot, and the tool CHANGE arm when
performing ATC operation while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button.
Do not perform the ATC operation while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button unless
absolutely necessary.
(7) WINDOW CHANGE

6467-E P-212
8-2-4. Next Tool Command in Manual Operation Mode

If the tool is to be changed in the manual operation mode, the next tool can be specified with the
following procedure. The current tool return command is specified if no next tool is specified.
This command is enabled for both 1-cycle and 1-step operation.
Procedure :
1 Select the MANUAL operation mode. Press the Machine Operation key.
2 The ATC OPERATION screen appears.
3 Locate the cursor to the NXT TOOL NO.
ME61528R0101000100001
6467-E P-213
4 Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu.

The SET pop-up window appears.
ME61528R0101000100002
The setting details of the SET pop-up window are as follows.
TOOL NO. The tool no. input in NXT TOOL NO. is set.
[F5] (TOOL NO.CLEAR) NONE is set at NXT TOOL NO.
[Supplement]
1) The tool number accepts the value between 1 and 99999999.

2) Tool numbers can be set if the ATC sequence number is 1 and the ATC cycle is not
running. The following error occurs if tool number setting is not possible.
8211 Can not set Next tool No.
3) The following error occurs if a tool number not registered in the POT NO./TOOL NO.
TABLE is attempted to be set.
8204 Nonregistered tool
6467-E P-214
8-3. TOOL DATA SETTING
8-3-1. Registering Tool Numbers

When storing tools in the magazine tool rack, it is necessary to specify the correspondence between
the tool number and the tool rack number (pot number). When doing so, the tool type (tool diameter
type, heavy tool) is specified at the same time. The tool diameter that can be stored varies
depending on the tool rack position, and therefore the tool diameter type must be set correctly. If the
tool diameter type is set incorrectly, the stored tool may interfere with another tool. Refer to the
machine instruction manual for a description of tool rack positions and diameters of tools that can be
stored.
Procedure :
1 Press the TOOL DATA SET key to display the TOOL DATA screen.
2 Select the TOOL DATA sheet.
3 Register the tool data.

Press [F1] (TOOL DATA REGIST). Enter the required data such as TOOL NO., TOOL
PROPERTIES (TOOL TYPE, DIA. TYPE, HEAVY TYPE, etc.), and TOOL OFST in the
following screen. Press [F7] (OK).
ME61528R0101000110001
4 Select the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.
5 Set the POT NO. / TOOL NO. TABLE.

Locate the cursor to the desired pot number, and then press [F1] (TOOL SUPPLY).
As the list of tool data that are not mounted in the magazine appears, select the tool number to
be supplied and then press [F7] (OK).
[Supplement]
For the details of tool supply, refer to [2-3-1. INSERT TOOL, 2-3. Operating the MAGAZINE
INFO in SECTION 2 in "OSP-P300S /P300M OPERATION MANUAL, DATA OPERATION"]
Note) For the restrictions by tool diameters, refer to the instruction manual of the machine.
6467-E P-215
[Supplement]
1) The tool number accepts the value between 1 and 99999999.

2) Tool numbers can be set if the ATC sequence number is 1 and the ATC cycle is not running.
The following error occurs if setting is not possible.
3) The following error occurs if a tool is attempted to be set to the pot with a dummy tool. In this
case, set the tool number after clearing the dummy tool.
8208 Can not clear tool No.
4) The tool diameter that can be set has been determined by the machine specification. The
following error occurs if an incorrect tool diameter is attempted to be set.
8215 Tool mount impossible
5) Setting a large-diameter tool is possible only when the previous and the following pots of the
target pot are set to either dummy or empty. The following error occurs if a tool no. is set at
either the previous or the following pot.
8203 Non open pot
6) The following error occurs if a tool no. set as a current tool is attempted to be set.
8208 Can not clear tool No.
6467-E P-216
8-3-2. Registering Tool Presence

Tool presence data are stored for each magazine tool rack. The tool presence status is displayed on
the following screen and can be changed.
However, normally it is not necessary to change the data. If the machine is restored with an
operation in a special manner after it has stopped, change the displayed data only if the data differ
from the actual tool presence.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MC SYS. PARA:
(MATRIX MG TOOL). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000120001
6467-E P-217
3 Press the [↑], [↓], [←] and [→] cursor keys to move the cursor to the tool rack number to be set.
 When a tool is present:

press [F3] (EXIST).
 When no tool is present:

press [F2] (NONE).
ME61528R0101000120002
6467-E P-218
8-4. CALLING / STORING TOOLS IN MAGAZINE TOOL RACK
8-4-1. Magazine Manual Operation Panel

The operation panel shown below is located on the magazine side. This operation panel is used to
collect and store tools from the specified tool rack.
ME61528R0101000130001
6467-E P-219
(1) Touch panel

The touch panel is composed of the MENU screen and five screens that switch to one another.
With the exception of "5. NG tool buffer ST information", the details on the touch panel are
found in "SECTION 28 ATC SUB-OPERATION PANEL in OSP-P300S / P300M OPERATION
MANUAL / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MANUAL No.2"
Note that the tool numbers can be selected only with the TOOL SELECT key on the TOOL /
POT INDEX screen with this matrix magazine specification.
Furthermore, the previous CALL / STORAGE operation data are displayed on the 1. TOOL /
POT INDEX screen.
For the details on the displayed previous CALL / STORAGE operation data, refer to the "8-4-2.
Storing Tools in Magazine Tool Rack" and "8-4-3. Calling Tools from Magazine Tool Rack" to be
described later.

Set this switch to ON [ | ] to perform magazine manual operation. After manual operation is
finished, set the switch back to OFF [○]. The ATC sequence will not start with this switch set to
ON [ | ]

The lamp lights up during magazine manual interruption.
(4) STORAGE button

When this button is pressed, tools in the tool mount / dismount station are stored in the tool rack
with the number specified at TOOL POT NO. on the touch panel TOOL / POT INDEX screen.
This button is enabled only during magazine manual interruption.
The following conditions must be met to store the tools.
 The magazine door is closed.
 The ATC sequence no. is “1”. (Next tool preparation is not complete.)
 Call / storage operation is not in progress.
 The specified tool rack no. is not "0".
 The specified tool rack no. does not exceed the maximum number of tools in the magazine.
 The tool in the specified tool rack is not the current tool, next tool, or return tool.
 There is no tool in the specified tool rack.
 The tool in the specified tool rack is not a dummy tool.
 The tool in the specified tool rack has been registered in the POT NO./ TOOL NO. TABLE.
 There is a tool in the tool mount / dismount station.
 A tool has been inserted in the tool mount / dismount station properly. (When the function to
prevent reverse insertion is provided.)
(5) STORAGE lamp

ON: Indicates that the STORAGE button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that the storage operation is in progress.
6467-E P-220
(6) CALL button

When this button is pressed, the tool of the tool rack no. specified at TOOL POT NO. on the
touch panel 1. TOOL / POT INDEX screen is transferred to the tool mount / dismount station.
The following conditions must be met to enable the call command.
 Call / Storage operation is not in progress.
 The specified tool rack number is not "0".
 The specified tool rack number does not exceed the maximum number of tools in the
magazine.
 The tool in the specified tool rack is not the current tool, next tool, or return tool.
 There is a tool in the specified tool rack.
 The tool in the specified tool rack has been registered in the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE.
 There is a tool in the tool mount / dismount station.
(7) CALL lamp

ON: Indicates that the CALL button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that the call operation is in progress.
(8) NEXT TOOL RETURN button

When this button is pressed, the next tool prepared at the tool delivery position for the machine
is once returned to the original tool rack, allowing the tool to be transferred between the tool
mount / dismount station and the tool rack. This button is enabled only during magazine manual
interruption.
The following conditions must be met to enable the next tool return command.
 The ATC sequence no. is set to the next tool preparation completion sequence.
(9) NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp

ON: Indicates that the NEXT TOOL RETURN button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that the next tool return operation is in progress.
(10) NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button

When this button is pressed, the tool returned to the tool rack once is transferred to the tool
delivery position for the machine by pressing the NEXT TOOL RETURN button. This button is
enabled only during magazine manual interruption.
The following conditions must be met to enable the next tool re-preparation command.
 The ATC sequence no. is “1”.
 The next tool no. is specified.

6467-E P-221
(11) NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION lamp

ON: Indicates that the NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that the next tool re-preparation operation is in progress.
(12) RESTART button

If the ATC sequence and magazine sequence are stopped by the magazine door interlock
function, close the magazine door and press this button to restart.

If the magazine door is opened during an ATC sequence or magazine sequence, the magazine
door interlock is activated to stop the sequence. This lamp lights up when the magazine door
interlock is activated. Press the RESTART button to restart and turn the lamp off.
8-4-2. Storing Tools in Magazine Tool Rack

Perform the following procedure to store tools in the magazine tool rack.
Procedure :
1 Set the MANUAL INT. switch to ON [ | ] on the magazine manual operation panel.
2 Open the magazine manual door.
3 Attach the tool to be stored to the gripper of the tool mount / dismount station.
4 Select the touch panel 1. TOOL / POT INDEX screen.
5 Press the TOOL SELECT key, and then set the tool number for the mounted tool.
Note: The tool rack number must be registered before storing the tool.
6 Close the magazine manual door.
7 Check that the STORAGE lamp on the magazine operation panel is lit.
If the STORAGE lamp is unlit and the NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp is lit on the magazine
operation panel, the next tool must be returned to the magazine tool rack once since the next
tool is prepared in the tool transfer pot. Press the NEXT TOOL RETURN button on the
magazine operation panel.
8 Press the STORAGE button on the magazine manual operation panel.
9 The STORAGE lamp on the magazine operation panel flashes during storage operation. When
the STORAGE lamp goes off and the storage operation is complete, set the MANUAL INT.
switch on the magazine manual operation panel to OFF [○].
6467-E P-222
10 When the storage operation is complete, STORAGE and POT NO. and TOOL NO. of the
stored tool are displayed on the magazine manual operation panel 1. TOOL / POT INDEX
screen.
Furthermore, the tool number and pot number set in step 5 are cleared.
Displays the previous

storage operation data.
ME61528R0101000140001
6467-E P-223
8-4-3. Calling Tools from Magazine Tool Rack

Perform the following procedure to call tools from the magazine tool rack.
Procedure :
2 Select the touch panel 1. TOOL / POT INDEX screen.
3 Press the TOOL SELECT key, and then set the tool number of the tool to be call.
4 Check that the CALL lamp on the magazine manual operation panel is lit.
If the CALL lamp is unlit and the NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp is lit on the magazine manual
5 Press the CALL button on the magazine manual operation panel.
6 The CALL lamp on the magazine manual operation panel flashes during call operation. When
the CALL lamp goes off and the call operation is complete, open the magazine manual door to
remove the tool from the tool mount / dismount station.
7 Close the magazine manual door and set the MANUAL INT. switch on the magazine manual
operation panel to OFF [○].
8 When the call operation is complete, CALL and POT NO. and TOOL NO. of the called tool are
displayed on the magazine manual operation panel 1. TOOL / POT INDEX screen.
Displays the previous

call operation data.
ME61528R0101000150001
6467-E P-224
8-4-4. Errors during Magazine Manual Operation

If the conditions for enabling each command have not been met when the CALL, STORAGE, NEXT
TOOL RETURN, or NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button is pressed, an error occurs and the
error number indicated in the table below is displayed at the tool rack no. column on the magazine
manual operation panel. To release the error, either set the magazine manual interruption to OFF [I]
or press the RESET button of the machine.
Error No. Description Operation

1810 The CALL/STORAGE command was issued during an ATC CALL / STORAGE
cycle. NEXT TOOL RETURN
NEXT TOOL
RE-PREPARATION
1811 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified when the ATC CALL / STORAGE
sequence no. is not "1".
1812 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified to a tool rack CALL / STORAGE
number that does not exist.
1813 The CALL command is specified to a tool rack number having CALL
no pot.
number to which a dummy tool is set.
number to which a current tool is set.
number to which a next tool or next next tool is set.
1818 The STORAGE command is specified with a pot in the / STORAGE
specified tool rack.
1819 The CALL command is specified with a tool in the tool CALL /
attachment / removal ST.
1820 The STORAGE command is specified with no tool in the tool / STORAGE
1821 The CALL command is specified while the reverse insertion CALL /
detection check indicates that a tool is in the tool attachment /
removal ST.
1822 The STORAGE command is specified while the reverse / STORAGE
insertion detection check indicates that a tool is not properly
inserted in the tool attachment / removal ST.
number to which a return tool is set.
1825 The CALL/STORAGE command was issued while the call or CALL / STORAGE
storage command is already being performed.
1826 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified to a tool rack / STORAGE
number to which no tool number is set.
1828 The STORAGE command is specified to a tool rack number / STORAGE
that is in the next tool preparation ST.
1829 The NEXT TOOL RETURN command was issued for a NEXT TOOL RETURN
sequence number other than the main unit standby sequence
number.
1830 The NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION command was issued NEXT TOOL
when the T command was not executed. RE-PREPARATION
6467-E P-225
Error No. Description Operation

1837 The POT SELECT button is pressed when machine user
parameter No.8-6 "Disable the pot selection on the ATC sub
operation panel" is set to "1".
8-4-5. Stopping Magazine Sequence

(1) Magazine sequence stops if the operation mode is changed or the NC RESET button is
pressed during call, storage, next tool return, and next tool re-preparation operations.
(2) Magazine sequence stops if any of the following events occurs during call, storage, next tool
return, and next tool re-preparation operations.
a. An alarm A occurs.
b. An alarm related to the magazine drive motor occurs.
c. Machine lock is activated.
8-4-6. Restoring after Magazine Sequence Stoppage

To restore the magazine after the magazine sequence has stopped by changing the operation mode
or by pressing the NC RESET button during call, storage, next tool return, and next tool re-
preparation operations, use 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP RETURN while referring to "8-2-3. ATC
Commands in Manual Operation Mode".
6467-E P-226
8-5. PARAMETER SETTING

The parameters described below have been added to this specification.
Do not change these parameters unless there is a specific need to do so, since they have already
been set properly at the factory.
8-5-1. Machine Axis Parameter

The tool transfer pot has the following three axes: horizontal axis (MA), vertical axis (MB) and rotary
axis (MC).
Use the machine axis parameters to set the zero, P stroke limit, and N stroke limit. The axis names
of horizontal axis, vertical axis and rotary axis are "MA", "MB" and "MC", respectively.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MACHINE AXIS
PARAMETER. Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000200001
6467-E P-227
8-5-2. Matrix Magazine Positioning Data 1

Set the hanging position and the removal position of each tool.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MC SYSTEM
PARAMETER: (MATRIX MG POS. DATA 1). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following
screen.
ME61528R0101000210001
Setting
Comment Description
unit
HANGING (MA) Set the horizontal axis of the tool grip position with the tool 1/1000
gripper of the tool rack. mm
HANGING (MB) Set the vertical axis (MB) of the tool grip / removal position of 1/1000
the vertical axis with the tool gripper of the tool rack. mm
REMOVAL (MA) Set the horizontal axis (MA) of the tool removal position with 1/1000
the tool gripper of the tool rack. mm
Note: The setting unit above does not depend on the NC setting unit system.
6467-E P-228
8-5-3. Matrix Magazine Positioning Data 2
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MC SYSTEM
PARAMETER: (MATRIX MG POS. DATA 2). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following
screen.
(1) Page 1
ME61528R0101000220001
Setting
No. Comment Description
unit
1 TOOL CHANGE Set the horizontal axis (MA) position of the 1/1000
POSITION (MA) tool delivery position for the machine. mm
2 TOOL CHANGE Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the tool 1/1000
POSITION (MB) delivery position for the machine. mm
3 MANUAL TOOL Set the horizontal axis (MA) position of the 1/1000
CHANGE POS. (MA tool grip position to the tool gripper of the tool mm
HANG ) attachment / removal ST.
CHANGE POS. (MA tool removal position from the tool gripper of mm
REMOVE) the tool attachment / removal ST.
5 MANUAL TOOL Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the tool 1/1000
CHANGE POS. (MB) grip position to the tool gripper of the tool mm
6 POT TURN POSSIBLE Set the vertical axis (MB) position that allows 1/1000
POSITION horizontal travel with the tool gripped in the mm
transfer unit.
6467-E P-229
Setting
unit
7 LOW SPEED BEGIN Set the horizontal axis position to start low- 1/1000
DISTANCE speed operation when gripping in the tool mm
rack gripper. The value is set based on the
distance from the gripping position.
8 LOW SPEED Set the low speed when gripping in the tool %
OVERRIDE rack gripper by the percentage to rapid feed.
9 MANUAL TOOL Not used in this specification. 1/1000
CHANGE RETRACT mm
POS.
10 NG TOOL BUFFER ST Not used in this specification. 1/1000
RETRACT POS. mm
11 NEXT TOOL Not used in this specification. 1/1000
PREPARATION mm
RETRACT POS.
CHANGE POS. removal position from the tool gripper of the mm
(MB REMOVE) tool attachment / removal ST.
(2) Page 2
ME61528R0101000220002
The parameters on page 2 are not used in this specification.

6467-E P-230
(3) Page 3
ME61528R0101000220003
Setting
unit
25 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST Set the horizontal axis (MA) position of the 1/1000
POS.1 (MA HANG ) tool grip position for the tool gripper of the mm
next tool preparation ST1.
POS.1 (MA REMOVE) tool removal position from the tool gripper of mm
the next tool preparation ST1.
27 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the tool 1/1000
POS.1 (MB) grip position for the tool gripper of the next mm
tool preparation ST1.
POS.2 (MA HANG) tool grip position for the tool gripper of the mm
6467-E P-231
Setting
unit
(4) Page 4
ME61528R0101000220004
Setting
unit
CHANGE POS.2 second tool removal position for the tool mm
(MA REMOVE) gripper of the tool attachment / removal ST.
38 MANUAL TOOL Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the 1/1000
(MB REMOVE) gripper of the tool attachment / removal ST.
39 LOW SPEED BEGIN Set the low speed of the vertical axis when 1/1000
DISTANCE gripping in the tool rack gripper by the mm
(VERTICAL) percentage to rapid feed.
6467-E P-232
8-5-4. Machine Axis Positioning Point MC

Set the position of the tool transfer pot rotary axis (MC).
Procedure :
PARAMETER: (PLC AXIS POSITION). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000230001
No. Comment Description Setting unit

1 POSITIONING 1 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when the 1/1000 mm
tool transfer pot grips the tool.
2 POSITIONING 2 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when 1/1000 mm
changing the tool in the tool transfer pot with
the spindle tool.
3 POSITIONING 3 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when the 1/1000 mm
tool transfer pot travels behind the magazine
rack with a tool in the pot.
6467-E P-233
8-5-5. Change Arm Control Parameter

Set the change arm control parameters.
Procedure :
PARAMETER: (ATC ARM PARAMETER). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
(1) Page 3
ME61528R0101000240001
Setting
unit
105 105 Set the tool pot unclamp start angle with the change arm 1 mdeg
override set at 100%.
106 106 Set the tool pot clamp start angle with the change arm 1 mdeg
override set at 100%.
107 107 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle 1 mdeg
with the change arm override set at 100%.
108 108 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle 1 mdeg
with the change arm override set at 100%.
in the manual operation mode or when the change arm
override is not 100%.
in the manual operation mode or when the change arm
override is not 100%.
when changing a heavy or large-diameter tool.
6467-E P-234
Setting
unit
when changing a heavy or large-diameter tool.
at 1 step advance.
at 1 step advance.
at 1 step return.
at 1 step return.
117 117 Set the tool pot unclamp start angle in the manual operation 1 mdeg
mode or when the change arm override is not 100%.
118 118 Set the tool pot clamp start angle in the manual operation 1 mdeg
mode or when the change arm override is not 100%.
6467-E P-235
8-6. MAINTENANCE SCREEN

The ATC MAINTENANCE screen allows the user to check the operation status of the matrix
magazine. This screen is helpful when mechanical failures occur. It can also be used to check
information on tools in the transfer pot.
8-6-1. ATC Maintenance
Procedure :
1 Select AUTO, MDI or MANUAL mode.
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select ATC
MAINTENANCE. Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
(1) Page 1
ME61528R0101000260001
Display Comment Description

<INPUT> ATC input logic currently ON
<OUTPUT> ATC output logic currently ON
CYCLE "1" during ATC cycle, "0"not during ATC cycle
SEQ. NO. ATC sequence no.
CONDITION Condition that is not met for ATC sequence
MA TRG Target position of 1st axis of PLC
MB TRG Target position of 3rd axis of PLC
TLUCKN Specified tool rack no.
SACOME CALL / STORAGE command condition error no.
TPTEX Tool pot tool no.
CALL During COLLECT / CALL operation
STOR During storage operation
NRET During next tool return operation
6467-E P-236

NRES During next tool re-preparation operation
ORI Spindle index completion
HP1 HP completion 1
TLPAD OUT Tool pot advance YV
IN Tool pot advance SQ
TLPBK OUT Tool pot retract YV
IN Tool pot retract SQ
TPCL OUT Tool pot lock YV
IN Tool pot lock SQ
TPUC OUT Tool pot unlock YV
IN Tool pot unlock SQ
TPTEX IN Tool pot tool presence SQ
ATDC OUT ATC door close YV
IN ATC door (shutter) close SQ
ATDO OUT ATC door open YV
IN ATC door (shutter) open SQ
ISCL IN Inner cylinder clamp confirmation SQ
ISUC IN Inner cylinder unclamp confirmation SQ
SCLP IN Spindle tool unclamp cylinder retract SQ
6467-E P-237
(2) Page 2
ME61528R0101000260002
a. Inner state
TPTEX Tool pot tool presence memory
(present: ON, not present: OFF)
Tool pot tool No.
PRET During next tool preparation supply cycle
RETT During next tool preparation return cycle
b. Next tool preparation command buffer

TRETT1 TRET command no. storage 1
TPRET1 TPRE command no. storage 1
6467-E P-238
c. Input/output status of the next tool preparation ST

PRST1 The index next tool preparation ST1 is being selected.
PRST1<MEM> Tool presence memory with the next tool preparation ST1
PRST1<TL NO.> Tool no. of the next tool preparation ST1
6467-E P-239
8-6-2. Matrix Magazine Maintenance Parameter

The MATRIX MG MAINTENANCE PARAMETER screen allows the user to check information on
tools in the tool transfer pot.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MATRIX MG
MAINTENANCE PARAMETER. Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000270001
6467-E P-240

1 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST1 Displays the inner control data of the tool no. mounted in the
TOOL NO. next tool preparation ST1.
5 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST1 Displays the inner control data when there is no tool in the
TOOL EXIST next tool preparation ST1.
9 TOOL POT UNIT TOOL Displays the inner control data of the tool no. mounted in the
NO. transfer pot.
10 TOOL POT TOOL EXIST Displays the inner control data when there is no tool in the
transfer pot.
6467-E P-241
8-7. Maintenance Function

In addition to ordinary magazine operations, the following operations are permitted. These
operations are intended for maintenance and adjustment purposes only and are not used in regular
operations.
8-7-1. Feeding Tool Transfer Pot Using Pulse Generator

The tool transfer pot positioning axis can be moved using the pulse generator in order to relocate
the tool transfer pot or forcibly recover the machine from an abnormal condition.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MC USER
PARAMETER: (SYSTEM CHECK MODE). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000290001
3 Select "1.SYSTEM CHECK MODE" from SYSTEM CHECK MODE using the cursor key.
4 Select [F1] (SET) to enter "69".
5 When the MANUAL mode is selected, the following alarm appears, enabling the operation.
2713 Alarm B Axis interlock releasing 69
6 Select the pulse generator for manual axis feed selection.

X-axis → Horizontal axis (MA)
Y-axis → Vertical axis (MB)
Z-axis → Rotary axis (MC)
6467-E P-242
8-7-2. Override during ATC Cycle

To check operation after readjusting the position, the rapid feed override switch can also be used for
positioning of the tool transfer pot.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) and use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to select MC USER
PARAMETER: (SYSTEM CHECK MODE). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following screen.
ME61528R0101000300001
5 When the MANUAL mode is selected, the following alarm appears, enabling the rapid feed
override switch.
4703 Alarm D System check 70
6467-E P-243
8-7-3. Tool transfer pot override

It is possible to set the override value to the feedrate of tool transfer pot to slow the operation speed.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE). Then select MC USER PARA:(MAGAZINE) from the
DISPLAY CHANGE menu.
ME61528R0101000310001
Setting
unit
17 MATRIX MG MA-AXIS Sets the override rate to the axis parallel to %
(HORIZONTAL) magazine fence (MA-axis).
OVERRIDE
18 MATRIX MG MB-AXIS Sets the override rate to the axis vertical to %
(VARTICAL) magazine fence (MB-axis).
OVERRIDE
19 MATRIX MG MC-AXIS Sets the override rate to the magazine fence %
(TURN) OVERRIDE turn axis (MC-axis).
6467-E P-244
8-7-4. Magazine tool existence confirmation interlock ineffective

By setting "TOOL EXIST" INTERLOCK IS MADE INEFFECTIVE parameter, the tool can be stored
or collected without tool attaching to the attach/removal station or in the gripper of tool rack.
To use this parameter, "no ID chip" needs to be set in tool information.
Moreover settings made are automatically released after the power is cycled.
Procedure :
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key. Then select MC USER PARA:(MAGAZINE)
from the DISPLAY CHANGE menu.
ME61528R0101000320001

1 “TOOL EXIST” Ignores the interlock for tool existence confirmation
INTERLOCK IS MADE at the magazine manual tool change position.
INEFFECTIVE
6467-E P-245
8-8. DIAGNOSIS MESSAGES

If the machine does not operate due to mechanical conditions not being satisfied, this diagnosis
message display function displays the required conditions.
The following table lists the diagnosis messages and the descriptions.
15705 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step if the spindle tool presence
clamp confirmation (iISCL) is not ON. This message appears in that case.
15706 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step if the spindle tool unclamp
cylinder advance confirmation (iISUC) is not ON. This message appears in that case.
15707 Inside cylinder retract LS is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step if the inner cylinder retract
confirmation (iISCL) is not ON. This message appears in that case.
15712 Spindle index is not completed.
With the ATC, the change arm will not be operated unless the spindle is indexed to the
specified position when turning the change arm or removing or inserting a tool. This
message appears in that case.
15713 Spindle has not stopped.
With the ATC, the change arm will not be operated unless the spindle is stationary when
turning the change arm or removing or inserting a tool. This message appears in that case.
15716 HP1 is not completed.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless any of the axes is
located at the tool change position. This message appears in that case.
15717 Exchange arm RETRACT POS. is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the change arm has completely
returned to the retract position after tool change. This message appears in that case.
15718 Exchange arm GRIP POS. is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the change arm has completely
turned to the tool grip position in tool change sequence. This message appears in that
case.
15719 Exchange arm PULL OUT POS. is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the change arm has moved to the
tool removal position in tool change sequence. This message appears in that case.
15720 Exchange arm 180° POS. is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the change arm has turned 180°
after removing the spindle tool in tool change sequence. This message appears in that
case.
15721 Exchange arm MAGAZINE TOOL INSERT POS. is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the change arm has moved to the
tool insertion position in tool change sequence. This message appears in that case.
6467-E P-246
15732 The conditions in relation to ATC are insufficient.
This message appears when the ATC will not proceed because required conditions are not
satisfied in the internal ATC control.
15750 Magazine manual interruption is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step if the "magazine manual
interruption" switch is not set to OFF or CALL / STORAGE operation is not complete. This
located at the tool change preparation position. This message appears in that case.
located at the retract position for tool change. This message appears in that case.
15780 ATC door OPEN LS is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the ATC shutter
open confirmation (iATDO) is ON. This message appears in that case.
15781 ATC door OPEN LS is not OFF.
open confirmation (iATDO) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
15782 ATC door CLOSE LS is not ON.
close confirmation (iATDC) is ON. This message appears in that case.
15783 ATC door CLOSE LS is not OFF.
close confirmation (iATDC) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
15789 Spindle tool UNEXIST LS does not match ACT TOOL No..
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the no tool in the
spindle confirmation (iSTNE) ON / OFF state agrees with the current tool no. setting state.
This message appears in that case.
15794 X-axis is not in ATC movable area.
With the non-contact sensor for automatic tool length offset, ATC operations are banned
depending on the X-axis position. If the X-axis is not in the ATC movable range, this
message appears.
16043 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the spindle tool
unclamp cylinder advance confirmation (iISUC) is OFF. This message appears in that
case.
16044 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is not OFF.
With the ATC, the NC memorizes that the spindle tool presence clamp confirmation (iISCL)
is once turned to OFF when the spindle tool is unclamped. ATC sequence may not proceed
to the next step if the memory of OFF is not found. This message appears in that case.
6467-E P-247
16076 MG tool breakage detection sensor is not ready.
With the non-contact sensor for automatic tool length offset, ATC operations are banned
unless the sensor is retracted. If the sensor has not been retracted, this message appears.
16870 Magazine pot is not EXIST
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool presence
memory or tool presence confirmation in the tool rack is ON. This message appears in that
case.
The tool presence memory of the tool rack varies depending on the target tool rack.
 With a regular tool rack, tool presence memory that is managed in the tool rack / tool
presence table is not ON.
 With the tool attachment / removal ST, the no tool in the manual tool change position
confirmation (iLLTEX) is not OFF.
16871 Magazine pot is not NONE.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool presence
memory or tool presence confirmation in the tool rack is OFF. This message appears in
that case.
The tool presence memory of the tool rack varies depending on the target tool rack.
 With a regular tool rack, tool presence memory that is managed in the tool rack / tool
presence table is not OFF.
 With the tool attachment / removal ST, the no tool in the manual tool change position
confirmation (iLLTEX) is not ON.
16874 ATC door OPEN confirmation LS is not correct.
This message appears under the following two cases regarding that the ATC shutter open
confirmation input is malfunctioning.
 It is detected that the ATC door open confirmation input remains ON over a certain
period of time with the ATC door closed.
 The ATC door open confirmation input is turned to ON within a certain period of time
(half time of estimated operation time) when the ATC door is opened.
16875 Tool-pot advance end confirmation SQ is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot advance
end confirmation (iTLPAD) is ON. This message appears in that case.
16876 Tool-pot retract end confirmation SQ is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot retract
end confirmation (iTLPBK) is ON. This message appears in that case.
16879 Tool-pot clamp confirmation SQ is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot clamp
confirmation (iTPCL) is ON. This message appears in that case.
16880 Tool-pot unclamp confirmation SQ is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot unclamp
confirmation (iTPUC) is ON. This message appears in that case.
6467-E P-248
16883 Tool-pot advance end confirmation SQ is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot advance
end confirmation (iTLPAD) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
16884 Tool-pot retract end confirmation SQ is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot retract
end confirmation (iTLPBK) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
16887 Tool-pot clamp confirmation SQ is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot clamp
confirmation (iTPCL) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
16888 Tool-pot unclamp confirmation SQ is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the tool pot unclamp
confirmation (iTPUC) is OFF. This message appears in that case.
16889 Transfer pot tool exist confirmation SQ is not ON.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the transfer pot tool
presence confirmation (iTPTEX) and the transfer pot tool presence memory are ON. This
16890 Transfer pot tool exist confirmation SQ is not OFF.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the transfer pot tool
presence confirmation (iTPTEX) and the transfer pot tool presence memory are OFF. This
16891 Tool change horizontal position is not completed.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the horizontal axis
(MA-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been positioned to the tool delivery position for the
machine. This message appears in that case.
16892 Tool change vertical position is not completed.
With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the vertical axis
(MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been positioned to the tool delivery position for the
16893 Pot hang horizontal position is not completed.
(MA-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been positioned to the tool grip position of the tool
rack tool gripper. This message appears in that case.
16894 Pot remove horizontal position is not completed.
(MA-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been positioned to the tool removal position from the
tool rack tool gripper. This message appears in that case.
16895 Pot hang vertical position is not completed.
(MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been positioned to the tool removal position from the
6467-E P-249
16896 Pot vertical retract position is not completed.
(MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot has been moved to the retract position where horizontal
travel is allowed. This message appears in that case.
17010 Tool pot horizontal position is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the transfer unit has been moved
to the horizontal position such as when the transfer unit returns a tool. This message
appears in that case.
17011 Tool pot middle position is not completed.
When the transfer unit travels with a tool gripped, the transfer unit turns to the intermediate
position before traveling behind the magazine rack. ATC sequence may not proceed to the
next step unless this sequence is not complete. This message appears in that case.
17012 Tool pot vertical position is not completed.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the transfer unit has been moved
to the vertical position such as when the transfer unit moves to the tool change position.
17013 Pot remove horizontal position 2 is not completed.
When removing a tool from the tool attachment / removal ST, ATC sequence may not
proceed to the next step unless the second horizontal movement for tool removal is not
complete. This message appears in that case.
17014 Pot remove vertical position is not completed.
proceed to the next step unless the vertical movement for tool removal is not complete.
17015 Pot remove vertical position is not completed.
proceed to the next step unless the second vertical movement for tool removal is not
17056 APC sequence is in tool change inhibit.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step when the APC sequence no. is not the
one to allow tool change. This message appears in that case.
6467-E P-250
8-9. Input/output Signal
8-9-1. Input
Label name Signal

iTLPAD Tool pot advance SQ
iTLPBK Tool pot retract SQ
iTPCL Tool pot lock SQ
iTPUC Tool pot unlock SQ
iTPTEX Tool pot tool presence SQ
iCALL COLLECT/CALL pushbutton SB
iSTOR STORAGE pushbutton SB
iNTRT Next tool return SB
iNTRP Next tool re-preparation SB
iMGIN MG manual interruption ON SA
iMRST MG restart SB
iMDC_b MG safety door close SQ
iMGDL 1st MG door lock pin insertion confirmation SQ
iLLTEX Manual tool change position no-tool confirmation
iLLTEX2 Reverse insertion prevention confirmation
8-9-2. Output
Label name Signal

oTLPAD Tool pot advance YV
oTLPBK Tool pot retract YV
oTPCL Tool pot lock YV
oTPUC Tool pot unlock YV
oMGMI MG manual interruption ON HL
oMGD During MG door interlock HL
oCALL Call possible / during call HL
oSTOR Storage possible / during storage HL
oNTRT Next tool return possible / during return HL
oNTRP Next tool re-preparation possible / during re-preparation HL
oMDLK MG door lock YV
6467-E P-251
8-10. LOGIC TABLES
8-10-1.ATC System Condition Code Table

The table below describes the judgment codes (****) for the following alarm.
3705 Alarm C ATC system condition ****
Diagnosis
Code confirmation
message no.
0101 The pot removal vertical position travel is not complete. 17014
0102 The pot removal vertical position travel 2 is not complete. 17015
0104 The transfer pot tool presence confirmation is not ON. 16889
0108 The transfer pot tool presence confirmation is not OFF. 16890
0110 The ATC door open LS is not OFF. 15781
0120 The ATC door open LS is not ON. 15780
0140 The ATC door close LS is not ON. 15782
0180 The ATC door close LS is not OFF. 15783
0201 The spindle tool outer cylinder unclamp LS is not OFF. 15703
0202 The spindle tool clamp LS is not ON. 15704
0204 The spindle tool clamp LS is not ON. 15705
0208 The spindle tool unclamp LS is not ON. 15706
0210 The inner cylinder retract confirmation LS is not ON. 15707
0220 The spindle tool clamp LS is not OFF. 16044
0240 The spindle tool unclamp LS is not OFF. 16043
0301 The ATC door open confirmation is not normal. 16874
0302 The tool pot clamp confirmation is not ON. 16879
0304 The tool pot unclamp confirmation is not ON. 16880
0308 The tool pot advance end confirmation is not ON. 16875
0310 The tool pot retract end confirmation is not ON. 16876
0380 The MG manual interruption is not OFF. 15750
0402 The tool pot clamp confirmation is not OFF. 16887
0404 The tool pot unclamp confirmation is not OFF. 16888
0408 The tool pot advance end confirmation is not OFF. 16883
0410 The tool pot retract end confirmation is not OFF. 16884
0420 The magazine pot is not present. 16870
0440 The no- tool in the spindle LS does not agree with the current tool 15789
number.
0480 The magazine pot is present. 16871
0501 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not complete. 15717
0510 The transfer pot horizontal position travel is not complete. 17010
0520 The transfer pot intermediate position travel is not complete. 17011
0540 The transfer pot vertical position travel is not complete. 17012
0580 The APC sequence no. cannot be used for tool change. 17056
0601 The pot hanging horizontal position travel is not complete. 16893
0602 The pot horizontal travel to the removal position is not complete. 16894
0604 The pot horizontal travel to the removal position 2 is not complete. 17013
6467-E P-252
Diagnosis
Code confirmation
message no.
0608 The pot vertical travel to the retract position is not complete. 16896
0610 The horizontal position travel at tool change position is not complete. 16891
0620 The vertical position travel at tool change position is not complete. 16892
0640 The pot vertical position travel is not complete. 16895
0701 The spindle indexing is not complete. 15712
0702 The spindle is not stationary. 15713
0740 The tool breakage detection sensor is not at the home position. 16076
0780 The X-axis is not in the ATC movable range. 15794
0802 The magazine indexing is not complete. 15714
0901 The HP1 is not complete. 15716
0A04 The change arm 180-degree turn is not complete. 15720
0A80 Neither the next tool nor the current tool is specified. 16023
0C01 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not complete. 15717
0C02 Turning of change arm to the grip position is not complete. 15718
0C04 Turning of change arm to the grip position is not complete. 15718
0C08 The change arm removal position travel is not complete. 15719
0C10 The change arm 180-degree turn is not complete. 15720
0C20 The change arm travel to the magazine tool insertion position is not 15721
complete.
0C40 The change arm travel to the magazine tool insertion position is not 15721
complete.
0C80 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not complete. 15717
6467-E P-253
8-10-2.Logic Table
Input logic 1/6
ME61528R0101000370001
6467-E P-254
Input logic 2/6
ME61528R0101000370002
6467-E P-255
Input logic 3/6
ME61528R0101000370003
6467-E P-256
Input logic 4/6
ME61528R0101000370004
6467-E P-257
Input logic 5/6
ME61528R0101000370005
6467-E P-258
Input logic 6/6
ME61528R0101000370006
6467-E P-259
Output logic 1/6
ME61528R0101000370007
6467-E P-260
Output logic 2/6
ME61528R0101000370008
6467-E P-261
Output logic 3/6
ME61528R0101000370009
6467-E P-262
Output logic 4/6
ME61528R0101000370010
6467-E P-263
Output logic 5/6
ME61528R0101000370011
6467-E P-264
Output logic 6/6
ME61528R0101000370012
6467-E P-265
Manual interlock 1/8
ME61528R0101000370013
6467-E P-266
ME61528R0101000370014
6467-E P-267
ME61528R0101000370015
6467-E P-268
ME61528R0101000370016
6467-E P-269
ME61528R0101000370017
6467-E P-270
ME61528R0101000370018
6467-E P-271
ME61528R0101000370019
6467-E P-272
ME61528R0101000370020
6467-E P-273
SECTION 9 ECOSAVER MADE BY KURODA

PRECISION
9-1. Overview
Ecosaver made by Kuroda Precision can be turned ON/OFF either by the M command or by the
pushbutton on the flat panel.
Ecosaver made by Kuroda Precision can output the signal in the following three steps: oil level MAX,
oil level MID and oil level MIN.
9-2. Command
The semi-dry coolant can be specified either by the M code or in the mist operation screen.
The command specified last takes precedence between the M code command and the manual
operation command.
9-2-1. M code
(1) M code
M code Description
M283 Semi-dry coolant ON by thru-spindle system with oil level MIN
M284 Semi-dry coolant ON by external nozzle system with oil level MIN
M285 Semi-dry coolant ON by thru-spindle system with oil level MAX
M286 Semi-dry coolant ON by external nozzle system with oil level MAX
M406 Semi-dry coolant ON by thru-spindle system with oil level MID
M407 Semi-dry coolant ON by external nozzle system with oil level MID
M09 Oil mist OFF
When the following parameter is "Checked", the M07 command becomes equivalent to the M285
command.
MC USER PARAMETER Coolant

M07 IS SEMIDRY THROUGH COMMAND
Not checked…M07 is not used as the semi-dry thru-spindle system command.
46
Checked…M07 is used as the semi-dry thru-spindle system command.
Initial value: 0
M code Description
M07 Semi-dry coolant ON by oil level MAX thru-spindle system
When the following parameter is "Checked", the oil mist OFF command by M09 is ineffective.

M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE OIL MIST
Not checked…The oil mist is turned OFF by M09.
18
Checked…The oil mist is not turned OFF by M09.
Initial value: 0
6467-E P-274
[Command effective condition]

When all the following conditions are met (AND), the M code command is effective.
 Not during an alarm A.
 Not during power save mode.
 Not during machine lock ON.
 Not during an APC cycle.
 Not during a tool change cycle (including M06).
When the automatic door is set to ON and if the ATC shutter close confirmation signal is not ON
immediately after tool change, the following message is displayed, resulting in continuing STM
operation.
“15514 ATC door CLOSE LS is not ON.”
[Answer condition]
 The M283 command is answered back with "Ecosaver output oil level MIN" set and the "SOL on
discharge port thru side" output ON.
 The M284 command is answered back with "Ecosaver output oil level MIN" set and the "SOL on
discharge port nozzle side" output ON.
 The M285 command is answered back with "Ecosaver output oil level MIN" or "Ecosaver output
oil level MAX" set and the "SOL on discharge port thru side" output ON.
oil level MAX" set and the "SOL on discharge port nozzle side" output ON.
oil level MID" set and the "SOL on discharge port thru side" output ON.
oil level MID" set and the "SOL on discharge port nozzle side" output ON.
[Operation detail]
 The M283 command turns OFF "Ecosaver output oil level MAX" and "SOL on discharge port
nozzle side", and turns ON "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "SOL on discharge port thru side"
and the panel lamp.
 The M284 command turns OFF "Ecosaver output oil level MAX" and "SOL on discharge port
thru side", and turns ON "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "SOL on discharge port nozzle side"
and the panel lamp.
 The M285 command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port nozzle side", and turns ON "Ecosaver
output oil level MIN", "Ecosaver output oil level MAX", "SOL on discharge port thru side" and the
panel lamp.
 The M286 command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port thru side", and turns ON "Ecosaver
output oil level MAX", "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "SOL on discharge port nozzle side" and
the panel lamp.
6467-E P-275
 The M406 command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port thru side", and turns ON "Ecosaver
output oil level MID", "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "SOL on discharge port nozzle side" and
the panel lamp.
 The M407 command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port nozzle side", and turns ON "Ecosaver
output oil level MID", "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "SOL on discharge port thru side" and the
panel lamp.
9-2-2. Manual operation SW

(1) Oil mist thru-spindle system
[Effective condition]
When the following parameter is ON, the oil mist command in the thru-spindle system is
effective by the pushbutton.
"SEMIDRY THROUGH" SW IS ACTIVE
Not checked… The semi-dry thru command by the pushbutton is ineffective.
44
Checked… The semi-dry thru command by the pushbutton is effective.
Initial value: 0
* Setting this parameter is not necessary for general operation.
[Command method]
After pressing the MACHINE OPERATION flat panel key, the following function keys appear by
touching the MIST key in the "machine operation selection key" display area.
The semi-dry thru-spindle system ON command can be issued by pressing [F3] (SEMIDRY
THROUGH).
The oil amount is determined by the M code specified last.
By pressing [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) again during the output in semi-dry thru-spindle
system (the [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) key is displayed as pressed), the semi-dry thru-
spindle system OFF command can be issued.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
ME61528R0101100040001
MIST OPERATION screen
[Command condition]
When all the following conditions are met (AND), the pushbutton command is effective.
6467-E P-276
[Control specifications]
The semi-dry thru-spindle system command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port nozzle side"
and "semi-dry nozzle output (SWOP)", and turns ON "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "Ecosaver
output oil level MID", "Ecosaver output oil level MAX" (*1), "semi-dry thru-spindle output
(SWOP)" and "SOL on discharge port thru side".
The [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) key is displayed as pressed when the "semi-dry thru-spindle
output (SWOP)" turns ON.
By pressing the [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) key again during the output in semi-dry thru-
spindle system (oil level MAX), "oil mist output", "semi-dry thru-spindle output (SWOP)" and
"SOL on discharge port thru side" are turned OFF, putting the [F3] (SEMIDRY THROUGH) key
back in the normal display (not pressed).
Remarks : The commands made by the pushbutton or by the screen operation do not
depend on the operation mode.
(*1) If the M code command specified last is the Ecosaver output oil level MIN : ON
command with oil level MAX, Ecosaver output oil level MID : OFF
Ecosaver output oil level MAX : ON
If the M code command specified last is the Ecosaver output oil level MIN : ON
command with oil level MID, Ecosaver output oil level MID : ON
Ecosaver output oil level MAX : OFF
command with oil level MIN, Ecosaver output oil level MID : OFF
(2) Semi-dry external nozzle system

[Effective condition]
When the following parameter is ON, the semi-dry coolant command in the thru-spindle system
is effective by the pushbutton.
"SEMIDRY NOZZLE" SW IS ACTIVE
Not checked…The semi-dry nozzle command by the pushbutton is ineffective.
43
Checked…The semi-dry nozzle command by the pushbutton is effective.
Initial value: 0
* Setting this parameter is not necessary for general operation.
6467-E P-277
[Command method]
Press the MACHINE OPERATION flat panel key, and touch the MIST key in the "machine
operation selection key" display area. Then the following function keys appear.
The semi-dry external nozzle system ON command can be issued by pressing [F2] (SEMIDRY
NOZZLE).
The oil amount is determined by the M code specified last.
By pressing [F2] (SEMIDRY NOZZLE) again during the output in semi-dry external nozzle
system (the [F2] (SEMIDRY NOZZLE) key is displayed as pressed), the semi-dry external
nozzle system OFF command can be issued.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
ME61528R0101100040002
MIST OPERATION screen
[Command condition]
When all the following conditions are met (AND), pushbutton command is effective.
6467-E P-278
[Control specifications]
The semi-dry nozzle system command turns OFF "SOL on discharge port thru side" and "semi-
dry thru-spindle output", and turns ON "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "Ecosaver output oil
level MID", "Ecosaver output oil level MAX" (*2), "semi-dry nozzle output" and "SOL on
discharge port nozzle side".
The [F2] (SEMIDRY NOZZLE) key is displayed as pressed when the "semi-dry nozzle output"
turns ON.
Remarks : The commands made by the pushbutton or by the screen operation do not
depend on the operation mode.
By pressing the [F2] (SEMIDRY NOZZLE) key again during the output in semi-dry external
nozzle system (oil level MAX), "Ecosaver output oil level MIN", "Ecosaver output oil level MAX",
"semi-dry nozzle output" and "SOL on discharge port thru side" are turned OFF, putting the [F2]
(SEMIDRY NOZZLE) key back in the normal display (not pressed).
(*2) If the M code command specified last is the Ecosaver output oil level MIN : ON
command with oil level MAX, Ecosaver output oil level MID : OFF
Ecosaver output oil level MAX : ON
command with oil level MID, Ecosaver output oil level MID : ON
command with oil level MIN, Ecosaver output oil level MID : OFF
9-3. Semi-dry unit oil level normal signal

If the semi-dry unit oil level normal signal remains OFF 3 seconds or more with the oil mist
command ON, the following alarm occurs.
"3728 alarm C Oilmist unit 2"
2 : The oil mist level normal signal remained OFF for more than three seconds when an oil mist
command was issued.
6467-E P-279
9-4. Output OFF

When any of the following conditions is met, the semi-dry coolant output is turned OFF and the
command is cancelled.
 Reset (excluding mode reset)
 During an alarm A
 During machine lock ON
 During power save mode
 During a tool change cycle (including M06).
 During APC cycle
 M00, M01(*3)
 M02, M30
 Thru-spindle coolant command (optional specification only)
 Thru-spindle air blow command (optional specification only)

(*3) The semi-dry coolant output is turned OFF by the M00/M01 command only when the
following parameter is "Not checked".

M00/M01 DOESN’T TURN OFF SPINDLE/COOLANT GROUP
Not checked… The spindle and coolant group are stopped by M00 and M01.
20
Checked…The spindle and coolant group are not stopped by M00 and M01.
Initial value: Not checked
9-5. Chip conveyor in link operation

When the following parameter is "Checked", the in-machine conveyor operation signals are output
in conjunction with semi-dry coolant.

CHIP CONVEYOR TURN ON WITH DRY COOLANT
Not checked… The chip conveyor is not linked with dry coolant.
42
Checked…The chip conveyor is linked with dry coolant.
6467-E P-280
9-6. Door interlock in PL specification

When the PL specification is available, the output of semi-dry coolant is disabled with the operation
door open when the following parameter is "Checked".

Oil mist door IL effective
Not checked…The door interlock for oil mist output is ineffective.
38
Checked…The door interlock for oil mist output is effective.
9-7. Simultaneous discharge port by thru-spindle and external

nozzle
9-7-1. Effective condition

When the following parameter is "Checked", both the thru-spindle and the external nozzle can be
output simultaneously.
* This is allowed only with the machine having the structure of "simultaneous discharge port by
thru-spindle and external nozzle".
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER No. 17 Coolant

SEMIDRY UNIT: BOTH THROUGH-SP AND NOZZLE
Not checked…The discharge port simultaneously used by thru-spindle and
4 external nozzle with the semi-dry unit is disabled.
Checked…The discharge port simultaneously used by thru-spindle and external
nozzle with the semi-dry unit is enabled.
* This parameter has been set in the factory for general operation.
9-7-2. Specification detail

(1) Both the thru-spindle and the external nozzle can be output simultaneously.
The following commands can be output by the couple simultaneously: M283 and M284, M285
(M07) and M286, M406 and M407, and [F2] (SEMIDRY NOZZLE) and [F3] (SEMIDRY
THROUGH) in the B-type operation panel.
However, the M codes above cannot be set in the same line next to each other.
Specify the commands in the following way.
M285 (M07)
M286
(2) If a command for a different oil amount is made as follows, the following alarm occurs.
 M284 (external nozzle system with oil level MIN) is specified when output in the oil level
MAX thru-spindle system.
 M407 (external nozzle system with oil level MID) is specified when output in the oil level
MAX thru-spindle system.
6467-E P-281
 M284 (external nozzle system with oil level MIN) is specified when output in the oil level
MID thru-spindle system.
 M286 (external nozzle with oil level MAX) is specified when output in the oil level MID thru-
spindle system.
 M286 (external nozzle with oil level MAX) is specified when output in the oil level MIN thru-
spindle system.
 M407 (external nozzle with oil level MID) is specified when output in the oil level MIN thru-
spindle system.
 M283 (thru-spindle system with oil level MIN) is specified when output in the oil level MAX
external nozzle system.
 M406 (thru-spindle system with oil level MID) is specified when output in the oil level MAX
 M285 or M07 (thru-spindle system with oil level MAX) is specified when output in the oil
level MID external nozzle system.
 M285 (thru-spindle system with oil level MAX) is specified when output in the oil level MID
 M285 or M07(thru-spindle system with oil level MAX) is specified when output in the oil
level MIN external nozzle system.
 M406 (thru-spindle system with oil level MID) is specified when output in the oil level MIN
"2727 alarm B Improper M code 32"
Code 32: M-coded semi-dry output command specifying different oil quantity/pressure
was issued.
(3) When the discharge port can be used simultaneously both by the thru-spindle and the external
nozzle, the switching SOL uses the normally open valve (discharge pot: close with SOL ON).
Hence the outputs are reversed as follows.
With the external nozzle system SOL on the external nozzle side : OFF
SOL on the thru-spindle side : ON
With the thru-spindle system SOL on the external nozzle side : ON
SOL on the thru-spindle side : OFF
With both systems SOL on the external nozzle side : OFF
SOL on the thru-spindle side : OFF
6467-E P-282
9-8. All coolant OFF
9-8-1. Specification details
E61528R0101100110001
Item Description
ALL COOLANT OFF button The coolant group is stopped by turning this button to ON
during coolant group discharge and is resumed by tuning
this button to ON again.
The buzzer sounds when the button is pressed.
PL during all coolant OFF This is turned ON during all coolant OFF.
 By pressing the panel button above during the output of semi-dry coolant, the output of semi-
dry coolant is turned OFF.
During oil mist output OFF after pressing the ALL COOLANT OFF button, semi-dry coolant
output is turned ON by pressing the ALL COOLANT OFF button again.
 If a semi-dry coolant command is issued during all coolant OFF, the semi-dry coolant is not
output. The output of semi-dry coolant is turned ON by pressing the ALL COOLANT OFF button
again.
* If a semi-dry coolant OFF command is issued before ALL COOLANT OFF is released,
however, the output is not turned ON even the ALL COOLANT OFF button is pressed again.
 The M code answer conditions of semi-dry coolant command during coolant temporary stop
are the same as the regular case (M code above [answer condition]). (The answer is returned
when the output condition is met internally.)
 The coolant stopped or stop released state is backed up, and the state is retained even after the
power is cycled.
6467-E P-283

input signal

0054 14 ipSMDNZL Semidry nozzle ON (SWOP)
0054 15 ipSMDTHR Semidry through spindle ON (SWOP)
0040 14 iBLFN BLUBE unit level OK SL
output signal

0549 01 opSMDNZL Semidry nozzle ON (SWOP)
0549 02 opSMDTHR Semidry through spindle ON (SWOP)
0639 08 oECNZ Semi dry oilmist: Outer Nozzle stop YV
0523 14 oECSP Semi dry oilmist: Through SP YV
0526 10 oSMDRMX ECOSAVER oil MAX
0526 11 oSMDRMN ECOSAVER oil MIN
0586 03 oSMDRAL Semi-dry air release
6467-E P-284
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L WITH THE MULTI-PALLET APC
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/

MU-6300V-L WITH THE MULTI-PALLET APC
10-1. Overview
This document is a maintenance manual for MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L with the multi-pallet APC.
The multi-pallet APC consists of the setup station (called setup ST hereafter) where workpieces are
asset up, the pallet table station (pallet table ST) where the pallets are placed, and the carrier station
(carrier ST) where pallets are traversed between the stations.
The carrier ST is driven by the motor (for rotation: PA-axis, travel: PL-axis) and the hydraulic power
(for shifter advance/retract, and rising /lowering).
ME61528R0101200010001
For the operations of PPC function such as schedule registration, loading/unloading, refer to "MU-
6300V PPC (PALLET POOL LINE CONTROL) FUNCTION FOR MULTI-STATION APC".
6467-E P-285
10-2. APC Sequence

1
2
8
9
10
11
12
18
19
20
21
22
28
29
ME61528R0101200020001
6467-E P-286
80
81
82
ME61528R0101200020002
6467-E P-287
,
,
Splash guard close/position movement in X-axis travel range (HP4)
ME61528R0101200020003
6467-E P-288
Loading sequence 1/2
87
88
ME61528R0101200020004
6467-E P-289
Loading sequence 2/2
104
105
Loading answer
ME61528R0101200020005
6467-E P-290
Unloading sequence 1/2
ME61528R0101200020006
6467-E P-291
Unloading sequence 2/2
124
125
Unloading answer
ME61528R0101200020007
6467-E P-292
10-3. APC Screen

Press the “machine operation” key on the machine operation panel and then press the “APC” button
on the screen right. Then the APC operation selection screen appears.
ME61528R0101200030001
APC SEQ NO. Indicates the APC sequence no.

ACT PALLET Indicates the pallet no. on the machine table.
NXT PALLET Indicates the next pallet no.
ACT POS. This is not used with this machine; and always ”0” appears.
APC INT. : Indicates that the APC is operated by manual interruption.
SYS. CON. NO. Indicates the APC system condition no.
Machine diagnosis messages regarding the APC appear.
APC DIAG. The diagnosis message is also displayed on the machine diagnosis screen.
For the details, see “10-5. Diagnosis Messages”.
6467-E P-293

pressed, perform 1 STEP ADVANCE /RETURN operation on the APC screen or on the touch panel.
If a sequence is stopped by a faulty operation of the status check limit switch or other switch, it is
indicated with the diagnosis message. For how to display the diagnosis message screen, see “10-5.
Diagnosis Messages”.
Note
In addition, check that the pallet no. in the pallet station no./pallet no. table agrees with the pallet
no. at each station.
ME61528R0101200040001
service center.
6467-E P-294
10-4-1.Restoration by APC screen

It is possible to perform manual operation by using the function keys on the APC screen.
ME61528R0101200050001
(1) 1 STEP ADVANCE

Operating this key proceeds the APC sequence step by step. If the mechanical conditions are
not satisfactory, however, CYCLE RUN remains indicated. In this case, press this function key
again after resetting the operation to delete the CYCLE RUN indication.
In addition, this function key is effective only when the following conditions are met.
 When the triangle mark in green is indicated at the upper left of the function key.
 When the sequence status is not CYCLE RUN.
(2) 1 STEP RETURN

Operating this key reverses the APC sequence step by step. If the mechanical conditions are
not satisfactory, however, CYCLE RUN remains indicated. In this case, press this function key
again after resetting the operation to delete the CYCLE RUN indication.
In addition, this function key is effective only when the following conditions are met.
 When the triangle mark in green is indicated at the upper left of the function key.
 When the sequence status is not CYCLE RUN.
 When the APC sequence no. is not “1”.

6467-E P-295
10-4-2.Restoration by touch panel screen

1 STEP ADVANCE /RETURN operation can be performed on the touch panel screen.
Procedure :
2 Set the PPC mode to OFF.
3 Set NC optional parameter bit NO.59 bit 5 to “1”.
4 The screen below appears by switching the screen with the touch panel MENU key.
Note
The APC screen is forcibly displayed on the machine operation panel screen when the touch panel
screen below is displayed. To carry out operations other than the APC screen, switch the touch
panel screen
ME61528R0101200060001

ACT PALLET NO. Indicates the pallet no. on the machine table.
NXT PALLET NO. Indicates the next pallet no.
CYCLE RUN : Indicates that the APC is in cycle operation.
Status PLT CHG : Indicates that it is in the pallet change sequence.
CAR. IN : Indicates that it is the carrying-in sequence.
CAR. OUT : Indicates that it is the carrying-out sequence.
SYS CON. NO. Indicates the APC system condition no.
6467-E P-296
APC manual operation

Manual operation can be performed by using the touch panel screen keys.
ME61528R0101200060002
(1) 1 STEP ADV.

By pressing the 1 STEP ADVANCE key and the RUN key at the same time, the APC sequence
can be proceeded step by step.
If the mechanical conditions are not satisfactory, however, CYCLE RUN remains indicated. In
this case, perform one step advance again after pressing the RESET key operation to delete
the CYCLE RUN indication.
In addition, this key is effective only when the following conditions are met.
 When the VAL lamp at the upper right of the 1 STEP ADV. key is lit.
 When the sequence status is not CYCLE RUN
(2) 1 STEP RTN.

By pressing the 1 STEP RTN. key and the RUN key at the same time, the APC sequence can
be reversed step by step.
If the mechanical conditions are not satisfactory, however, CYCLE RUN remains indicated. In
this case, perform one step return again after pressing the RESET key operation to delete the
CYCLE RUN indication.
In addition, this key is effective only when the following conditions are met.
 When the VAL lamp at the upper right of the 1 STEP RTN. key is lit.
 When the sequence status is not CYCLE RUN

6467-E P-297
Interlock with the PPC restart button

If a loading/unloading sequence is interrupted by emergency stop or door interlock, the sequence is
restarted by the PPC restart button. However, if one step advance or return operation is performed
on the touch panel at that time, the sequence restart by the PPC restart button is banned.
Interlock with the CAR. IN/CAR. OUT button

If a loading/unloading sequence is interrupted by PPC reset, the sequence is restarted by pressing
the CAR. IN/CAR. OUT button again. If one step advance or return operation is performed on the
touch panel at that time, the sequence restart by the CAR. IN/CAR. OUT button is banned.
6467-E P-298
10-5. Diagnosis Messages

The diagnosis message function displays the conditions that are not met when a sequence cannot
be carried out due to conditions for the machine operation are not satisfactory.
Procedure :
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to select “machine diagnosis” from the screen
change menu.
The MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen as shown below appears to display the diagnosis
message.
ME61528R0101200070001
Machine diagnosis message list
Diagnosis
no.
15822 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when
OFF. machine/pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not OFF.
15823 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when
ON. machine/pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not ON.
15824 Pallet seated PS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when
machine/pallet seating confirmation signal is not
ON or setup station/pallet seating confirmation
signal is not ON.
15825 Pallet seated PS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when
machine/pallet seating confirmation signal is not
OFF or setup station/pallet seating confirmation
signal is not OFF.
6467-E P-299
Diagnosis
no.
15826 APC door OPEN LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when APC
shutter open confirmation signal is not ON.
15831 Pallet EXIST LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when any
 The pallet presence confirmation signal of
pallet return station is not OFF.
next pallet station is not OFF.
[Loading sequence]
[Unloading sequence]
unloading pallet station is not OFF.
15832 Pallet EXIST LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when any
pallet return station is not ON.
next pallet station is not ON.
[Loading sequence]
pallet loading station is not ON.
[Unloading sequence]
15833 HP3 is not completed. This diagnosis message is displayed when travel
to home position 3 is not complete.
15834 APC door CLOSE LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
ON. APC shutter close confirmation signal is not ON.
15839 APC arm RISE LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station/rising confirmation signal is not
ON.
15840 APC arm DESCEND LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when
ON. carrier station/lowering confirmation signal is not
ON.
15841 APC arm RISE LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when
carrier station/rising confirmation signal is not
OFF.
15842 APC arm DESCEND LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
OFF. carrier station/lowering confirmation signal is not
OFF.
6467-E P-300
Diagnosis
no.
15846 HP4 is not completed. This diagnosis message is displayed when travel
to home position 4 is not complete.
15847 Shifter advance LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station/advance confirmation signal is not
ON.
15848 Shifter advance LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station/advance confirmation signal is not
OFF.
15849 Shifter retract LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station/retract confirmation signal is not
ON.
15850 Shifter retract LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
carrier station/retract confirmation signal is not
OFF.
15861 SETUP ST. pallet right position This diagnosis message is displayed when the
LS is not ON. setup ST pallet correct position confirmation
signal is not ON.
16550 Touch sensor retract is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
completed. touch sensor retract sequence is not complete
with the touch sensor movable specification.
16553 Station side pallet unclamp PS This diagnosis message is displayed when the
is not ON. setup ST/pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not ON.
16554 Station side pallet unclamp PS This diagnosis message is displayed when the
is not OFF. setup ST/pallet unclamp confirmation signal is
not OFF.
16992 Movement of Circulation ST. is This diagnosis message is displayed when the
not completed. carrier station positioning is not complete.
16993 Pallet unclamp coupler cutting This diagnosis message is displayed when
16995 Search/write of return ST/next This diagnosis message is displayed when
ST is not completed. search and write with the pallet return station/
next pallet station is not complete.
* If the machine diagnosis no. is displayed,
check that the pallet no. in the [pallet station no.
pallet no. table] agrees with the pallet no./pallet
presence confirmation signal of each station
setting.
16997 ATC sequence is in machine This diagnosis message is displayed when the
pallet exchange inhibit. ATC sequence no. is not the one to allow pallet
exchange.
6467-E P-301
10-6. PPC Error

If an APC sequence is disabled due to the interlock or other possible causes, the errors in the table
below are displayed on the touch panel.
Error no. Description

01 The specified pallet no. is not found on any station.
02 A setup ST interlock condition applies in loading/unloading operation with the setup
ST. (Setup ST proper position)
03 The restoration command given after the loading/unloading sequence is interrupted is
different from the last one.
04 The required conditions are not met at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
05 A setup ST interlock condition applies in loading/unloading operation with the setup
ST. (Setup ST door close)
08 An alarm A occurs, or an alarm occurs with the travel axis of the carrier station.
41 The axis operation key is pressed when the carrier station/arm advance confirmation
signal is ON.
42 The axis operation key is pressed when the carrier station/arm retract confirmation
signal is OFF.
102 There is no pallet at the setup ST at the start of loading sequence.
103 A pallet exists at the setup ST at the start of unloading sequence.
104 The specified pallet does not exist at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
105 There is no empty station to carry a pallet at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
107 The internal data of the setup ST are wrong at the start of loading/unloading
sequence.
108 The specified pallet exists at the setup ST at the start of unloading sequence.
114 The station no. set to the setup ST is wrong.
115 Presence of pallet no. does not agree with the pallet presence confirmation input ON/
OFF at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
116 System check mode 44 is set at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
128 or 201 The APC shutter is not closed at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
129 or 202 The setup station is not clamped at the start of loading/unloading sequence.
6467-E P-302
10-7. Machine System Parameter (machine axis position)

Procedure :
1 Select PARAMETER mode.
2 Press the following three keys in that order: [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, extension
key ( ), and [F1] (MENU CHANGE) function key. Check the box for MC SYSTEM
PARAMETER (machine axis position) and press [F7] (OK).
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to select MC SYSTEM PARAMETER
(machine axis position) screen from the change menu. The pages are displayed by using the
corresponding change key.
[Page 1]
ME61528R0101200090001
NO Item Description
1 POSITIONING 1 Setup ST position
2 POSITIONING 2 Pallet table station 1 position
6467-E P-303
NO Item Description
15 POSITIONING 15 Carrier ST/rotation position for 180 degrees or more
[Page 2]
ME61528R0101200090002
NO Item Description
1 POSITIONING 1 Setup ST position
15 POSITIONING 15 Carrier ST/rotation position for 180 degrees or more
6467-E P-304
10-8. Special Operations

general operations.
10-8-1.Special operations with carrier station and rotation axis (PA-axis)
Procedure :
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to display MC SYSTEM PARAMETER
(SYSTEM CHECK MODE).
4 Locate the cursor to NO.1 SYSTEM CHECK MODE. Press the function key [F1] (SET), enter
“44”, and press the Enter key.
By setting the parameter, “2713 Alarm B-axis travel restriction condition disabled 44” appears.
5 Select the X-axis with the axis selector (or pulse handle axis selector key).
With the operations above, the PA-axis operation is enabled with the rapid traverse key (or pulse
handle).
ME61528R0101200110001
6467-E P-305
10-8-2.Special operations with carrier station and travel axis (PL-axis)
Procedure :
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to display MC USER PARAMETER
(SYSTEM CHECK MODE).
4 Locate the cursor to NO.1 SYSTEM CHECK MODE. Press the function key [F1] (SET), enter
“44”, and press the Enter key.
By setting the parameter, “2713 Alarm B-axis travel restriction condition disabled 44” appears.
5 Select the Y-axis with the axis selector (or pulse handle axis selector key).
With the operations above, the PL-axis operation is enabled with the rapid traverse key (or pulse
handle).
ME61528R0101200120001
6467-E P-306
10-8-3.Special operations on the touch panel screen

Perform special operations of the rotation axis (PA-axis) and the travel axis (PL-axis) for the carrier
ST on the touch panel screen.
Procedure :
1 Select a mode from AUTO, MDI, or MANUAL.
2 Set the PPC mode to OFF.
3 Set NC optional parameter bit No.59 bit5 to “1”.
4 By switching the screen with the MENU key on the touch panel, the following screen appears.
ME61528R0101200130001
Manual operation
Manual operation is enabled by using the touch panel screen keys.
(1) Select either ROT. or LIN. with axis selection.
(2) Select either FEED for rapid traverse or PH for pulse handle feed with feed mode.
(3) Select the override rate.
With the operations above, the PA-axis and the PL-axis can be operated while the FEED key (+/-) is
being pressed.
6467-E P-307
10-9. PPC operation panel

The setup ST clamp/unclamp switch and the clamp LED are installed on the PPC operation panel
for this machine.
10-9-1.Setup ST clamp/unclamp switch

Clamping
The setup ST is clamped by pressing the clamp switch when the APC sequence no. is “1” or the
sequence status is not in CYCLE RUN.
Unclamping
The setup ST is unclamped by pressing the unclamp switch when the APC sequence no. is “1” or
the sequence status is not in CYCLE RUN.
10-9-2.Setup ST clamp LED

The setup ST clamp LED is lit up when the setup ST is clamped.
The LED goes off when not clamped.
6467-E P-308
10-10.Interlock
10-10-1.Interlock for X/Y/Z/A/C Axes

10-10-2.Manual Feed Operation Interlock

10-10-3.Coolant Interlock
6467-E P-309
10-11.Pallet Seating Retry

after five seconds after the pallet unclamp output turned OFF, the operation sequence, unclamp
→carrier ST rising → carrier ST lowering → clamp, is repeated again.
Pallet unclamp output

(oPLUS)
Pallet seating detection air blow

(oPSIT)
Pallet unclamp confirmation

(iPUCL)
Pallet seating detection confirmation

(iPSIT)
5sec 5sec 5sec

ME61528R0101200200001
Pallet unclamp output

(oPLUS)
ALARM-B
Pallet seating detection confirmation

(iPSIT)
5sec 5sec 5sec

ME61528R0101200200002
6467-E P-310
10-12.Pallet Seating Monitoring

“1756 ALARM-A Sitting abnormal" 2
Code: 2 = The pallet seating detection signal remains OFF exceeding the parameter setting
time.

Command: SET, ADD
Default: 10
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 100
Unit: 10 ms
6467-E P-311
10-13.Maintenance Screen
The maintenance screen to check the APC state is described below
Procedure :
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, the extension key ( ) and the [F1] (MENU
CHANGE) function key. Check the box for PPC MAINTENANCE and press [F7] (OK).
3 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key, and select PPC MAINTENANCE from the
[PPC MAINTENANCE]
6-pallet/10-pallet APC
ME61528R0101200220001
6467-E P-312
[PPC MAINTENANCE]
12-pallet APC
ME61528R0101200220002
Display Description Label

PPC MODE PPC mode ON gPPCIN
PPC RUN PPC schedule operation ON gPPCRUN
M/C , NEXT PL No. Next pallet no. command whWATPLNO
W/S , PL No. Unloading/loading pallet no. wgPPCPND
W/S , OUT , COM Setup ST unloading command gPPCPLTOT
W/S , OUT , HLD Memory during pallet unloading k51PLOTRNM
W/S , IN , COM Setup ST loading command gPPCPLTIN
W/S , IN , HLD Memory during pallet loading k51PLINRNM
PL IN/OUT NG Pallet loading unloading impossible uPPCINOBD
PPC ERROR PPC error uPPCINOER
No. PPC error no. wuPPCALM
APC SQ No. APC sequence no. LOG_SEQ_APC
APC CYCLE During APC cycle LOG_CYCEX_A
PC
CONDITION APC logic machine diagnosis no. whDGSCAPC
HP3 HP completion 3 gSHPF3
HP4 HP completion 4 gSHPF4
PA-AX POS. PA-axis actual position lgPACOM4
PL-AX POS. PL-axis actual position lgPACOM6
M/C UNCLAMP YV Machine pallet unclamp SOL oPLUS
M/C UNCLAMP SQ Machine pallet unclamp confirmation PS iPUCL
M/C SIT YV Machine pallet seating detection air blow SOL oPLSIT
M/C SIT SQ Machine pallet seating confirmation PS iPSIT
M/C PARS YV Machine pallet washing air blow SOL oPARS
6467-E P-313

M/C PL CUT YV Machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler oPLCUT
disconnection SOL
M/C PL CUT SQ Machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler iPLCUC
disconnection confirmation LS
M/C PL CNC YV Machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler oPLCNC
connection SOL
SHUTTER OPEN YV Splash guard open SOL oSGCS
SHUTTER OPEN SQ Splash guard open confirmation LS iSPGC
SHUTTER CLOSE YV Splash guard close SOL oSGOS
SHUTTER CLOSE SQ Splash guard close confirmation LS iSPGO
W/S DOOR CL SQ Setup ST door close end confirmation LS iSFDC1
W/S DOOR OP SQ Setup ST door close open confirmation LS iSFDO1
W/S DOOR LK YV Setup ST door lock SOL oWSDL
W/S DOOR LK SQ Setup ST door lock pin IN confirmation LS iSFDL
W/S UNCLAMP YV Setup ST pallet unclamp SOL oSTPLUS
W/S UNCLAMP SQ Setup ST pallet unclamp confirmation LS iSTPUCL
W/S SIT YV Setup ST pallet seating detection air blow oSTPLSIT
SOL
W/S SIT SQ Setup ST pallet seating confirmation PS iSTPSIT
W/S PARS YV Setup ST pallet washing air blow SOL oSTPARS
W/S R-POS. SQ Setup ST pallet at proper position LS iPARD
CARRIER ADV F YV Carrier ST high-speed advance SOL oAPFHAD
CARRIER ADV F SQ Carrier ST advance end LS iAPFAD
CARRIER ADV L YV Carrier ST low speed advance SOL oAPFLAD
CARRIER RET F YV Carrier ST high-speed retract SOL oAPFHRT
CARRIER RET F SQ Carrier ST retract end LS iAPFRT
CARRIER RET L YV Carrier ST low speed retract SOL oAPFLRT
CARRIER UP YV Carrier ST up SOL oAPAU
CARRIER UP SQ Carrier ST up confirmation LS iAPAU
CARRIER DOWN YV Carrier ST down SOL oAPAD
CARRIER DOWN SQ Carrier ST down confirmation LS iAPAD
Table. MC Machine pallet no. MC_PL3[1]
Machine pallet seating confirmation LS iPSIT
Table. WS (1) Setup ST pallet no. STPL_PL51[1]
Setup ST pallet presence confirmation LS iPLES
Table. 2 Pallet ST2 pallet no. STPL_PL51[2]
Pallet ST2 pallet presence confirmation LS iPLE02
6467-E P-314

6467-E P-315
10-14.Logic Table
10-14-1.APC system condition decision code table

“3714 ALARM-C APC system condition ****”
When conditions are not met during APC operation and the above alarm occurs, the decision codes
are as follows.
Diagnosis
Code Description
message no.
0304 Pallet presence LS of next pallet ST is not OFF. 15831
0308 Pallet presence LS of next pallet ST is not ON. 15832
0310 Pallet presence LS of return pallet is not OFF. 15831
0320 Pallet presence LS of return pallet is not ON. 15832
0401 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to return pallet ST. 16992
0402 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to return pallet ST. 16992
0404 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to next pallet ST. 16992
0408 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to next pallet ST. 16992
0608 Return pallet ST search/write is not complete. 16995
0610 Next pallet ST search/write is not complete. 16995
0710 Carrier ST arm up confirmation LS is not ON. 15839
0720 Carrier ST arm up confirmation LS is not OFF. 15841
0740 Carrier ST arm down confirmation LS is not ON. 15840
0780 Carrier ST arm down confirmation LS is not OFF. 15842
0880 Setup ST pallet at proper position LS is not ON. 15861
6467-E P-316
Diagnosis
Code Description
message no.
0910 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to the pallet catching position. 16992
0920 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to the pallet catching position. 16992
6467-E P-317
10-14-2.Manual Interlock
Manual Interlock 1/6
ME61528R0101200240001
6467-E P-318
ME61528R0101200240002
6467-E P-319
ME61528R0101200240003
6467-E P-320
ME61528R0101200240004
6467-E P-321
ME61528R0101200240005
6467-E P-322
ME61528R0101200240006
6467-E P-323
10-14-3.Input Logic
Input Logic 1/6
ME61528R0101200250001
6467-E P-324
Input Logic 2/6
ME61528R0101200250002
6467-E P-325
Input Logic 3/6
ME61528R0101200250003
6467-E P-326
Input Logic 4/6
ME61528R0101200250004
6467-E P-327
Input Logic 5/6
ME61528R0101200250005
6467-E P-328
Input Logic 6/6
ME61528R0101200250006
6467-E P-329
10-14-4.Output Logic
Output Logic 1/4
ME61528R0101200260001
6467-E P-330
Output Logic 2/4
ME61528R0101200260002
6467-E P-331
Output Logic 3/4
ME61528R0101200260003
6467-E P-332
Output Logic 4/4
ME61528R0101200260004
6467-E P-333
11-1. Overview
The air turbine spindle can be rotated at high speed by supplying air to the attachment body. If the
air turbine spindle may be broken when the spindle rotation command (by M3 or the pushbutton
command) is executed with the air turbine spindle attached to the spindle, spindle rotation is banned
by setting the tool kind as a planer tool. Moreover, since the spindle remains rotated due to inertia
immediately after the air turbine spindle stopped, the operation door and the magazine door are
locked.
11-2. Air Turbine Spindle Rotation/Stop Command
11-2-1.Manual command
 Pressing the air turbine spindle rotation pushbutton allows the air turbine spindle to rotate.
This is ineffective, however, if not pressed together with the interlock release button, resulting in
turning on the interlock release button.
 Pressing the air turbine spindle stop pushbutton allows the air turbine spindle to stop.

The pushbutton command is effective when all the following conditions are met (AND).
 During manual mode (including manual interruption).
 Not during NC operation.

This applies, however, only for the air turbine spindle rotation command.
 The interlock release button is ON.

This applies, however, only for the air turbine spindle rotation command.
6467-E P-334
11-2-2.M command
M code Description
M488 Air turbine spindle rotation
M489 Air turbine spindle stop

The M code command is effective when all the following conditions are met (AND).

This applies, however, only for the air turbine rotation command.
[Answer condition]
 The air turbine spindle air ON signal is turned on with M488 to enable the answer.
 The air turbine spindle air ON signal is turned off with M489 to enable the answer.
11-3. Special Cases

When any of the following conditions is met, the air turbine spindle stops.
 During power save mode.
 During machine lock ON.
 Reset (excluding mode reset).
 During an alarm A.
 The operation door is open or the interlock is activated regarding the operation door.
 When the M00 or M01 command is issued.

This applies, however, only when MC USER PARAMETER No. 1-2 20 "M00/M01 DOESN'T
TURN OFF SPINDLE/COOLANT GROUP" is set to OFF.
 When the M02 or M30 command is issued.

6467-E P-335
11-4. Tool Kind

 The air turbine spindle must be registered as large-diameter tool "L" in the pot-tool
corresponding table.
This is required to avoid interference with the tool in the adjacent pot when the air turbine
spindle is stored in the magazine.
 When spindle rotation and spindle index are banned, the air turbine spindle must be registered
as planer tool "P" in the pot-tool corresponding table. Choose the right tool kind according to the
specification.
11-5. Operation door lock, magazine door lock

Since the spindle remains rotating due to inertia immediately after the air turbine spindle has
stopped (air turbine spindle OFF), the operation door or the magazine door is kept locked for the
period of the time set in the timer parameter.
11-5-1.Operation door lock with air turbine spindle

When the following conditions are met, the operation door is locked.
 During air turbine spindle rotation
 While the air turbine spindle remains rotating in the machine due to inertia
After the air turbine spindle has stopped (air turbine spindle rotation ON goes OFF), the spindle is
regarded as rotating due to inertia for the period of the time set in the following timer, allowing the
door to be lock for the period.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 11 Door interlock

AIR TURBINE SPINDLE INERTIA ROTATION PERIOD TIMER
Command : SET, ADD
Initial value : 6000
7
Min. value : 1
Max. value : 32767
Unit : 10 ms
11-5-2.Magazine door lock by air turbine spindle

When the following condition is met, the magazine door is locked.
 While the air turbine spindle remains rotating in the magazine due to inertia
11-6. Status indicator lamp
11-6-1.HL during air turbine spindle rotation

When the following condition is met, the lamp is lit up.
 The air turbine spindle air ON signal is turned on.

6467-E P-336
11-6-2.Operation door lock HL during air turbine spindle rotation

When the following conditions are met, the lamp is lit up.
 During air turbine spindle rotation
 While the air turbine spindle remains rotating in the machine due to inertia
When the following conditions are met, the lamp blinks.
 When the button is hold at the time when the rotation command is made by the pushbutton with
the operation door open
 When the M488 command is executed with the operation door open
11-6-3.Magazine door lock HL during air turbine spindle rotation

When the following condition is met, the lamp is lit up.
 While the air turbine spindle remains rotating in the magazine due to inertia

Input signal

0123 02 ipARTSP Air turbine spindle rotation SB
0123 03 ipARTSTP Air turbine spindle stop SB
Output signal

0620 14 opARTSP Air turbine spindle revolution HL
0620 15 oFDLAT Air turbine spindle operation door lock HL
0621 00 oATSPON Air turbine spindle air ON YV
0621 01 oMDLAT Air turbine spindle magazine door lock HL
6467-E P-337
12-1. Overview
On machines with this matrix magazine specification, the tool transfer pot in the tool rack is used to
transfer tools. Then the tools are changed with the spindle tools in the machine.
TOOL- ID read position Next tool preparation station
Tool store/storage
position
ME61528R0101400010001
6467-E P-338
12-2. Tool Change Command
12-2-1.ATC OPERATION screen

The ATC operation status can be checked in the screen shown below.
Procedure :
1 The ATC operation state can be checked in the screen shown below.
To display the ATC OPERATION screen, press the MACHINE OPERATION key
in the machine operation panel and then the ATC button in the right side of the
screen.
1528R0101400020001
ME61528R0101400020002
The item details to be displayed are as follows.
ATC SEQ. NO. ATC sequence number

MAGAZINE POS. NONE is always displayed.
ACT TOOL NO. Tool number currently mounted in the spindle
NXT TOOL NO. Next tool number
RET TOOL NO. Return tool number
POT/TOOL Corresponding table between magazine pot and tool number
ACT POSI X: actual position of X-axis
Y: actual position of Y-axis
Z: actual position of Z-axis
6467-E P-339
Status START OK Indicates that the ATC is ready for start.

CYCLE RUN Indicates that the ATC is in cycle operation.
MG INT. Indicates that it is during magazine manual
interruption.
SYS CON. NO. Indicates the input logic number that is not met to
carry out ATC inching operation.
ATC DIAG. Diagnosis messages are displayed including insufficient conditions.
(1) [F1] (SET)

mode. This key is enabled only in the manual operation mode.
(2) [F2] (INT LOCK RELEASE)

While this key is being pressed, the conditions for the spindle indexing completion and the tool
change position are disregarded. However, other mechanical conditions are valid.

Pressing this key executes all the ATC sequences automatically.

until ATC sequence no. 1.

This function key is enabled when a green triangle is indicated at the upper left of the key. ATC

This function key is enabled when a green triangle is indicated at the upper left of the key. ATC

(8) [F8] (CLOSE)

Closes the ATC OPERATION screen.
6467-E P-340
12-2-2.ATC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode

This section describes the ATC commands in the Auto/MDI operation mode.
With the TOOL-ID function, the specification method for the commands such as the next tool
command, next tool preparation command, or tool return command from the next tool preparation
area varies depending on the tool management method and parameter setting. Thus usage of each
command is explained by taking an example below.
For the details of command specification method, refer to "5. Program and operation" in "OSP-
P300M TOOL-ID (Tool Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
Tool Preparation Command to Next Tool Preparation Area
TPRET=**
The magazine provides an area in which 4 tools can be stored in order to reduce the next tool
preparation time.
This command prepares tools to the next tool preparation area. The specified tools are transferred
from the magazine tool rack to the next tool preparation area.
This command can be specified in series, however, the command must be specified prior to the next
tool command (T**) and no next tool command (M63).
Program example
M06
TPRET=**
TPRET=ΔΔ
TPRET=□□
TPRET=◊◊
T**
(1) Not during magazine manual interruption.
(3) The command tool no. exists in the tool rack.
(5) There is available space in the next tool preparation area.
36: The command is specified when the conditions for TPRET command are not met.
6467-E P-341
Tool Return Command from Next Tool Preparation Area
TRETT=**
This command returns tools from the next tool preparation area. The specified tool is transferred
from the next tool preparation area to the magazine tool rack.
This command can be specified in series, however, the command must be specified prior to the tool
preparation command to the next tool preparation area, the next tool command (T**) and no next
tool command (M63).
Program example
M06
TRETT = ** Tool return command for tool **
TRETT = ΔΔ Tool return command for tool ΔΔ
TPRET = □□ Tool preparation command for tool □□
TPRET = ◊◊ Tool preparation command for tool ◊◊
T**
(1) Not during magazine manual interruption
(3) The command tool no. exists in the next tool preparation area.
37: The command is specified when the conditions for TRETT command are not met.
6467-E P-342
Next Tool Command
T**
The specified tool is transferred from the magazine tool rack to the tool delivery position with the
main unit. At this time, the ATC carries out the sequences before the sequence of waiting for the
machine.
T00 (Enabled in MDI operation mode only)

This command cancels the next tool. If the sequence number is returned to “1” with a command
such as 1 STEP RETURN, the next tool command may not be accepted. Use this command in such
cases. This command is not accompanied by any machine operations.
(1) Same T command

With this magazine specification, it is possible to specify the same T command as the one that
has already been specified for the next tool.
However, if the specified T command differs from the command that has already been specified
as the next tool, the following alarm appears disabling the T command.
2: The T command was executed twice.
(2) T command same as the one for the current tool

If the same T command as the one for the current tool is specified, the following alarm appears,
disabling the T command.
1: The T command same as the one for current tool no. is specified.
(3) If no tool exists in the magazine

Tool presence in the magazine tool rack is managed by the tool presence data set by the
parameter. If there is no tool presence data for the tool rack applicable for the T code, the
following alarm appears, disabling the T command.
However, if the T command is the same as the one for the current tool to be returned or the one
for the return tool, no alarm message appears even if the data indicates that no tool is present
in the tool rack.
51: With the machine equipped with a matrix magazine, there is no pot in the tool rack
for the next tool.
If a T command is specified for a tool not registered in the pot/tool correspondence table, the
following alarm appears and the T command is disabled.
14: The tool number specified with a T command is not registered in the pot / tool
correspondence table.
6467-E P-343
Tool Change Command
M06
Specify this command to mount the next tool waiting at the tool delivery position for the machine to
the spindle.
If the tool change command is specified during magazine manual interruption, the following alarm
After the magazine manual operation has been completed, switch the magazine manual interruption
to OFF and press the magazine restart button. This cancels the alarm and resumes ATC sequence.
Current Tool Return (No Next Tool) Command
M63
This command returns the spindle tool to the tool rack. The tool transfer pot is moved to the tool
delivery position for the machine. The ATC carries out the sequences before the sequence of
waiting for the machine.
(1) If the M63 command is specified after a T command is specified, the following alarm appears,
1: The M63 command is specified after a T command.
(2) If the M63 command is specified when no current tool exists, the following alarm appears,
2: The M63 command is specified when no current tool exists.
(3) The presence of tools in the tool rack is managed by the tool presence data set by the
parameter. If the tool presence data indicates that there is already a tool in the tool rack to
which a tool is to be returned, the following alarm appears, disabling the M63 command.
50: A pot exists in the magazine to which the tool is to be returned.
6467-E P-344
Next Tool Return Command
M64
This command cancels the next tool command once specified. Specify this command to store the
next tool in the magazine tool rack moving from the tool delivery position for the machine.
The ATC carries out the sequences from the waiting for the machine status to the ATC start status.
(1) If the M64 command is specified without specifying the next tool command, the following alarm
appears, disabling the M64 command.
4: The M64 command is specified when no next tool exists.
(2) If the M64 command is specified during magazine manual interruption, the following alarm
After the magazine manual operation has been completed, switch the magazine manual
interruption to OFF and press the magazine restart button. This cancels the alarm and resumes
ATC sequence.
6467-E P-345
12-2-3.ATC Commands in Manual Operation Mode

In the manual operation mode, the ATC operation can be performed using the manual operation
function keys on the ATC OPERATION screen.
ME61528R0101400100001
(1) SET
mode. This key is enabled only in the manual operation mode.
(2) 1 CYCLE START

Performs all ATC sequences in series.
 The START OK for ATC is indicated in green.
 The ATC sequence no. is “1”
(3) RETURN CYCLE

If the ATC has stopped during operation, press this key to execute sequences continuously until
the sequence number comes to "1". The operation can be divided into two parts, one part
before and the other part after the tool change arm turns 180°. If the RETURN CYCLE button is
pressed before the arm turns, the tool is returned from that position without being changed with
the spindle tool. If the RETURN CYCLE button is pressed after the arm turn, the cycle starts
and the ATC sequence is performed from that position.
 The START OK for ATC is not indicated in green.
 The change arm has been retracted.
 Step return operation has not been performed.
(4) 1 STEP ADVANCE

The ATC sequences are advanced one step at a time. The “CYCLE RUN” display goes off after
completing one step of operation. To advance the sequence further, check that a cycle is not
running, and press the 1 STEP ADVANCE button.
permission lamp turns on to indicate that the 1-step advance is possible. However, if the

6467-E P-346
(5) 1 STEP RETURN

The ATC sequences are returned one step at a time. The “CYCLE RUN” display goes off after
completing one step of operation. To return the sequence further, check that a cycle is not
running, and press the 1 STEP RETURN button.
permission lamp turns on to indicate that the 1-step return is possible. However, if the
 The return cycle operation has not been started.
Note
When an ATC step operation is performed, check the current tool number and the next tool number
and also check that the tool data in the pot/tool correspondence table corresponds with the tool
that is actually inserted before specifying the ATC command in AUTO/MDI mode.
(6) INT LOCK RELEASE

Although the conditions for spindle indexing completion are disregarded only while this button is
being pressed during 1-step advance and 1-step return, other mechanical conditions are
regarded. In addition, this button is used to recover the ATC sequence if it stops due to a
sudden power failure. In order to start the ATC sequence, the INT LOCK RELEASE button is
used to forcibly disregard conditions which normally need to be checked. The operator must
check that it is safe to start the ATC sequence, and then press the 1 STEP ADVANCE button or
the 1 STEP RETURN button while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button.
Note
The tool CHANGE arm may collide with the drive key on the spindle if the ATC sequence is
performed without considering the spindle indexing.
If possible, remove tools from the spindle, the tool transfer pot, and the tool CHANGE arm when
performing ATC operation while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button.
Do not perform the ATC operation while pressing the INT LOCK RELEASE button unless
absolutely necessary.
(7) WINDOW CHANGE

6467-E P-347
12-2-4.Next Tool Command in Manual Operation Mode

If the tool is to be changed in the manual operation mode, the next tool can be specified with the
following procedure. The current tool return command is specified if no next tool is specified.
This command is enabled for both 1-cycle and 1-step operation.
Procedure :
1 Select the MANUAL operation mode. Press the MACHINE OPERATION key.
2 The ATC OPERATION screen appears.
3 Locate the cursor to the NXT TOOL NO.
ME61528R0101400110001
6467-E P-348
4 Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu. The SET pop-up window appears.
ME61528R0101400110002
5 Set the tool no. from the SET pop-up window.
TOOL NO. The tool no. input in NXT TOOL NO. is set.
[F5] (TOOL NO.CLEAR) NONE is set at NXT TOOL NO.
[Supplement]
1) Tool nos. of the TOOL-ID function can be set with tool number and group number.
2) Tool numbers can be set if the ATC sequence number is 1 and the ATC cycle is not
running. The following error occurs if tool number setting is not possible.
3) The following error occurs if a tool number not registered in the POT NO./TOOL NO.
TABLE is attempted to be set.
8204 Nonregistered tool
6467-E P-349
12-3. Tool Data Setting
12-3-1.Registering Tool Numbers

With the TOOL-ID function, the tool information of tool numbers and group numbers are set in the
TOOL ID INFORMATION screen.
For how to set the data, refer to "3. Tool ID information screen and group registration" in "OSP-
P300M TOOL-ID (Tool Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
12-3-2.Registering Tool Presence

Tool presence data are stored for each magazine tool rack. The tool presence status is displayed on
the following screen and can be changed.
However, normally it is not necessary to change the data. If the machine is restored with an
operation in a special manner after it has stopped, change the displayed data only if the data differ
from the actual tool presence.
Procedure :
PARAMETER (MATRIX MG TOOL RACK / TOOL). Press [F8] (CLOSE) to display the following
screen.
ME61528R0101400130001
6467-E P-350
3 Press the [↑], [↓], [←] and [→] cursor keys to move the cursor to the tool rack number to be set.
 When a tool is present:

press [F3] (EXIST).
 When no tool is present:

press [F2] (NONE).
ME61528R0101400130002
6467-E P-351
12-4. Tool Storage, Store and Recovery in Magazine Tool Rack
12-4-1.Magazine Manual Operation Panel

An operation panel shown below is found on the magazine side. This operation panel can be used
to perform "storage", "store", and "recovery" operations to the tools in the specified tool rack.
ME61528R0101400140001
6467-E P-352
(1) Touch panel

The touch panel consists of the MENU screen and six screens that switch to one another. For
the details, refer to "4. Touch panel and tool data setting" in "OSP-P300M TOOL-ID (Tool
Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
The previous CALL / STORAGE operation data are displayed on the 1. TOOL / POT INDEX
screen.
For the details on the displayed previous CALL / STORAGE operation data, refer to "12-4-2.
TOOL STORAGE /TOOL STORE/TOOL RENEW in Magazine Tool Rack " and "12-4-3. TOOL
RECOVERY from Magazine Tool Rack" to be described later.

Set this switch to ON [ | ] to perform magazine manual operation. After manual operation is
finished, set the switch back to OFF [○]. The ATC sequence will not start with this switch set to
ON [ | ].

The lamp lights up during magazine manual interruption.
(4) STORAGE button

When this button is pressed, tools in the tool attachment/removal station are stored in the tool
rack with the number specified at “TOOL POT No.” in the TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel
screen. Use the STORAGE button to store tools with no ID chip in the magazine.
 Call / storage operation is not in progress.
 The specified tool rack no. is not "0".
 The specified tool rack no. does not exceed the maximum number of tools in the magazine.
 The tool in the specified tool rack is none of current tool, next tool, or return tool.
 The tool in the specified tool rack has been registered in the POT NO./ TOOL NO. TABLE.
 There is a tool in the tool attachment/removal station.
 A tool has been inserted in the tool attachment/removal station properly. (When the
function to prevent reverse insertion is provided.)
 Tool specification on the ATC sub operation panel is set to TOOL SELECT.
6467-E P-353
(5) TOOL STORE button

rack with the number specified at TOOL POT No. in the TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel screen
after reading the ID chip data. Use the TOOL STORE button to store tools with ID chips in the
magazine.
 Call/Storage operation is not in progress.
magazine.
 Tool specification on the ATC sub operation panel is set to POT SELECT.
(6) TOOL RENEW button

rack with the number specified at TOOL POT No. in the TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel screen
after reading the ID chip data. Use the TOOL RENEW button to store tools with ID chip in the
magazine.
When the TOOL RENEW button is pressed, the data such as tool used hours and wear in the
ID chip tool data are reset.
The following conditions must be met to renew the tools.
magazine.

6467-E P-354
 Tool specification on the ATC sub operation panel is set to POT SELECT.
(7) STORAGE/ TOOL STORE lamp

ON: Indicates that any of the STORAGE, TOOL STORE, and TOOL RENEW buttons is
enabled.
Flash: Indicates that any of the STORAGE, TOOL STORE, and TOOL RENEW operations is in
progress.
(8) RECOVERY button

When this button is pressed, tools in the tool rack with the number specified at TOOL POT No.
in the TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel screen are transferred to the tool attachment/removal
station. Tools with ID chips are transferred to the tool attachment/removal station after writing
the data into the ID chip.
The following conditions must be met to issue the tool recovery command.
 The ATC sequence no. is "1". (Next tool preparation is not complete.)
magazine.
 There is a tool in the specified tool rack.
 The tool in the specified tool rack has been registered in the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE.
 There is no tool in the tool attachment/removal station.
(9) RECOVERY lamp

ON: Indicates that the RECOVERY button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that tool recovery operation is in progress.
(10) NEXT TOOL RETURN button

When this button is pressed, the next tool prepared at the tool delivery position for the machine
is once returned to the original tool rack, allowing the tool to be transferred between the tool
attachment/removal station and the tool rack. This button is enabled only during magazine
manual interruption.
The following conditions must be met to enable the next tool return command.
 The ATC sequence no. is set to the next tool preparation completion sequence.
6467-E P-355
(11) NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp

ON: Indicates that the NEXT TOOL RETURN button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that next tool return operation is in progress.
(12) NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button

When this button is pressed, the tool returned to the tool rack once is transferred to the tool
delivery position for the machine by pressing the NEXT TOOL RETURN button. This button is
enabled only during magazine manual interruption.
The following conditions must be met to enable the next tool re-preparation command.
 The ATC sequence no. is "1".
 The next tool no. is specified.
(13) NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION lamp

ON: Indicates that the NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button is enabled.
Flash: Indicates that next tool re-preparation operation is in progress.
(14) RESTART button

If the ATC sequence and magazine sequence are stopped by the magazine door interlock
function, close the magazine door and press this button to restart.

If the magazine door is opened during an ATC sequence or magazine sequence, the magazine
door interlock is activated to stop the sequence. This lamp lights up when the magazine door
interlock is activated. Press the RESTART button to restart and turn the lamp off.
12-4-2.TOOL STORAGE /TOOL STORE/TOOL RENEW in Magazine Tool

Rack
Perform the following procedure to perform TOOL STORAGE, TOOL STORE, and TOOL RENEW
in the magazine tool rack.
Procedure :
2 Open the magazine manual door.
3 Attach the tool to be stored to the gripper of the tool attachment/removal station.
4 Select the 1.TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel screen.
5 Press the TOOL SELECT key, and then set the tool number for the mounted tool.
Note: The tool rack number must be registered before storing the tool. For how to set the
data, refer to "4. Touch Panel and Tool Data Setting" in "OSP-P300M TOOL-ID (Tool
Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
6 When performing STORAGE operation, select TOOL SELECT.

When performing TOOL STORE or TOOL RENEW operation, select POT SELECT.
7 Close the magazine manual door.

6467-E P-356
8 Check that the STORAGE/ TOOL STORE lamp on the magazine operation panel is lit.
If the STORAGE/ TOOL STORE lamp is unlit and the NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp is lit on the
magazine operation panel, the next tool must be returned to the magazine tool rack once since
the next tool is prepared in the tool transfer pot. Press the NEXT TOOL RETURN button on the
9 Press the STORAGE, TOOL STORE, or TOOL RENEW button on the magazine manual
operation panel.
10 The STORAGE/ TOOL STORE lamp on the magazine operation panel flashes during
operation of STORAGE, TOOL STORE, or TOOL RENEW. When the STORAGE/ TOOL
STORE lamp goes off and the STORAGE/ TOOL STORE operation is complete, set the
MANUAL INT. switch on the magazine manual operation panel to OFF [○].
11 When the STORAGE, TOOL STORE or TOOL RENEW operation is complete, the POT No
and TOOL No. of the tool to which STORAGE, TOOL STORE or TOOL RENEW operation is
applied, and “STORAGE”, are displayed on the 1.TOOL/POT INDEX screen on the magazine
manual operation panel.
Displays the last

STORAGE/STORE
operation data.
ME61528R0101400150001
6467-E P-357
12-4-3.TOOL RECOVERY from Magazine Tool Rack

Perform the following procedure to perform TOOL RECOVERY from the magazine tool.
Procedure :
2 Select the 1.TOOL/POT INDEX touch panel screen.
3 Press the TOOL SELECT key, and then set the tool number of the tool to be recovered.
For how to set the tool number, refer to "4. Touch Panel and Tool Data Setting" in "OSP-P300M
TOOL-ID (Tool Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
Tool numbers can be set in any of the following screens: 1.TOOL/POT INDEX, 2.NG TOOL
INDEX, and 5.UNNECESSARY.
4 Check that the RECOVERY lamp on the magazine operation panel is lit.
If the RECOVERY lamp is unlit and the NEXT TOOL RETURN lamp is lit on the magazine
5 Press the RECOVERY button on the magazine manual operation panel.
6 The RECOVERY lamp on the magazine operation panel flashes during recovery operation.
When the RECOVERY lamp goes off and the recovery operation is complete, open the
magazine manual door to remove the tool from the tool attachment/removal station.
7 Close the magazine manual door and set the MANUAL INT. switch on the magazine manual
operation panel to OFF [○].
8 When the RECOVERY operation is complete, CALL and POT NO. and TOOL NO. of the
recovered tool are displayed on the 1.TOOL/POT INDEX screen on the magazine manual
operation panel.
Displays the last

RECOVERY
operation data.
ME61528R0101400160001
6467-E P-358
12-4-4.Errors during Magazine Manual Operation

If the conditions for enabling each command have not been met when the RECOVERY, STORAGE,
TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW, NEXT TOOL RETURN, or NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION button
is pressed, an error occurs and the error number indicated in the table below is displayed at the tool
rack no. column on the magazine manual operation panel. To release the error, either set the
magazine manual interruption to OFF [] or press the RESET button of the machine.
* For error numbers 1001 to 1799, refer to "8-1. Touch Panel Error Table" in "OSP-P300M TOOL-
ID (Tool Management Support Function) INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
Error no. Description Operation

1810 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified during RECOVERY/STORAGE,
an ATC cycle. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
NEXT TOOL RETURN
NEXT TOOL RE-
PREPARATION
1811 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified when RECOVERY/STORAGE,
the ATC sequence no. is not "1". TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1812 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified to a RECOVERY/STORAGE,
tool rack number that does not exist. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1813 The CALL command is specified to a tool rack RECOVERY
number having no pot.
tool rack number to which a dummy tool is set. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
tool rack number to which a current tool is set. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
tool rack number to which a next tool or next to the TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
next tool is set.
1818 The STORAGE command is specified with a pot in STORAGE, TOOL STORE,
the specified tool rack. TOOL RENEW
1819 The CALL command is specified with a tool in the RECOVERY
tool attachment / removal ST.
1820 The STORAGE command is specified with no tool in STORAGE, TOOL STORE,
the tool attachment / removal ST. TOOL RENEW
1821 The CALL command is specified while the reverse RECOVERY
insertion detection check indicates that a tool is in
the tool attachment / removal ST.
1822 The STORAGE command is specified while the STORAGE, TOOL STORE,
reverse insertion detection check indicates that a TOOL RENEW
tool is not properly inserted in the tool attachment /
removal ST.
tool rack number to which a return tool is set. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1825 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified when RECOVERY/STORAGE,
a CALL or STORAGE operation is being carried out. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1826 The CALL / STORAGE command is specified to a RECOVERY/STORAGE
tool rack number to which no tool number is set. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1828 The STORAGE command is specified to a tool rack /STORAGE
number that is in the next tool preparation ST.
6467-E P-359
Error no. Description Operation

1829 The NEXT TOOL RETURN command is specified NEXT TOOL RETURN
when the sequence no. is not the one for waiting for
the machine.
1830 The NEXT TOOL RE-PREPARATION command is NEXT TOOL
specified without the T command executed. RE-PREPARATION
1833 The CALL/STORAGE command is specified during RECOVERY/STORAGE,
ID chip read/write processing. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
NG TOOL RECOVERY
1834 The STORAGE command is specified when tool STORAGE
specification with the ATC sub operation panel is set
to pot selection.
1835 The TOOL STORE/TOOL RENEW command is TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
specified when tool specification with the ATC sub
operation panel is set to pot selection.
1911 An alarm A occurs during TOOL STORE operation TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
(including power save and machine lock).
1914 An error occurs during TOOL STORE operation. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1920 The tool of TOOL STORE at the TOOL STORE TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
command is the one with a tool diameter that cannot
be set.
1922 The TOOL-ID read tool number does not agree with RECOVERY/STORAGE,
specified tool rack number. TOOL STORE, TOOL RENEW
1941 An alarm A occurs during RECOVERY control RECOVERY
(including power save and machine lock).
1944 An error occurs during RECOVERY control. RECOVERY
1952 The R/W pot number is "0" at the RECOVERY RECOVERY
command.
12-4-5.Stopping Magazine Sequence

(1) Magazine sequence stops if the operation mode is changed or the NC RESET button is
pressed during call, storage, next tool return, and next tool re-preparation operations.
(2) Magazine sequence stops if any of the following events occurs during call, storage, next tool
return, and next tool re-preparation operations.
(1) An alarm A occurs.
(2) An alarm related to the magazine drive motor occurs.
(3) Machine lock is activated.
12-4-6.Restoring after Magazine Sequence Stoppage

Magazine sequence stops if the operation mode is changed or the NC RESET button is pressed
during call, storage, next tool return, and next tool re-preparation operations. To restore the
operation from that state, use 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP RETURN which is described in "12-2-
3. ATC Commands in Manual Operation Mode".
6467-E P-360
12-5. Parameter Setting

The parameters described below have been added to this specification.
Do not change these parameters unless there is a specific need to do so, since they have already
been set properly at the factory.

The tool transfer pot has the following three axes: horizontal axis (MA), vertical axis (MB) and rotary
axis (MC).
Use the machine axis parameters to set the zero, P stroke limit, and N stroke limit. The axis names
of horizontal axis, vertical axis and rotary axis are "MA", "MB" and "MC", respectively.
Procedure :
2 Press the [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key and select MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER
ME61528R0101400210001
6467-E P-361
12-5-2.Matrix Magazine Positioning Data 1

Set the hanging position and the removal position of each tool.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (MATRIX
MG POS. DATA 1) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400220001
Setting
Comment Description
unit
HANGING (MA) Set the horizontal axis of the tool grip position with the tool 1/1000
gripper of the tool rack. mm
HANGING (MB) Set the vertical axis (MB) of the tool grip / removal position of 1/1000
the vertical axis with the tool gripper of the tool rack. mm
REMOVAL (MA) Set the horizontal axis (MA) of the tool removal position with 1/1000
the tool gripper of the tool rack. mm
6467-E P-362
12-5-3.Matrix Magazine Positioning Data 2
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (MATRIX
MG POS. DATA 2) from the display change menu.
(1) Page 1
ME61528R0101400230001
Setting
NO. Comment Description
unit
1 TOOL CHANGE Set the horizontal axis (MA) position of the 1/1000
POSITION (MA) tool delivery position for the machine. mm
2 TOOL CHANGE Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the tool 1/1000
POSITION (MB) delivery position for the machine. mm
CHANGE POS. tool grip position to the tool gripper of the tool mm
(MA HANG) attachment / removal ST.
CHANGE POS. tool removal position from the tool gripper of mm
(MA REMOVE) the tool attachment / removal ST.
CHANGE POS. (MB) grip position to the tool gripper of the tool mm
6 POT TURN POSSIBLE Set the vertical axis (MB) position that allows 1/1000
POSITION horizontal travel with the tool gripped in the mm
transfer unit.
6467-E P-363
Setting
unit
7 LOW SPEED BEGIN Set the horizontal axis position to start low- 1/1000
DISTANCE speed travel operation when gripping in the mm
tool rack gripper. The value is set based on
the distance from the gripping position.
8 LOW SPEED Set the low speed when gripping in the tool %
OVERRIDE rack gripper by the percentage to rapid feed.
9 MANUAL TOOL Not used in this specification. 1/1000
CHANGE RETRACT mm
POS.
10 NG TOOL BUFFER ST Not used in this specification. 1/1000
RETRACT POS. mm
11 NEXT TOOL Not used in this specification. 1/1000
PREPARATION mm
RETRACT POS.
CHANGE POS. removal position from the tool gripper of the mm
(MB REMOVE) tool attachment / removal ST.
(2) Page 2
ME61528R0101400230002
The parameters on page 2 are not used in this specification.

6467-E P-364
(3) Page 3
ME61528R0101400230003
Setting
unit
POS.1 (MA HANG) tool grip position for the tool gripper of the next mm
POS.1 (MB) grip position for the tool gripper of the next tool mm
preparation ST1.
POS.2 (MB) grip position for the tool gripper in the next tool mm
preparation ST2.
preparation ST3.
6467-E P-365
Setting
unit
preparation ST4.
(4) Page 4
ME61528R0101400230004
Setting
unit
(MA REMOVE) gripper of the tool attachment / removal ST.
38 MANUAL TOOL Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the 1/1000
(MB REMOVE) gripper of the tool attachment / removal ST.
39 LOW SPEED BEGIN Set the vertical axis position to start low- 1/1000
DISTANCE speed travel operation when gripping in the mm
(VERTICAL) tool rack gripper. The value is set based on
the distance from the gripping position.
40 R/W HEAD POS. Set the horizontal axis (MA) position where 1/1000
(MA HANG) data read/write is performed with the ID chip. mm
41 R/W HEAD RETRACT Set the horizontal axis (MA) position of the 1/1000
POS. (MA REMOVE) tool removal position from the ID chip data mm
read/write position.
6467-E P-366
Setting
unit
42 R/W HEAD POS. (MB) Set the vertical axis (MB) position where 1/1000
data read/write is performed with the ID chip. mm
43 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST Not used in this specification. 1/1000
RETRACT POS.2 mm
44 R/W HEAD RETRACT Set the vertical axis (MB) position of the tool 1/1000
POS. (MB REMOVE) removal position from the ID chip data read/ mm
write position.
12-5-4.Machine Axis Positioning Point MC

Set the position of the tool transfer pot rotary axis (MC).
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (PLC
AXIS POSITION) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400240001
Setting
unit
1 POSITIONING 1 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when the 1/1000
tool transfer pot grips the tool. mm
2 POSITIONING 2 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when 1/1000
changing the tool in the tool transfer pot with mm
the spindle tool.
3 POSITIONING 3 Set the rotary axis (MC) position when the 1/1000
tool transfer pot travels behind the magazine mm
rack with a tool in the pot.
6467-E P-367
12-5-5.Change Arm Control Parameter

Set the change arm control parameters.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (ATC
ARM PARAMETER) from the display change menu.
(1) Page 1
ME61528R0101400250001
Setting
NO. Description
unit
001 Set the ATC start position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
002 Set the grip position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
003 Set the tool unclamp confirmation position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/ 1 mdeg
RETURN.
004 Set the TA removal position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
005 Set the TA 180-degree turn position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
006 Set the TA insertion position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
007 Set the tool clamp confirmation position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
008 Set the TA retract position at 1 STEP ADVANCE/RETURN. 1 mdeg
009 Set the ATC start position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
010 Set the grip position when the change arm override is less than 100%. 1 mdeg
011 Set the tool unclamp confirmation position when the change arm 1 mdeg
override is less than 100%.
012 Set the TA removal position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
6467-E P-368
Setting
NO. Description
unit
013 Set the TA 180-degree turn position when the change arm override is 1 mdeg
less than 100%.
014 Set the TA insertion position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
015 Set the tool clamp confirmation position when the change arm override is 1 mdeg
less than 100%.
016 Set the TA retract position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
017 Set the NC answer back position. 1 mdeg
018 Set the tool unclamp override (start) position. 1 mdeg
019 Set the tool unclamp override (end) position. 1 mdeg
020 Set the tool unclamp override. %
021 Set the tool clamp override (start) position. 1 mdeg
022 Set the tool clamp override (end) position. 1 mdeg
023 Set the tool clamp override. %
024 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
override is less than 100% in regular tool change.
025 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
026 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
027 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
028 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
029 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
030 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (start) position in regular tool change. 1 mdeg
031 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (end) position in regular tool change. 1 mdeg
032 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
033 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
034 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
035 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
036 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
037 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
038 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (start) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
039 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (end) position at 1 STEP ADVANCE. 1 mdeg
040 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
6467-E P-369
(2) Page 2
ME61528R0101400250002
Setting
NO. Description
unit
041 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
042 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
043 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
044 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (start) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
045 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (end) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
046 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (start) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
047 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (end) position at 1 STEP RETURN. 1 mdeg
048 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
override is less than 100% in heavy tool change.
049 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
050 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
051 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
052 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
053 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
054 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (start) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
055 Set the magazine pot horizontal LS (end) position when the change arm 1 mdeg
056 Set the parameter override setting value.
057 Set the parameter override effective condition.
6467-E P-370
Setting
NO. Description
unit
058 Set the ATC start position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
059 Set the grip position when the change arm override is less than 100%. 1 mdeg
060 Set the tool unclamp confirmation position when the change arm %
override is less than 100%.
061 Set the TA removal position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
062 Set the TA 180-degree turn position when the change arm override is 1 mdeg
less than 100%.
063 Set the TA insertion position when the change arm override is less than %
100%.
064 Set the tool clamp confirmation position when the change arm override is 1 mdeg
less than 100%.
065 Set the TA retract position when the change arm override is less than 1 mdeg
100%.
067 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (start) position with change arm 1 mdeg
override 100%.
068 Set the outer cylinder unclamp LS (end) position with change arm 1 mdeg
override 100%.
069 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (start) position with change arm 1 mdeg
override 100%.
070 Set the inner cylinder unclamp LS (end) position with change arm 1 mdeg
override 100%.
071 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (start) position with change arm override 1 mdeg
100%.
072 Set the inner cylinder clamp LS (end) position with change arm override 1 mdeg
100%.
073 Set the ATC shutter close position with change arm override 100%. 1 mdeg
074 Set the ATC shutter close position when the change arm override is less 1 mdeg
than 100%.
075 Set the override setting value in heavy tool change. %
076 Set the ATC shutter open confirmation time. msec
079 Set the air blow output angle with the HSK spindle specification. 1 mdeg
080 Set the air blow stop angle with the HSK spindle specification. 1 mdeg
6467-E P-371
(3) Page 3
ME61528R0101400250003
Setting
NO. Description
unit
105 Set the tool pot unclamp start angle with the change arm override set at 1 mdeg
100%.
106 Set the tool pot clamp start angle with the change arm override set at 1 mdeg
100%.
107 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle with the 1 mdeg
change arm override set at 100%.
108 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle with the 1 mdeg
change arm override set at 100%.
109 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle in the 1 mdeg
manual operation mode or when the change arm override is not 100%.
110 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle in the 1 mdeg
manual operation mode or when the change arm override is not 100%.
111 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle when 1 mdeg
changing a heavy or large-diameter tool.
112 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle when 1 mdeg
changing a heavy or large-diameter tool.
113 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle at 1 step 1 mdeg
advance.
114 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle at 1 step 1 mdeg
advance.
115 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring start angle at 1 step 1 mdeg
return.
116 Set the tool pot unclamp confirmation monitoring end angle at 1 step 1 mdeg
return.
117 Set the tool pot unclamp start angle in the manual operation mode or 1 mdeg
when the change arm override is not 100%.
6467-E P-372
Setting
NO. Description
unit
118 Set the tool pot clamp start angle in the manual operation mode or when 1 mdeg
the change arm override is not 100%.
6467-E P-373
12-6. Maintenance Screen

The ATC MAINTENANCE screen allows the user to check the operation status of the matrix
magazine. This screen is helpful when mechanical failures occur. It can also be used to check
information on tools in the transfer pot.
12-6-1.ATC Maintenance
Procedure :
1 Select the AUTO, MDI or MANUAL mode.
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select ATC MAINTENANCE from the display
change menu.
(1) Page 1
ME61528R0101400270001
6467-E P-374

<INPUT> ATC input logic currently ON
<OUTPUT> ATC output logic currently ON
CYCLE "1" during ATC cycle, "0" not during ATC cycle
SEQ. NO. ATC sequence no.
CONDITION Condition that is not met for ATC sequence
TLUCKN Specified tool rack no.
SACOME CALL / STORAGE command condition error no.
TPTEX Tool pot tool no.
CALL During COLLECT / CALL operation
NRET During next tool return operation
NRES During next tool re-preparation operation
ORI Spindle index completion
HP1 HP completion 1
TLPAD OUT Tool pot advance YV
IN Tool pot advance SQ
TLPBK OUT Tool pot retract YV
IN Tool pot retract SQ
TPCL OUT Tool pot lock YV
IN Tool pot lock SQ
TPUC OUT Tool pot unlock YV
IN Tool pot unlock SQ
TPTEX IN Tool pot tool presence SQ
ATDC OUT ATC door close YV
IN ATC door (shutter) close SQ
ATDO OUT ATC door open YV
IN ATC door (shutter) open SQ
ISCL IN Inner cylinder clamp confirmation SQ
ISUC IN Inner cylinder unclamp confirmation SQ
SCLP IN Spindle tool unclamp cylinder retract SQ
6467-E P-375
(2) Page 2
ME61528R0101400270002
a. Inner state
TPTEX Tool pot tool presence memory (present: ON, not present:
OFF)
Tool pot tool No.
PRET During next tool preparation supply cycle
b. Next tool preparation command buffer

6467-E P-376
c. Input/output status of the next tool preparation ST

PRST1<TLNO.> Tool no. of the next tool preparation ST1
PRST2<TLNO.> Tool no. of the next tool preparation ST2
6467-E P-377
12-6-2.TOOL-ID Maintenance
Procedure :
1 Select the AUTO, MDI or MANUAL mode.
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select TOOL-ID MAINTENANCE from the
ME61528R0101400280001
(1) Input/output status display

Display Description
MANUAL WEDGE Manual interruption LED
INTERLOCK During door interlock LED
ERROR Error LED
CLOSE CONF. Door close confirmation SQ
LOCK OUTPUT Door lock output YV
LOCK CONF. Door lock confirmation SQ
(2) Inner status

Display Description
CALL During recovery/call operation
NRET During next tool preparation return operation
NRES During next tool preparation / re-preparation operation
PRET During next tool preparation tool store cycle
STER During ID tool read error operation
6467-E P-378
(3) NC-PLC interface status display

Display Description
PNC <U> Pot number change-impossible request
PNC <G> Pot number change-impossible strobe bit
IDR <U> ID data read request
IDR <G> ID data read response
IDW <U> ID data write request
IDW <G> ID data write response
IDTOOL <U> Tool ID confirmation request
IDTOOL <G> ID tool bit
NOIDTL <G> Non ID tool bit
TDE <U> Tool data delete request
TDE <G> Tool data delete response
DTR <U> Data read mode
OKA <U> TOOL-ID pot/tool corresponding data update permission OK
answer
OKA <G> TOOL-ID pot/tool corresponding data update permission request
NGA <U> TOOL-ID pot/tool corresponding data update permission NG
answer
RTTLOK <U> NG tool confirmation request
RTTLOK <G> The return tool is an OK tool.
RTTLNG <G> The return tool is an NG tool.
(4) Operation number status display

Display Description
ERROR No. Error number
INDEX POT Index pot number
ID TOOL EXIST ID tool exist (used with setup only)
ERROR RESET PB Error reset (used with setup only)
TOOL-ID TOOL-ID operation number sequence counter
MG MANUAL WEDGE MG manual interruption control counter
ATC - DURING CYCLE During ATC cycle
ATC - SEQUENCE NO. ATC sequence no.
SP POS spindle position
R/W HEAD NO. R/W head number
R/W POT NO. R/W pot number
ACT. POS. MA MA actual position
ACT. POS. MB MB actual position
6467-E P-379
12-6-3.Matrix Magazine Maintenance Parameter

The MATRIX MG MAINTENANCE PARAMETER screen allows the user to check information on
tools in the transfer pot.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MATRIX MG MAINTENANCE
PARAMETER from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400290001
6467-E P-380

1 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST1 Displays the inner control data of the tool no. mounted
TOOL NO. in the next tool preparation ST1.
5 NEXT TOOL PRE. ST1 Displays the inner control data of tool presence in the
9 TOOL POT UNIT TOOL Displays the inner control data of the tool no. mounted
NO. in the transfer pot.
10 TOOL POT TOOL EXIST Displays the inner control data of tool presence in the
transfer pot.
6467-E P-381
12-7. Maintenance Function

In addition to ordinary magazine operations, the following operations are permitted. These
operations are intended for maintenance and adjustment purposes only and are not used in regular
operations.
12-7-1.Tool Tranfer Pot Override

It is possible to move the tool transfer pot at a slow rate by setting the override to the feedrate.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC USER PARAMETER
(MAGAZINE) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400310001
Setting
unit
17 MATRIX MG MA-AXIS Set the override with the magazine fence %
(HORIZONTAL) horizontal axis (MA).
OVERRIDE
18 MATRIX MG MB-AXIS Set the override with the magazine fence %
(VERTICAL) OVERRIDE vertical axis (MB).
19 MATRIX MG MC-AXIS Set the override with the magazine fence %
(TURN) OVERRIDE turn axis (MC).
6467-E P-382
12-7-2.Disabling Magazine Tool Exist Confirmation Interlock

By setting this parameter, STORAGE/RECOVER operation can be enabled without mounting the
tool in the tool attachment/removal station or the tool rack gripper.
However, it is necessary to set "No ID chip" in the tool information.
The set data are automatically cancelled when the power is supplied.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC USER PARAMETER
(MAGAZINE) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400320001

1 “TOOL EXIST” INTERLOCK IS Set the interlock with magazine manual tool
MADE INEFFECTIVE change position tool exist confirmation to be
disabled.
6467-E P-383
12-7-3.Feeding Tool Transfer Pot Using Pulse Handle

The tool transfer pot positioning axis can be moved using the pulse generator in order to relocate
the tool transfer pot or forcibly recover the machine from an abnormal condition.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC USER PARAMETER (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400330001
5 When the MANUAL mode is selected, the following alarm appears, enabling the operation.
2713 Alarm B Axis interlock releasing 69
6 Select the pulse handle for manual axis feed selection.

X-axis → horizontal axis (MA)
Y-axis → vertical axis (MB)
Z-axis → rotary axis (MC)
6467-E P-384
12-7-4.Override during ATC Cycle

To check operation after readjusting the position, the rapid feed override switch can also be used for
positioning of the tool transfer pot.
Procedure :
2 Press [F8] (DISPLAY CHANCE) function key and select MC USER PARAMETER (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE) from the display change menu.
ME61528R0101400340001
5 When the MANUAL mode is selected, the following alarm appears, enabling the rapid feed
override switch.
4703 Alarm D System check 70
6467-E P-385

If the machine does not operate due to mechanical conditions not being satisfied, this diagnosis
message display function displays the required conditions.
The following table lists the diagnosis messages and the descriptions.
15705 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
not ON. step if the spindle tool clamp confirmation (iISCL) is not ON.
15706 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
is not ON. step if the spindle tool unclamp confirmation (iISUC) is not
ON. This message appears in that case.
15708 Magazine manual ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step if the
interruption is not OFF. "magazine manual interruption" switch is not set to OFF or
CALL/STORAGE operation is not complete. This message
15712 Spindle index is not With the ATC, the change arm may not be operated unless
completed. the spindle is indexed to the specified position when turning
the change arm or removing or inserting a tool. This
15713 Spindle has not stopped. With the ATC, the change arm may not be operated unless
the spindle is stationary when turning the change arm or
removing or inserting a tool. This message appears in that
case.
15716 HP1 is not completed. With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
step unless any of the axes is located at the tool change
position. This message appears in that case.
15717 Turning of change arm to ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
the retract position is not change arm has returned to the retract position after tool
completed. change. This message appears in that case.
15718 Turning of change arm ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
GRIP POS. is not change arm has completely turned to the tool grip position in
completed. tool change sequence. This message appears in that case.
15719 Travel of change arm PULL ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
OUT POS. is not change arm has moved to the tool removal position in tool
completed. change sequence. This message appears in that case.
15720 Change arm 180-degree ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
turn is not completed. change arm has turned 180 degree after removing the
spindle tool in tool change sequence. This message appears
in that case.
15721 Travel of exchange arm ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
MAGAZINE TOOL INSERT change arm has moved to the tool insertion position in tool
POS. is not completed. change sequence. This message appears in that case.
15732 The conditions in relation to This message appears when the ATC will not proceed
ATC are insufficient. because required conditions are not satisfied in the internal
ATC control.
step unless any of the axes is located at the tool change
preparation position. This message appears in that case.
step unless any of the axes is located at the retract position
for tool change. This message appears in that case.
6467-E P-386
15780 ATC door OPEN LS is not With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
ON. step unless the ATC shutter open confirmation (iATDO) is
15781 ATC door OPEN LS is not With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
OFF. step unless the ATC shutter open confirmation (iATDO) is
OFF. This message appears in that case.
15782 ATC door CLOSE LS is not With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
ON. step unless the ATC shutter close confirmation (iATDC) is
15783 ATC door CLOSE LS is not With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
OFF. step unless the ATC shutter close confirmation (iATDC) is
15789 Spindle tool UNEXIST LS With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
differs from ACT TOOL No. step unless the no tool in the spindle confirmation (iSTNE)
ON/OFF state agrees with the current tool no. setting state.
15794 X-axis is not in ATC When the sensor for automatic tool length offset is the non-
possible range. touch type, the ATC cannot be operated depending on the X-
axis position.
This message appears if the X-axis is not in the ATC
movable area.
16023 Neither the next tool nor With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
the current tool is specified. step unless either the next tool or the current tool has been
set.
16043 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
is not OFF. step unless the spindle tool unclamp confirmation (iISUC) is
16044 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is With the ATC, the NC memorizes that the spindle tool clamp
not OFF. confirmation (iISCL) is once turned to OFF when the spindle
tool is unclamped. ATC sequence may not proceed to the
next step if the memory of OFF is not found. This message
16076 Tool breakage detection If the sensor for automatic tool length offset is the non-touch
sensor is not at the home type, the ATC cannot be operated unless the sensor has not
position. been retracted.
This message appears if the sensor with the non-touch type
has not been retracted.
16870 Magazine pot is not EXIST. With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
step unless the tool presence memory or tool presence
confirmation in the tool rack is ON. This message appears in
that case.
The tool presence memory of the tool rack varies depending
on the target tool rack.
 With a regular tool rack, tool presence memory that is
managed in the tool rack / tool presence table is not ON.
 With the tool attachment / removal ST, the no tool in the
manual tool change position confirmation (iLLTEX) is not
OFF.
6467-E P-387
16871 Magazine pot is not NONE. With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
step unless the tool presence memory or tool presence
confirmation in the tool rack is OFF. This message appears in
that case.
The tool presence memory of the tool rack varies depending
on the target tool rack.
 With a regular tool rack, tool presence memory that is
managed in the tool rack / tool presence table is not
OFF.
 With the tool attachment / removal ST, the no tool in the
manual tool change position confirmation (iLLTEX) is not
ON.
16874 ATC door OPEN This message appears under the following two cases
confirmation LS is not regarding that the ATC shutter open confirmation input is
normal. malfunctioning.
 It is detected that the ATC door open confirmation input
remains ON over a certain period of time with the ATC
door closed.
 The ATC door open confirmation input is turned to ON
within a certain period of time (half time of estimated
operation time) when the ATC door is opened.
16875 Tool pot advance end With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not ON. step unless the tool pot advance end confirmation (iTLPAD)
is ON. This message appears in that case.
16876 Tool pot retract end With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not ON. step unless the tool pot retract end confirmation (iTLPBK) is
16879 Tool pot CLAMP With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not ON. step unless the tool pot clamp confirmation (iTPCL) is ON.
16880 Tool pot UNCLAMP With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not ON. step unless the tool pot unclamp confirmation (iTPUC) is ON.
16883 Tool pot advance end With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not OFF. step unless the tool pot advance end confirmation (iTLPAD)
is OFF. This message appears in that case.
16884 Tool pot retract end With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not OFF. step unless the tool pot retract end confirmation (iTLPBK) is
16887 Tool pot CLAMP With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not OFF. step unless the tool pot clamp confirmation (iTPCL) is OFF.
16888 Tool pot UNCLAMP With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not OFF. step unless the tool pot unclamp confirmation (iTPUC) is
16889 Carry pot tool presence With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not ON. step unless the transfer pot tool presence confirmation
(iTPTEX) and the transfer pot tool presence memory are ON.
6467-E P-388
16890 Carry pot tool presence With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
confirmation is not OFF. step unless the transfer pot tool presence confirmation
(iTPTEX) and the transfer pot tool presence memory are
16891 Horizontal position travel at With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
tool change position is not step unless the horizontal axis (MA-axis) of the tool transfer
completed. pot has been positioned to the tool delivery position for the
16892 Vertical position travel at With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
tool change position is not step unless the vertical axis (MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot
completed. has been positioned to the tool delivery position for the
16893 Pot hanging horizontal With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
position travel is not step unless the horizontal axis (MA-axis) of the tool transfer
completed. pot has been positioned to the tool grip position of the tool
16894 Pot removal horizontal With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
position travel is not step unless the horizontal axis (MA-axis) of the tool transfer
completed. pot has been positioned to the tool removal position from the
16895 Pot vertical position travel With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
is not completed. step unless the vertical axis (MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot
has been positioned to the tool removal position from the tool
16896 Pot vertical retract position With the ATC, ATC sequence may not proceed to the next
travel is not completed. step unless the vertical axis (MB-axis) of the tool transfer pot
has been moved to the retract position where horizontal
travel is allowed. This message appears in that case.
17010 Transfer pot horizontal ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
position travel is not transfer unit has been moved to the horizontal position such
completed. as when the transfer unit returns a tool. This message
17011 Transfer pot intermediate When the transfer unit travels with a tool gripped, the transfer
position travel is not unit turns to the intermediate position before traveling behind
completed. the magazine rack. ATC sequence may not proceed to the
next step unless this sequence is not complete. This
17012 Transfer pot vertical travel ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
is not completed. transfer unit has been moved to the vertical position such as
when the transfer unit moves to the tool change position.
17013 Pot removal horizontal When removing a tool from the tool attachment / removal ST,
position travel is not ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
completed. second horizontal movement for tool removal is not
17014 Pot removal vertical When removing a tool from the tool attachment / removal ST,
position travel is not ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
completed. vertical movement for tool removal is not complete. This
6467-E P-389
17015 Pot removal vertical When removing a tool from the tool attachment / removal ST,
position travel 2 is not ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step unless the
completed. second vertical movement for tool removal is not complete.
ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step. This
17016 TOOL-ID chip processing With a tool with an ID chip, ATC sequence may not proceed
is not completed. to the next step unless the ID chip read/write is not finished.
17056 APC sequence is in tool ATC sequence may not proceed to the next step when the
change inhibit. APC sequence no. is not the one to allow tool change. This
6467-E P-390
12-9-1.Input
Label name Signal description

iTLPAD Tool pot advance SQ
iTLPBK Tool pot retract SQ
iTPCL Tool pot lock SQ
iTPUC Tool pot unlock SQ
iTPTEX Tool pot tool presence SQ
iCALL COLLECT /CALL pushbutton SB
iSTOR STORAGE pushbutton SB
iPBST1 TOOL STORE pushbutton SB
iPBRN1 TOOL RENEW pushbutton SB
iNTRT Next tool return SB
iNTRP Next tool re-preparation SB
iMGIN MG manual interruption ON SA
iMRST MG restart SB
iMDC_b MG safety door close SQ
iMGDL 1st MG door lock pin insertion confirmation SQ
iLLTEX Manual tool change position no-tool confirmation
iLLTEX2 Reverse insertion prevention confirmation
12-9-2.Output
Label name Signal description

oTLPAD Tool pot advance YV
oTLPBK Tool pot retract YV
oTPCL Tool pot lock YV
oTPUC Tool pot unlock YV
oRWAB1 R/W head air blow YV
oMGMI MG manual interruption ON HL
oMGD During MG door interlock HL
oCALL CALL possible / during CALL HL
oSTOR STORAGE possible / during STORAGE HL
oNTRT Next tool return possible / during return HL
oNTRP Next tool re-preparation possible / during re-preparation HL
oMDLK MG door lock YV
6467-E P-391
12-10.Logic Tables
12-10-1.ATC System Condition Code Table

The table below describes the judgment codes (****) for the following alarm.
3705 Alarm C ATC system condition ****
Diagnosis
Code Confirmation
message no.
0101 Pot removal vertical position travel is not completed. 17014
0102 Pot removal vertical position travel 2 is not completed. 17015
0104 Carry pot tool presence confirmation is not ON. 16889
0108 Carry pot tool presence confirmation is not OFF. 16890
0110 ATC door OPEN LS is not OFF. 15781
0120 ATC door OPEN LS is not ON. 15780
0140 ATC door CLOSE LS is not ON. 15782
0180 ATC door CLOSE LS is not OFF. 15783
0204 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is not ON. 15705
0208 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS is not ON. 15706
0220 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is not OFF. 16044
0240 Spindle tool UNCLAMP LS is not OFF. 16043
0280 Spindle tool CLAMP LS is not OFF. 16044
0301 ATC door OPEN confirmation LS is not normal. 16874
0302 Tool pot CLAMP confirmation is not ON. 16879
0304 Tool pot UNCLAMP confirmation is not ON. 16880
0308 Tool pot advance end confirmation is not ON. 16875
0310 Tool pot retract end confirmation is not ON. 16876
0380 Magazine manual interruption is not OFF. 15708
0402 Tool pot CLAMP confirmation is not OFF. 16887
0404 Tool pot UNCLAMP confirmation is not OFF. 16888
0408 Tool pot advance end confirmation is not OFF. 16883
0410 Tool pot retract end confirmation is not OFF. 16884
0420 Magazine pot is not EXIST. 16870
0440 Spindle tool UNEXIST LS differs from ACT TOOL No. 15789
0480 Magazine pot is not NONE. 16871
0501 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not completed. 15717
0510 Transfer pot horizontal position travel is not completed. 17010
0520 Transfer pot intermediate position travel is not completed. 17011
0540 Transfer pot vertical travel is not completed. 17012
0580 The APC sequence no. cannot be used for tool change. 17056
0601 Pot hanging horizontal position travel is not completed. 16893
0602 Pot removal horizontal position travel is not completed. 16894
0604 Pot removal horizontal position travel 2 is not completed. 17013
0608 Pot vertical retract position travel is not completed. 16896
0610 Horizontal position travel at tool change position is not completed. 16891
6467-E P-392
Diagnosis
Code Confirmation
message no.
0620 Vertical position travel at tool change position is not completed. 16892
0640 Pot vertical position travel is not completed. 16895
0701 Spindle index is not completed. 15712
0702 Spindle has not stopped. 15713
0740 Tool breakage detection sensor is not at the home position. 16076
0780 X-axis is not in ATC possible range. 15794
0901 The HP1 is not completed. 15716
0A04 Change arm 180-degree turn is not completed. 15720
0A80 Neither the next tool nor the current tool is specified. 16023
0B04 TOOL-ID chip processing is not completed. 17016
0C01 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not completed. 15717
0C02 Turning of change arm GRIP POS. is not completed. 15718
0C04 Turning of change arm GRIP POS. is not completed. 15718
0C08 Travel of change arm PULL OUT POS. is not completed. 15719
0C10 Change arm 180-degree turn is not completed. 15720
0C20 Travel of change arm MAGAZINE TOOL INSERT POS. is not completed. 15721
0C40 Travel of change arm MAGAZINE TOOL INSERT POS. is not completed. 15721
0C80 Turning of change arm to the retract position is not completed. 15717
6467-E P-393
12-10-2.Input Logic 1/8
OSP-P300M MU-4000V/5000V/6300V/8000V Matrix MG
ME61528R0101400390001
6467-E P-394
ME61528R0101400400001
6467-E P-395
ME61528R0101400410001
6467-E P-396
ME61528R0101400420001
6467-E P-397
ME61528R0101400430001
6467-E P-398
ME61528R0101400440001
6467-E P-399
ME61528R0101400450001
6467-E P-400
ME61528R0101400460001
6467-E P-401
12-10-10.Output Logic 1/6
ME61528R0101400470001
6467-E P-402
ME61528R0101400480001
6467-E P-403
ME61528R0101400490001
6467-E P-404
ME61528R0101400500001
6467-E P-405
ME61528R0101400510001
6467-E P-406
ME61528R0101400520001
6467-E P-407
12-10-16.Manual Interlock 1/8
ME61528R0101400530001
6467-E P-408
ME61528R0101400540001
6467-E P-409
ME61528R0101400550001
6467-E P-410
ME61528R0101400560001
6467-E P-411
ME61528R0101400570001
6467-E P-412
ME61528R0101400580001
6467-E P-413
ME61528R0101400590001
6467-E P-414
ME61528R0101400600001
6467-E P-415
SECTION 13 LHL GREASE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

MADE BY LUBE
13-1. Turning on grease supply pump

The grease supply pump is turned on by the following methods.
(1) The grease supply pump is turned on by pressing the LHL grease supply button in the operation
panel on the machine.
(2) The grease supply pump is turned on by the M490 command.

M code Description
M490 Automatic grease supply pump ON
(3) The grease supply pump is turned on when the specified period of time (supply pump restart
time) elapses after the grease supply pump is stopped.
The supply pump restart time can be changed by setting the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 12 Spindle lubrication
OIL PUMP RESTART TIME
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 10
13
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 24
Unit: h
(4) The grease supply pump is turned on after the following sequence of operations.
 The machine power is turned off,
 the specified period of time (grease supply pump power OFF time) elapses,
 the machine power is turned on, and
 the first drive axis (any of X, Y and Z axes) is operated.
The grease supply pump power OFF time can be changed by setting the following parameter.
GREASE SUPPLY PUMP POWER OFF TIME
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 100
18
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 320
Unit: h
6467-E P-416
13-2. Behavior of grease supply pump

The grease supply pump stops after the specified period of time (grease supply pump monitor time)
elapses.
The grease supply pump monitor time can be changed by setting the following parameter.

GREASE SUPPLY PUMP POWER CHECK TIME
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 90
19
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 600
Unit: sec
13-3. Alarm with grease automatic oil supply pump

When the grease supply pump is abnormal, an alarm D occurs.
If the grease supply pump does not return to normal when the specified period of time elapses after
the occurrence of alarm D, an alarm C occurs.
It is possible to change the time from when an alarm D due to a grease supply pump error (to be
described later) occurs until when switched to an alarm C by setting the following parameter.

GREASE SUPPLY PUMP ALARM D TO C
Command: SET, ADD
Initial value: 100
20
Min. value: 1
Max. value: 320
Unit: h
13-3-1.Abnormal pressure rise

If the grease discharge confirmation signal has never been turned ON during activation of the
grease supply pump, the pressure rise is counted as abnormal, triggering the following alarm D.
"Alarm D 4780 Grease oil pump error 2"
Code 2 = The grease spitting up confirm signal ON was not normally confirmed.
If the grease supply pump is activated and the grease discharge confirmation ON signal is
confirmed, the pressure rise is counted as normal, which releases the alarm D above.
If the specified period of time (time to trigger a grease supply pump alarm level C) elapses, the
following alarm C occurs.
"Alarm C 3749 Grease oil pump error 2"
Code 2 = The grease spitting up confirm signal ON was not normally confirmed.
When the grease supply pump is activated and the grease discharge confirmation ON signal is
confirmed again, it is counted that the pressure has risen normally.
By performing PLC reset (including mode reset) when the pressure rise is normal, the alarm C
above is released.
6467-E P-417
13-3-2.Abnormal pressure release

If the grease discharge confirmation signal is ON when the grease supply pump has stopped, the
pressure is counted as abnormally released, resulting in the following alarm D.
Code 3 = The grease spitting up confirm signal OFF was not normally confirmed.
When the grease discharge confirmation OFF signal is confirmed after the grease supply pump is
activated and the grease supply pump is stopped again, the pressure release is counted as normal,
which releases the alarm D above.
Code 3 = The grease spitting up confirm signal OFF was not normally confirmed.
When the grease discharge confirmation OFF signal is confirmed after the grease supply pump is
activated and the grease supply pump is stopped again, the pressure is counted as released
normally.
By performing PLC reset (including mode reset) when the pressure release is normal, the alarm C
above is released.
13-3-3.Abnormal pump pressure rise

If the grease supply pump stop confirmation signal has never been turned OFF during activation of
the grease supply pump, the pump pressure rise is counted as abnormal, triggering the following
alarm D.
Code 4 = The grease supply pump stop confirm signal OFF was not normally confirmed.
If the grease supply pump stop confirmation OFF signal is confirmed during activation of the grease
supply pump after the grease supply pump is activated again, the pump pressure rise is counted as
normal, which releases the alarm D above.
Code 4 = The grease supply pump stop confirm signal OFF was not normally confirmed.
If the grease supply pump stop confirmation OFF signal is confirmed during activation of the grease
supply pump after the grease supply pump is activated again, it is counted that the pump pressure
has risen normally.
By performing PLC reset (including mode reset) when the pump pressure rise is normal, the alarm C
above is released.
6467-E P-418
13-3-4.Pump abnormality
If the grease supply pump stop confirmation signal is OFF when the grease supply pump is
activated, a pump abnormality is counted, triggering the following alarm D.
Code 5 = The grease supply pump stop confirm signal ON was not normally confirmed.
When the grease supply pump is activated and the grease supply pump stop confirmation ON signal
is confirmed again, the pump is counted as normal, the alarm D above is released.
Code 5 = The grease supply pump stop confirm signal ON was not normally confirmed.
When the grease supply pump is activated and the grease supply pump stop confirmation ON signal
is confirmed again, the pump is counted as normal.
By performing PLC reset (including mode reset) when the pump is normal, the alarm C above is
released.
13-3-5.Low oil level detection

If the grease level normal signal is OFF, the following alarm D occurs.
Code 6 = The grease level confirm signal was not normally confirmed.
If the grease level normal signal ON is confirmed, the alarm D above is released.
Code 6 = The grease level confirm signal was not normally confirmed.
By performing PLC reset (including mode reset) when the grease level normal signal is ON, the
alarm C above is released.
13-4. Status indicator

The grease supply LED is ON while the grease supply pump is active.
The grease supply LED is OFF while the grease supply pump is inactive.
6467-E P-419

Input signal

0123 13 ipGGON Grease supply
0123 14 iGEXCF Grease spitting up confirm
0161 12 iGGPO_b Grease supply pump stop
0161 13 iGLNM Grease supply level usual
Output signal

0623 03 opGGON Grease supply LED
0623 04 oGGPO Grease supply pump ON
6467-E P-420
14-1. Overview
This document describes the operations and maintenance of the 2-pallet APC on MU-5000V/ MU-
5000V-L.
The 2-pallet APC is installed on the rear of the machine; which consists of the setup station (setup
ST) that mounts and dismounts workpieces, the pallet station (pallet ST) where pallets finished with
workpiece preparation are placed temporarily, and the carrier station (carrier ST) that carries pallets
between stations.
ME61528R0101600010001
6467-E P-421
14-2-1.APC Screen
Procedure :

1528R0101600020001
ME61528R0101600020002

APC INT : Indicates that the APC is operated by manual interruption.
6467-E P-422





(6) [F8] (CLOSE)

14-2-2.APC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode
This command exchanges the pallet on the machine table with the pallet on the pallet station.

“2714 ALARM-B APC M command ”1
“4773 ALARM-D Work preparation unfinished ”
This command completes workpiece preparation by transferring the pallet on the setup station to the
pallet station.

6467-E P-423
14-2-3.APC Command in Manual Operation Mode

ME61528R0101600050001
(1) [F3] 1 CYCLE START

(2) [F4] RETURN CYCLE

(3) [F5] 1 STEP ADVANCE


6467-E P-424
(4) [F6] 1 STEP RETURN

The APC sequences are returned one step at a time. However, if the mechanical conditions are

6467-E P-425
14-3. APC Manual Operation Panel

The APC manual operation panel has the following switches, buttons, and lamps.
ME61528R0101600060001
6467-E P-426
(1) WORK LOAD FINISHED lamp

This lamp is lit up when workpiece preparation is complete.
(2) PALLET IN-POSITION lamp

ON: The lamp is lit up when the pallet on the setup station is set at the correct position by
the positioning pin.
Blink: If the PALLET IN-POSITION lamp is turned OFF during APC cycle start, the APC
sequence stops and the PALLET IN-POSITION lamp flashes.
The APC sequence is resumed by pressing the RESTART button after returning the
pallet to the correct position.
(3) WORK LOAD FINISHED button

When the WORK LOAD FINISHED button is pressed after a new workpiece is set to the pallet,
the pallet on the setup station is transferred to the pallet station. Then the WORK LOAD
FINISHED lamp is lit up, enabling the next APC change command.
(4) WORK LOAD RESET button

Press the WORK LOAD RESET button to return the pallet loaded with the workpiece on the
pallet station to the setup station. Then the WORK LOAD FINISHED lamp goes off, transferring
the pallet on the pallet station to the setup station.
(5) Pallet operation lamp

The pallet operation lamp is lit up when a pallet is moving between the setup station and the
pallet station.

Turn the MANUAL INT. switch to ON to set the APC in manual interruption mode.
The MANUAL INT. switch should be turned ON so that the APC will not operate erroneously
when attaching or removing a workpiece to/from the pallet.

The MANUAL INT. lamp is lit up when the APC manual interruption mode is ON.
(8) PALLET CLAMP lamp

The PALLET CLAMP lamp is lit up when the pallet on the setup station is clamped.
(9) PALLET CLAMP button

Press the PALLET CLAMP button to clamp the pallet on the setup station.
(10) PALLET UNCLAMP button

Press the PALLET UNCLAMP button to unclamp the pallet on the setup station.

The DOOR INTERLOCK lamp is lit up when the setup door is open during APC cycle start. The
APC sequence stops when the DOOR INTERLOCK lamp is lit up. To resume the APC
sequence, close the setup door properly and then press the RESTART button.
(12) RESTART button

When the APC sequence is stopped with the DOOR INTERLOCK lamp lit or with the PALLET
IN-POSITION lamp flashing, press the RESTART button to resume the APC sequence.
6467-E P-427
14-4. APC Sequence

ME61528R0101600070001
6467-E P-428
ME61528R0101600070002
6467-E P-429
ME61528R0101600070003
6467-E P-430
Workpiece preparation release sequence
ME61528R0101600070004
6467-E P-431

operation.
service center.
NO. to "1".
6467-E P-432

Procedure :
displayed.
ME61528R0101600090001
6467-E P-433
14-6-1.Machine Diagnosis Message List
Diagnosis
no.
15801 APC manual interruption is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the APC
OFF. manual interruption switch is not set to OFF.
15822 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
OFF. machine pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not
OFF.
15823 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the
ON. machine pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not ON.
15824 Pallet seated PS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine or setup station pallet seating confirmation
signal is not ON.
15825 Pallet seated PS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the
machine or setup station pallet seating confirmation
signal is not OFF.
15831 Pallet EXIST LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when any of the
following cases applies.
The pallet presence confirmation signal of the setup
station is not OFF.
The pallet presence confirmation signal of the pallet
station is not OFF.
station is not OFF.
15832 Pallet EXIST LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when any of the
station is not ON.
station is not ON.
station is not ON.
15833 HP3 is not completed. This diagnosis message is displayed when travel to
home position 3 is not complete.
15834 APC door CLOSE LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the APC
ON. shutter close confirmation signal is not ON.
15839 APC arm RISE LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST rising confirmation signal is not ON.
15840 APC arm DESCEND LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ON. station lowering confirmation signal is not ON.
15841 APC arm RISE LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
S station T rising confirmation signal is not OFF.
6467-E P-434
Diagnosis
no.
OFF. station lowering confirmation signal is not OFF.
15843 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the setup
not ON. station pallet presence confirmation signal is not ON.
15844 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the setup
not OFF. station pallet presence confirmation signal is not OFF.
15847 Shifter advance LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/upper arm advance confirmation signal is not ON.
15848 Shifter advance LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/upper arm advance confirmation signal is not OFF.
15849 Shifter retract LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/upper arm retract confirmation signal is not ON.
15850 Shifter retract LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/upper arm retract confirmation signal is not OFF.
15861 SETUP ST. pallet right position This diagnosis message is displayed when the pallet
LS is not ON. in-position confirmation signal of the setup station is
not ON.
15862 STATION pallet EXIST LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the pallet
not ON. presence confirmation signal of the pallet station is
not ON.
not OFF. presence confirmation signal of the pallet station is
not OFF.
16543 APC fork advance LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ON. ST/lower arm advance confirmation signal is not ON.
16544 APC fork retract LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/lower arm retract confirmation signal is not ON.
16545 APC fork advance LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
OFF. ST/lower arm advance confirmation signal is not OFF.
16546 APC fork retract LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/lower arm retract confirmation signal is not OFF.
16550 Touch sensor retract is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the touch
completed. sensor retract operation is not complete with the touch
sensor specification.
16553 Station side pallet unclamp PS This diagnosis message is displayed when the setup
is not ON. station pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not ON.
16554 Station side pallet unclamp PS This diagnosis message is displayed when the setup
is not OFF. station pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not OFF.
16992 Movement of Circulation ST. is This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
not completed. station positioning is not complete.
6467-E P-435
Diagnosis
no.
16997 ATC sequence is in machine This diagnosis message is displayed when the ATC
pallet exchange inhibit. sequence no. is not the one to allow pallet exchange.
16998 Lower arm middle position SQ This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
is not ON. ST/lower arm middle position confirmation signal is
not ON.
16999 Lower arm middle position SQ This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
is not OFF. ST/lower arm middle position confirmation signal is
not OFF.
6467-E P-436
14-7. Pallet Judgment Function

It is possible to judge whether pallet A or pallet B is set in the table in the machine at present in the
machining program.
To conduct judgment, use either the system variable or the pallet judgment command.
14-7-1.System Variable for Pallet Judgment
Name VPLTK
Description Pallet type in machine
Attribute Read only
Data 1: pallet A
2: pallet B
(0: None or cannot judge)
14-7-2.Pallet Judgment Command
Command format
RP = * M289
RP = *: pallet data in machine
*:1 pallet A
*:2 pallet B
Usage example (program)
:
N100 M60
N200 RP = 1 M289
:
The pallet in machine is determined after pallet change. When the pallet in machine is pallet A, the
program is carried on; if not, an alarm B is raised to stop operation with program N200.
Alarm
 If a command that is not for the pallet in machine is specified, the following alarm is displayed.
2730 ALARM-B Pallet discrimination NG *
Code: 1 Pallet judgment by M289RP = 1. This is not the expected pallet.
2 Pallet judgment by M289RP = 2. This is not the expected pallet.
 If a value other than 0, 1, and 2 is specified in the RP command, the following alarm is
displayed.
2731 ALARM-B Data word: RP *
Code: hex data of command
6467-E P-437
14-7-3.Pallet A/B Mode Parameter

The pallet is determined according to the data in the following parameter. The parameter is switched
by the control in pallet change operation. Do not change the parameter unless otherwise needed.
MC SYS.PARA: No.3 APC

2 Pallet A/B mode
Command: SET, ADD
Default: 1
Minimum value: 1
Maximum value: 2
Description: 1 = Pallet in machine is pallet A.
2 = Pallet in machine is pallet B.
6467-E P-438
14-8. APC Shutter
14-8-1.Splash Guard Open/Close Command by M Command


14-8-2.Alarm
operations.
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation”
Default: 0
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation” 10’
Default: 0
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation” OFF’
Default: 0
6467-E P-439
14-8-3.Reciprocal Interlock between Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter

Open
14-8-4.Reciprocal Interlock between ATC Shutter and APC Shutter

The APC shutter and the ATC shutter cannot be opened at the same time. The APC shutter cannot
be opened with the ATC shutter open.
If the M33 command (splash guard open) is specified when the operation is inhibited, the following
diagnosis message appears.
"15231 ATC shutter is not close."

6467-E P-440
14-9. Interlock


6467-E P-441
14-10.Pallet Seating Retry

ME61528R0101600240001

ME61528R0101600240002
6467-E P-442
14-11.Pallet Seating Monitoring



Command: SET, ADD
Default: 10
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 100
Unit: 10 ms
14-12.Collision Detection with Carrier ST Fork

If the collision detection signal remains OFF for 0.5 sec or more during a fork advance motion at the
carrier ST, it is judged as collision to stop the fork advance motion. At this time, the following alarm
occurs.
"3771 ALARM-C APC control signal is abnormal" 1

Code: 1 = The collision detection signal remains OFF for a specified time during an APC fork
advance motion.
* Restore the operation while referring to the restoration procedure in item 5.

6467-E P-443
Procedure :
[APC MAINTENANCE]
[Page 1]
ME61528R0101600270001
6467-E P-444

confirmation PS
PFHAD OUT oAPFHAD APC fork (upper arm) advance at high speed YV
PFLAD OUT oAPFLAD APC fork (upper arm) advance at low speed YV
APFAD IN iAPFAD APC fork (upper arm) advance confirmation SQ
PFHRT OUT oAPFHRT APC fork (upper arm) retract at high speed YV
PFLRT OUT oAPFLRT APC fork (upper arm) retract at low speed YV
APFRT IN iAPFRT APC fork (upper arm) retract confirmation SQ
PLES IN iPLES Setup station pallet presence confirmation SQ
PARD IN iPARD Setup station pallet in-position SQ
PLE02 IN iPLE02 Pallet station 2 presence confirmation SQ
APDC IN iAPDC APC door close confirmation SQ
SDLK OUT oSDLK APC door lock YV
APDL IN iAPDL APC door lock pin IN confirmation SQ
SPLUS OUT oSTPLUS Setup station pallet unclamp YV
SPUCL IN iSTPUCL Setup station pallet unclamp confirmation PS
SPSIT OUT oSTPLSIT Setup station pallet seating detection YV
SPSIT IN iSTPSIT Setup station pallet seating detection confirmation PS
SPARS OUT oSTPARS Setup station seating face cleaning air blow YV
APAU OUT oAPAU APC fork rising YV
IN iAPAU APC fork rising confirmation SQ
APAD OUT oAPAD APC fork lowering YV
IN iAPAD APC fork lowering confirmation SQ
PLMVL OUT oPLMVL Pallet movement HL
6467-E P-445
[Page 2]
ME61528R0101600270002

APFAD OUT oAPFAD APC fork (lower arm) advance YV
APFRT OUT oAPFRD APC fork (lower arm) retract YV
APFUAD IN iAPFUAD APC fork (lower arm) advance confirmation SQ
APFUMD IN iAPFUMD APC fork (lower arm) middle position confirmation SQ
APFURT IN iAPFURT APC fork (lower arm) retract confirmation SQ
APFCD_b IN iAPFCD_b APC fork collision confirmation PS
PLMVL OUT oPLMVL During pallet movement HL
6467-E P-446
14-14.Parameter

The carrier station consists of the rotation axis (PA) and the travel axis (PL).
Set the zero, P travel limit, and N travel limit in the MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER screen. The axis
name of rotation axis and travel axis is "PA" and "PL", respectively.
Procedure :
ME61528R0101600290001
Item Description
6467-E P-447

Procedure :
(OK).
key.
[Page 1]
ME61528R0101600300001
NO Item Description
6467-E P-448
[Page 2]
ME61528R0101600300002
NO Item Description
6467-E P-449
14-15.Special Operations
general operations.
Procedure :
CHECK MODE)).
enter "44".
handle).
ME61528R0101600320001
6467-E P-450
Procedure :
CHECK MODE).
enter "44".
handle).
ME61528R0101600330001
6467-E P-451

Procedure :
3 Press the [F8 (DISPLAY CHANGE) function key to display MC USER PARA: (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE).
enter "126".
operations.
ME61528R0101600340001
6467-E P-452
14-16.Input/Output Bit
In this section the input/output bit label names regarding the 2-pallet APC are described. For the
other input/output bits and the usage method of I/O monitor, refer to the maintenance manual.
[Input]
Label Description
iAPFAD APC fork (upper arm) advance confirmation SQ
iAPFRT APC fork (upper arm) retract confirmation SQ
iAPFUAD APC fork (lower arm) advance confirmation SQ
iAPFUMD APC fork (lower arm) middle position confirmation SQ
iAPFURT APC fork (lower arm) retract confirmation SQ
iAPAU APC fork rising confirmation SQ
iAPFCD_b APC fork collision detection PS
iAPFCDIV APC fork collision detection ineffective SQ
iPLES Setup station pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPLE02 Pallet station pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPARD Setup station pallet in-position SQ
iSTPUCL Setup station pallet unclamp confirmation PS
iSTPSIT Setup station pallet seating confirmation PS
iAPDC Setup station door close confirmation SQ
iAPDL Setup station door lock pin IN confirmation SQ
iPUCL Machine pallet unclamp confirmation PS
iPSIT Machine pallet seating detection confirmation PS
iPLCUC Machine pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation PS
6467-E P-453
[Output]
Label Description
oAPFHAD APC fork (upper arm) advance at high speed YV
oAPFLAD APC fork (upper arm) advance at low speed YV
oAPFHRT APC fork (upper arm) retract at high speed YV
oAPFLRT APC fork (upper arm) retract at low speed YV
oAPFAD APC fork (lower arm) advance YV
oAPFRT APC fork (lower arm) retract YV
oAPAU APC fork rising YV
oSTPLUS Setup station pallet unclamp YV
oSTPLSIT Setup station pallet seating detection air blow YV
oSTPARS Setup station pallet seating face cleaning air blow YV
oSDLK Setup station door lock YV
[Operation panel input]
Label Description
iPMIT APC manual interruption ON SA
iAPRST APC restart SB
iWPRE Workpiece preparation completion SB
iWPRR Workpiece preparation release SB
iPLTCLP Pallet clamp SB
iPLTUCL Pallet unclamp SB
iWWGN Workpiece washing gun for setup side SB
6467-E P-454
[Operation panel output]
Label Description
oAPMI APC manual interruption HL
oWKPL Workpiece preparation completion HL
oPLMVL During pallet operation HL
oPLTCLP Pallet clamp HL
oAPIL During door interlock HL
oPARP Pallet in-position HL
6467-E P-455
14-17.Logic Table

table below.
Judgment Diagnosis
Description
codes message no.
0204 Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation is not 16993
ON.
0208 Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation is not 16994
OFF.
0280 APC manual interruption is not OFF. 15801
0301 Setup ST pallet presence LS is not ON. 15843
0302 Setup ST pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15844
0304 Pallet ST pallet presence LS is not ON. 15862
0308 Pallet ST pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15863
0401 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to setup ST. 16992
0402 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to setup ST. 16992
0404 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to pallet ST. 16992
0408 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to pallet ST. 16992
0410 Carrier ST lower arm middle position confirmation LS is not ON. 16998
0420 Carrier ST lower arm middle position confirmation LS is not OFF. 16999
0502 Carrier ST lower arm advance LS is not ON. 16543
0504 Carrier ST lower arm advance LS is not OFF. 16545
0508 Carrier ST lower arm retract LS is not ON. 16544
0510 Carrier ST lower arm retract LS is not OFF. 16546
0701 Carrier ST upper arm advance LS is not ON. 15847
0702 Carrier ST upper arm advance LS is not OFF. 15848
6467-E P-456
Judgment Diagnosis
Description
codes message no.
0704 Carrier ST upper arm retract LS is not ON. 15849
0708 Carrier ST upper arm retract LS is not OFF. 15850
0880 Setup ST pallet in-position LS is not ON. 15861
0910 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to the pallet clamp position. 16992
0920 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to the pallet clamp position. 16992
6467-E P-457
ME61528R0101600370001
6467-E P-458
ME61528R0101600380001
6467-E P-459
ME61528R0101600390001
6467-E P-460
ME61528R0101600400001
6467-E P-461
ME61528R0101600410001
6467-E P-462
ME61528R0101600420001
6467-E P-463
ME61528R0101600430001
6467-E P-464
ME61528R0101600440001
6467-E P-465
ME61528R0101600450001
6467-E P-466
ME61528R0101600460001
6467-E P-467
ME61528R0101600470001
6467-E P-468
ME61528R0101600480001
6467-E P-469
SECTION 15 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT SPECIFICATION WITH KOSELL FILTER MADE BY OGURA
SECTION 15 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT

SPECIFICATION WITH KOSELL FILTER
MADE BY OGURA CLUTCH
15-1. Overview
The sequencer (smart relay) in the electronic cabinet made by Ogura Clutch controls the
backwashing filter. By this, the machine does not perform filtration and backwashing control.
Furthermore, by checking the oil level of the thru-coolant tank, the suction pump activation signal is
output to the machine.
High-pressure thru-coolant
Machine control box tank at normal oil level
Suction pump control signal

Normal coolant Thru-coolant
tank oil level suction
possible *1 Coolant in normal condition
No prefilter clogging
Thru-coolant
at normal oil level
Kosell filter made Thru-coolant output
by Ogura Clutch
Magnet separator Thru-coolant pump

P Over flow P
- Speed command S5 *1
Suction - Speed command S6 *1
pump - Speed command S7 *1
Coolant tank Thru-coolant tank
*1 The thru-coolant suction OK signal and the speed command signal may not be provided depending on the specifications.
ME61528R0101700010001
6467-E P-470
15-2. Specification Details
15-2-1.Thru-coolant suction OK
The thru-coolant suction OK is the output signal notifies that the suction pump can be operated to
the backwashing filter from the machine.
The thru-coolant suction OK signal is output when all the following conditions are met.
 The coolant tank oil level normal signal does not remain OFF for three seconds or more.
 Not during a suction pump abnormal behavior alarm.

(Refer to "15-2-5. Suction pump abnormal behavior".)
 Not during a prefilter clogging error alarm.

(Refer to "15-2-6. Prefilter clogging detection".)
15-2-2.Thru-coolant suction pump command

The "suction pump for backwashing filter" is activated while the "suction pump control signal" is
being notified with the "thru-coolant suction OK" ON.
Thru-coolant suction possible
Suction pump control signal
Suction pump for

backwashing filter
ME61528R0101700030001
6467-E P-471
15-2-3.Seven levels of thru-coolant discharge pressure

The thru-coolant discharge pressure is switched in seven levels by the RT or RH command.
Select the RT command or the RH command based on the absence or presence of semi-dry unit
EcoBooster by Bluebe according to the description below.
- RT command: When the semi-dry unit EcoBooster by Bluebe is not provided.
- RH command: When the semi-dry unit EcoBooster by Bluebe is provided.
Note
The thru coolant pressure level switching function may not be provided depending on the machine
specifications.
RT command
The thru-spindle coolant discharge pressure level is switched by the RT command.
(1) Command method

M50 RT =*
* =1 to 7
(M50 and RT do not have to be specified in the same block.)
By turning ON or OFF the output of thru coolant pressure level switching signal (speed
command S5, speed command S6, speed command S7) by the RT command, the pressure
level is switched according to the command.
The relation between the RT command and the signal output is listed in the following table.
Command Pressure Output: speed Output: speed Output: speed
(RT = command S5 command S6 command S7
1 1.5 MPa ● - -
2 2.5 MPa - ● -
3 3.5 MPa ● ● -
4 4.0 MPa - - ●
5 5.0 MPa ● - ●
6 6.0 MPa - ● ●
7 7.0 MPa ● ● ●
Output marks "●" and "-" indicate ON and OFF, respectively.
* Description of pressure for each command may vary depending on the machine
specifications.
(2) Command effective condition

When all the following conditions are met, RT command is effective.
- Not during a sequence return.
- Not during STM lock.
Note
The RT command during machine lock ON is effective.
6467-E P-472
(3) Specification details
 The ON and OFF states of speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command
S7 are switched according to the RT command value.
The relation between the command value and ON/OFF states of speed command S5,
speed command S6 and speed command S7 are listed in the previous table.
 The speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command S7 are constantly
controlled according to the RT command value.
This means, the speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command S7 are
controlled independently of the thru-spindle coolant command ON/OFF states by
commands such as M50.
 The pressure is output at 1.5 MPa at the time the power is turned on or cycled.
 With a RT command, the answer is returned with the command ON.

If the RT command value is out of the command range (1 to 7), however, an alarm B
occurs, resulting in continuing STM operation.
For the details of the alarm caused when the value is out of the command range, refer to
item (4) below.
Moreover, when the value is out of the command range, the last value is retained and the
output of speed commands S5, S6 and S7 is not switched.
(4) Alarm by improper RT command

If the RT command value is either smaller than "1" or larger than "7", the following alarm occurs,
resulting in outputting the speed command with the RT command value before the alarm.
"Alarm B 2784 Data word: RT *"
Code *= Hex data of improper command value (0 is not displayed.)
[Supplement]
The thru-spindle coolant ON/OFF command by manual operation is effective even when the
alarm above is being displayed.
RH command
The thru-spindle coolant discharge pressure level is switched by the RH command.
(1) Command method

M50 RH =*
* =1 to 7
(M50 and RH do not have to be specified in the same block.)
By turning ON or OFF the output of thru coolant pressure level switching signal (speed
command S5, speed command S6, speed command S7) by the RH command, the pressure
level is switched according to the command.
6467-E P-473
The relation between the RH command and the signal output is listed in the following table.
Command Pressure Output: speed Output: speed Output: speed
(RH= command S5 command S6 command S7
1 1.5 MPa ● - -
2 2.5 MPa - ● -
3 3.5 MPa ● ● -
4 4.0 MPa - - ●
5 5.0 MPa ● - ●
6 6.0 MPa - ● ●
7 7.0 MPa ● ● ●
Output marks "●" and "-" indicate ON and OFF, respectively.
* Description of pressure for each command may vary depending on the machine
specifications.
(2) Command effective condition

When all the following conditions are met, RH command is effective.
- Not during a sequence return.
- Not during STM lock.
Note
The RH command during machine lock ON is effective.
(3) Specification details
 The ON and OFF states of speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command
S7 are switched according to the RH command value.
The relation between the command value and ON/OFF states of speed command S5,
speed command S6 and speed command S7 are listed in the table above.
 The speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command S7 are constantly
controlled according to the RH command value.
This means, the speed command S5, speed command S6 and speed command S7 are
controlled independently of the thru-spindle coolant command ON/OFF states by
commands such as M50.
 The pressure is output at 1.5 MPa at the time the power is turned on or cycled.
 With a RH command, the answer is returned with the command ON.

If the RH command value is out of the command range (1 to 7), however, an alarm B
occurs, resulting in continuing STM operation.
For the details of the alarm caused when the value is out of the command range, refer to
item (4) below.
Moreover, when the value is out of the command range, the last value is retained and the
output of speed commands S5, S6 and S7 is not switched.
(4) Alarm by improper RH command

If the RH command value is either smaller than "1" or larger than "7", the following alarm
occurs, resulting in outputting the speed command with the RH command value before the
alarm.
"Alarm B 2732 Data word: RH *"

Code *= Hex data of improper command value (0 is not displayed.)
6467-E P-474
[Supplement]
The thru-spindle coolant ON/OFF command by manual operation is effective even when the
alarm above is being displayed.
15-2-4.Alarm by low oil level

Thru-coolant at pressure 1.5 MPa
If the high-pressure thru coolant tank level normal signal remains OFF for 3 seconds or more during
operation of thru-spindle coolant, the following alarm B occurs to stop the thru-spindle coolant after
completion of the axis travel.
"2722 Alarm B Coolant low level 32"

Code 32 = Oil hole (through spindle coolant) tank level low.
If the high-pressure thru coolant tank level normal signal remains OFF for 90 seconds or more with
the alarm B above raised, the following alarm A occurs to stop the thru-spindle coolant.
"1715 Alarm A Coolant low level 32"

Thru-coolant at pressure over 1.5 MPa

If the high-pressure thru coolant tank level normal signal is OFF at the time when the thru-spindle
coolant ON command is issued, the following alarm A occurs to disable the command.

If the high-pressure thru coolant tank level normal signal remains OFF for 3 seconds or more during
operation of thru-spindle coolant, the following alarm B occurs to stop the thru-spindle coolant after
completion of the axis travel.
"2722 Alarm B Coolant low level 32"

If the high-pressure thru coolant tank level normal signal remains OFF for 90 seconds or more with
the alarm B above raised, the following alarm A occurs to stop the thru-spindle coolant.

Note
Since the thru-spindle coolant stops after completion of the axis travel, set the following parameter
to "Checked" if the spindle needs to be stopped.
MC USER PARAMETER Spindle

SPINDLE STOPS WHEN AN ALARM OF LEVEL B OCCURS
Not checked…The spindle is not stopped with an alarm B.
1
Checked…The spindle is stopped with an alarm B.
Initial value: 0
6467-E P-475
15-2-5.Suction pump abnormal behavior

If the suction pump for backwashing filter confirmation signal remains OFF for 3 seconds or more
during operation of the suction pump for backwashing filter, the following alarm C occurs to stop the
suction pump for backwashing filter, turning OFF the thru-coolant suction OK output signal.
The following alarm is released by performing alarm reset.
"3719 Alarm C Coolant unit 1"

Code 1= The suction pump motor signal failed to come ON within 3 seconds when the
motor was turned ON
15-2-6.Prefilter clogging detection

When the prefilter clogging detection function is provided, the prefilter clogging detection signal
status is checked during thru-coolant discharge.
[Prefilter clogging alarm]
 When the thru coolant clogging detection is not set to alarm C

If the prefilter normal signal remains OFF for 1 second (fixed value) or more during operation of
the suction pump, a prefilter abnormality is counted, the following alarm occurs to stop the
suction pump.
"Alarm B 2723 Thru-the-tool coolant filter 3"
3 = Prefilter is clogged.
 When the thru coolant clogging detection is set to alarm C (optional)

If the prefilter normal SP signal remains OFF for 1 second (fixed value) or more during
operation of the suction pump, a prefilter abnormality is counted, the following alarm occurs.
The suction pump is not stopped.
"Alarm C 3720 Thru-the-tool coolant filter 3"

3 = Prefilter is clogged.
15-2-7.Coolant in normal condition

When the coolant normal signal is provided, if any of inverter error, low oil level and low pressure
states occurs, the coolant normal signal turns OFF on the Kosell unit side.
By checking the signal input status above, the error detection triggers an alarm.
[Specification details]
If the coolant normal signal remains OFF for 3 second or more, the following alarm B is displayed.
However, the signal input status above is not checked during an alarm A.
"Alarm B 2742 Coolant unit unusual 47"
Code 47: Coolant normal signal was turned off Coolant normal signal was turned off
6467-E P-476

Input signal

0013 03 iOLHM Oil hole Through coolant motor ON KM
0016 07 iOHT_b Hi-pressure oil hole tank oil level OK
0148 08 iSCPMON Through suction pump on
0130 07 iSUCPM Back wash filter drawing up pump confirmation
0164 14 iCOLUSL Coolant usual
Output signal

0521 08 oOHLM Oil hole motor on KM
0584 09 oSUCPM Back wash filter drawing up pump KM
0631 02 oSCPMOK Through suction pump OK
0635 00 oCLPRCM0 Speed command S5
6467-E P-477
16-1. Overview
It is possible to discharge the 2nd air blow separately from the standard air blow depending on the
intended use.
The 2nd air blow command can be issued by the pushbutton or the M code.
16-1-1.Pushbutton
Press the MACHINE OPERATION key and then AIR BLOW key in the displayed RUN screen to
display the air blow operation screen.
By pressing the [F5] (AIR BLOW 2) function key, the 2nd air blow is discharged.
If [F5] (AIR BLOW 2) is pressed again during discharge of the 2nd air blow, the discharge of the 2nd
air blow is stopped.
During discharge of the 2nd air blow, the [F5] (AIR BLOW 2) key is displayed as pressed.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
Note: The keys to be displayed other than [F5] vary depending on the machine specifications.
ME61528R0101800020001
16-1-2.M code
M code Description
M09 2nd air blow OFF
M620 2nd air blow ON
The M620 command discharges the 2nd air blow and the M09 command stops the discharge of the
2nd air blow.
M620 and M09 return the answer immediately after receiving the command.
Moreover, it is possible to set whether the 2nd air blow is turned off or not by the M09 command by
setting the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 1 Coolant

124 M09 DOESN'T TURN OFF THE AIR BLOW 2
Command: SET
Not checked…The 2nd air blow is turned OFF by the M09 command.
Checked…The 2nd air blow is not turned OFF by the M09 command and the
discharge is continued.
6467-E P-478
If the ATC shutter is not closed immediately after tool change and the M620 command is executed,
the following message appears, disabling the discharge of the 2nd air blow.
"15514 ATC door CLOSE LS is not ON."
16-1-3.ALL COOLANT OFF button
E61528R0101800040001
If the ALL COOLANT OFF button is pressed during discharge of the 2nd air blow, the discharge of
the 2nd air blow is stopped, and the standby mode is set. At this time, the function key and the flat
panel LED flash.
After that, by pressing the ALL COOLANT OFF button again, the standby mode with the 2nd air
blow is released and the discharge is resumed.

Input signal

0071 07 ipARBL2 2nd air blow PB
Output signal

0642 09 oARBL2 2nd air blow SOL
0559 07 opARBL2 2nd air blow PL
6467-E P-479

It is possible to discharge the 2nd coolant separately from the standard coolant depending on the intended
use.
The 2nd coolant command can be issued by the pushbutton or the M code.
17-1. Command
17-1-1.Pushbutton
Press the MACHINE OPERATION flat panel key, and touch the COOLANT key in the "machine
operation selection key" display area. Then the following function keys appear.
The 2nd coolant command can be turned ON or OFF by pressing [F6] (COOLANT 2).
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
Note: The keys to be displayed other than [F6] vary depending on the machine specifications.
ME61528R0101900020001
17-1-2.M code
M code Description
M09 Coolant group OFF
M125 2nd coolant ON
The M125 command discharges the 2nd coolant and the M09 command stops the discharge of the
2nd coolant.
M125 and M09 return the answer immediately after receiving the command.
Moreover, it is possible to set whether the 2nd coolant is turned off or not by the M09 command by
setting the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 1 coolant

13 M09 DOESN’T TURN OFF THE COOLANT
Not checked…The discharge of the 2nd coolant is stopped by "coolant group OFF
(M09)".
Checked…The discharge of the 2nd coolant is not stopped by "coolant group OFF
(M09)".
Initial value: 0
6467-E P-480
If the ATC shutter is not closed immediately after tool change and the M125 command is executed,
the following message appears, disabling the discharge of the 2nd coolant.
"15514 ATC door CLOSE LS is not ON.”
17-2. 2nd coolant OFF

The discharge of the 2nd coolant is stopped when any of the following conditions is met.
 During an alarm A.
 During power save mode.
 When reset (excluding mode reset).
 During machine lock ON.
 During an APC cycle.
 M00/M01 *1
 M02/M30
*1: It is possible to set whether the 2nd coolant is turned off or not by the M00 and M01
commands by setting the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 1 coolant

20 M00/M01 DOESN'T TURN OFF SPINDLE/COOLANT GROUP
Not checked… The spindle and the coolant group are stopped by the M00 and M01
commands.
Not checked…The spindle and the coolant group are not stopped by the M00 and
M01 commands.
Initial value: 0
17-3. ALL COOLANT OFF button
E61528R0101900050001
If the ALL COOLANT OFF button is pressed during discharge of the 2nd coolant, the discharge of
the 2nd coolant is stopped, and the standby mode is set. At this time, the function key and the flat
panel LED flash.
After that, by pressing the ALL COOLANT OFF button again, the standby mode with the 2nd coolant
is released and the discharge is resumed.
6467-E P-481
17-4. Door interlock

The door interlock for the 2nd coolant can be activated by setting the following parameter.
When the following parameter is "Checked", the discharge of the 2nd coolant is stopped by opening
the operation door. Then when the door is closed, the discharge is resumed.
MC USER PARAMETER No. 1 Coolant

35 COOLANT DOOR IL EFFECTIVE
Not checked…The 2nd coolant is not stopped even when the operation door or the
front door is opened.
Checked…The 2nd coolant is stopped when the operation door or the front door is
opened.
Initial value: 0
17-5. Alarm
17-5-1.Motor overload
If the motor ON confirmation signal remains OFF for 3 seconds or more during discharge of the 2nd
coolant, the following alarm is displayed, stopping the discharge of the 2nd coolant.
"2707 alarm B Coolant motor overload 4"
Code 4: Coolant pump 2 ON confirmation signal OFF more than 3 second while coolant
motor 2 ON.
17-5-2.Low oil level

If the oil level normal signal is OFF at the time when the 2nd coolant discharge command is issued,
the following alarm is displayed.
"3704 alarm C Coolant level low 31"
Code 31 = Coolant tank level low.

Input signal

0131 09 iCOLM2 2nd Coolant motor ON KM
0071 04 ipCOLN2 2nd Coolant PB
0015 01 iFDCL Front door close SQ
Output signal

0584 07 oCOLM2 2nd Coolant motor ON KM
0559 04 opCOL2 2nd coolant PL
6467-E P-482

SUPPORTING FMS
18-1. Overview
This document describes the operations and maintenance of the 2-pallet APC supporting FMS on
MU-6300V/ MU-6300V-L.
The 2-pallet APC supporting the FMS is installed on the rear of the machine; which consists of pallet
station 2 (pallet station 2ST) that loads and unloads pallets with the stacker crane, pallet station 1
(pallet station 1ST) that temporarily holds the pallet loaded from the stacker crane, and carrier ST
(carrier ST) that carries pallets between two stations.
ME61528R0102000010001
6467-E P-483
18-2-1.APC Screen
Procedure :

1528R0102000020001
ME61528R0102000020002

APC INT. : Indicates that the APC is operated by manual interruption.
6467-E P-484





(6) [F8] (CLOSE)

18-2-2.APC Command in Auto/MDI Operation Mode
This command exchanges the pallet on the machine table with the pallet on the pallet station 1.

"2714 ALARM-B APC M command" 1‘
"4773 ALARM-D Work preparation unfinished"
This command completes workpiece preparation by transferring the pallet on the pallet station 2 to
the pallet station 1.

Note: In system operation with the stacker crane, workpiece preparation is complete by
transferring the pallet on the pallet station 2 to the pallet station 1 automatically after the
pallet is loaded to the pallet station 2.
6467-E P-485
18-2-3.APC Command in Manual Operation Mode

ME61528R0102000050001
(1) [F3] 1 CYCLE START

(2) [F4] RETURN CYCLE

(3) [F5] 1 STEP ADVANCE


6467-E P-486
(4) [F6] 1 STEP RETURN

The ATC sequences are returned one step at a time. However, if the mechanical conditions are

6467-E P-487
18-3. APC Sequence

ME61528R0102000060001
6467-E P-488
ME61528R0102000060002
6467-E P-489
ME61528R0102000060003
6467-E P-490

operation.
service center.
NO. to "1".
6467-E P-491

Procedure :
displayed.
ME61528R0102000080001
18-5-1.Machine Diagnosis Message List
Diagnosis
no.
15822 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when machine/
OFF. pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not OFF.
15823 Pallet UNCLAMP LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when machine/
ON. pallet unclamp confirmation signal is not ON.
15824 Pallet seated PS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when machine/
pallet seating confirmation signal is not ON.
15825 Pallet seated PS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when machine/
pallet seating confirmation signal is not OFF.
6467-E P-492
Diagnosis
no.
15831 Pallet EXIST LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when any of the
(1) The pallet presence confirmation signal of pallet
station 2 is not OFF.
(2) The unloading pallet presence memory is not
OFF.
For the details of the unloading pallet presence

memory, refer to "18-7-5. Unloading Pallet Presence
Interlock" in this manual.
[Loading operation]
(1) The pallet presence confirmation signal of pallet
station 1 is not OFF.
(2) The unloading pallet presence memory is not
OFF.
For the details of the unloading pallet presence

memory, refer to "18-7-5. Unloading Pallet Presence
Interlock" in this manual.
15832 Pallet EXIST LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when any of the
The pallet presence confirmation signal of pallet
station 1 is not ON.
[Loading operation]
The pallet presence confirmation signal of pallet
station 2 is not ON.
15834 APC door CLOSE LS is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the APC
ON. shutter close confirmation signal is not ON.
15839 APC arm RISE LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/rising confirmation signal is not ON.
ON. ST/lowering confirmation signal is not ON.
15841 APC arm RISE LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/rising confirmation signal is not OFF.
OFF. ST/lowering confirmation signal is not OFF.
15843 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the pallet
not ON. presence confirmation signal of pallet station 2 is not
ON.
15844 SETUP ST. pallet EXIST LS is This diagnosis message is displayed when the pallet
not OFF. presence confirmation signal of pallet station 2 is not
OFF.
6467-E P-493
Diagnosis
no.
15847 Shifter advance LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/advance confirmation signal is not ON.
15848 Shifter advance LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/advance confirmation signal is not OFF.
15849 Shifter retract LS is not ON. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/retract confirmation signal is not ON.
15850 Shifter retract LS is not OFF. This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
ST/retract confirmation signal is not OFF.
not ON. presence confirmation signal of pallet station 1 is not
ON.
not OFF. presence confirmation signal of pallet station 1 is not
OFF.
16550 Touch sensor retract is not This diagnosis message is displayed when the touch
completed. sensor retract operation is not complete with the touch
sensor specification.
16992 Movement of Circulation ST. is This diagnosis message is displayed when the carrier
not completed. ST positioning is not complete.
16994 Pallet unclamp coupler cutting This diagnosis message is displayed when machine
confirm is not OFF. pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection
confirmation signal is not OFF.
16997 ATC sequence is in machine This diagnosis message is displayed when the ATC
pallet exchange inhibit. sequence no. is not the one to allow pallet exchange.
6467-E P-494
18-6. APC Shutter
18-6-1.Splash Guard Open/Close Command by M Command


18-6-2.Alarm
operations.
"1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation"
Default: 0
Default: 0
“1725 ALARM-A Door open confirmation" OFF’
Default: 0
6467-E P-495
18-6-3.Reciprocal Interlock Coolant Discharge and APC Shutter Open

6467-E P-496
18-7. Interlock


18-7-4.Stacker Crane Interlock

Interlock is activated for APC operations by the "APC operation possible" input (iPWOK) from the
stacker crane.
(1) During APC sequence

When system link ON is activated, the following alarm occurs if "APC operation possible"
(iPWOK) is turned OFF during an APC sequence (cycle).
"1744 ALARM-A Robot/Loader condition" 20’
MC USER PARA: No.21 ROBOT LOADER I/F
3 Axis move: STANDBY POS. I/L is made ineffective
0: The interlock to the machine with the robot escape position is effective.
1: The interlock to the machine with the robot escape position is ineffective.
(2) M60 command

When system link ON is activated, the following alarm occurs if "APC operation possible"
(iPWOK) is turned OFF during an M60 sequence (cycle).
"1744 ALARM-A Robot/Loader condition" 20’
6467-E P-497
(3) APC manual operation

When system link ON is activated and "APC operation possible" (iPWOK) is turned OFF,
1cycle, return cycle and 1 step operation in APC manual operations are banned, turning the
LED to OFF.
However, interlock is ineffective if the following parameter is set to "1".

18-7-5.Unloading Pallet Presence Interlock

After transferring the pallet in the machine to the pallet ST2 by the M60 command, the pallet is
unloaded from the pallet ST2 to the stacker crane side by the stacker crane.
The interlock prohibits the APC from starting a sequence unless the pallet has been unloaded or
loaded by the stacker crane.
When the system link mode is ON, the interlock is activated so that the APC may not be moved from
the start position pallet change command and the workpiece preparation completion command
when the unloaded pallet presence memory is ON. If the APC is halted by the interlock, the following
diagnosis message appears.
"15831 Pallet EXIST LS is not OFF."
When the system link mode is OFF, the interlock is not activated.
The unloaded pallet presence memory is set with completion of an M60 sequence; and the memory
is reset when the pallet is unloaded by the stacker crane.
The unloaded pallet presence memory condition can be set in the machine user parameter to
restore operation.

21 CARRY OUT PALLET EXIST MEMO
0…The pallet not unloaded by the stacker crane does not exist.
1…The pallet not unloaded by the stacker crane exists.
Default: 0
6467-E P-498
18-8. Pallet Seating Retry

ME61528R0102000180001
"2711 ALARM-B Clamp confirmation" 'APC '

ME61528R0102000180002
6467-E P-499
18-9. Pallet Seating Monitoring



Command : SET/ADD
Default : 10
Min. value : 0
Max. value : 100
Unit : 10 ms
6467-E P-500
Procedure :
[APC MAINTENANCE]
ME61528R0102000200001

confirmation PS
APFAD IN iAPFAD APC fork advance confirmation SQ
PFHAD OUT oAPFHAD APC fork high-speed advance YV
PFLAD OUT oAPFLAD APC fork low-speed advance YV
APFRT IN iAPFRT APC fork retract confirmation SQ
6467-E P-501

PFHRT OUT oAPFHRT APC fork high-speed retract YV
PFLRT OUT oAPFLRT APC fork low-speed retract YV
PLE01 IN iPLE01 Pallet station 1 pallet presence confirmation SQ
PLE02 IN iPLE02 Pallet station 2 pallet presence confirmation SQ
APAU IN iAPAU APC fork elevation confirmation SQ
OUT oAPAU APC fork elevation YV
APAD IN iAPAD APC fork lowering confirmation SQ
OUT oAPAD APC fork lowering YV
SSYLK IN iSSYLK System link ON (SC I/F)
SPWOF IN iSPWOF Power shut down command (SC I/F)
PWOK IN iPWOK APC operation possible (SC I/F)
FENCC IN iFENCC Safety fence close confirmation (SC I/F)
SPLTA OUT oSPLTA APC pallet A (SC I/F)
SPLTB OUT oSPLTB APC pallet B (SC I/F)
SYLK OUT oSYLK Stacker crane link ON (SC I/F)
SNRUN OUT oSNRUN During NC operation (SC I/F)
APCMV OUT oAPCMV During APC sequence (SC I/F)
SCMVPM OUT oSCMVPM Crane operation possible (SC I/F)
SNALM OUT oSNALM NC alarm (SC I/F)
PLESTS OUT oPLESTS Pallet ST pallet presence (SC I/F)
PLES OUT oPLES Standby ST pallet presence (SC I/F)
WKPL oWKPL Workpiece preparation completion HL
PLESA pmbuPLESA Unloaded pallet presence memory (UP17-21)
6467-E P-502
18-11.Parameter

The carrier ST has two axes: the rotation axis (PA) and the travel axis (PL).
The zero, P travel limit, and N travel limit are set in the machine axis parameter. The axis name of
rotation axis is "PA"; travel axis "PL".
Procedure :
ME61528R0102000220001
Item Description
6467-E P-503

Procedure :
(OK).
key.
[Page 1]
ME61528R0102000230001
NO Item Description
1 POSITIONING 1 Pallet station 1 position
6467-E P-504
[Page 2]
ME61528R0102000230002
NO Item Description
6467-E P-505
18-12.Special Operations
operations have been prepared for machine maintenance and adjustment, and are not used in
general operations.
Procedure :
CHECK MODE).
enter "44".
handle).
ME61528R0102000250001
6467-E P-506
Procedure :
CHECK MODE).
enter "44".
handle).
ME61528R0102000260001
6467-E P-507

Procedure :
CHECK MODE).
enter "126".
operations.
ME61528R0102000270001
6467-E P-508
18-13.Input/Output Bit
In this section the input/output bit label names regarding the 2-pallet APC supporting the FMS are
described. For the other input/output bits and the usage method of I/O monitor, refer to the
maintenance manual.
[Input]
Label Description
iAPFAD APC fork advance confirmation SQ
iAPFRT APC fork retract confirmation SQ
iAPAU APC fork elevation confirmation SQ
iPLE01 Pallet station 1 pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPLE02 Pallet station 2 pallet presence confirmation SQ
iPUCL Pallet unclamp confirmation PS
iPSIT Pallet seating detection confirmation PS
iPLCUC Pallet unclamp hydraulic coupler disconnection confirmation PS
[Output]
Label Description
oAPFHAD APC fork high-speed advance YV
oAPFLAD APC fork low-speed advance YV
oAPFHRT APC fork high-speed retract YV
oAPFLRT APC fork low-speed retract YV
oAPAU APC fork elevation YV
6467-E P-509
18-14.Logic Table

table below.
Diagnosis
Code Description
message no.
0104 Pallet unclamp LS is not OFF. 15822
0108 Pallet unclamp LS is not ON. 15823
0110 Pallet seating PS is not ON. 15824
0120 Pallet seating PS is not OFF. 15825
0301 Pallet ST2 pallet presence LS is not ON. 15843
0302 Pallet ST2 pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15844
0304 Pallet ST1 pallet presence LS is not ON. 15862
0308 Pallet ST1 pallet presence LS is not OFF. 15863
0401 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to pallet ST2. 16992
0402 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to pallet ST2. 16992
0404 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to pallet ST1. 16992
0408 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to pallet ST1. 16992
0901 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to initial position. 16992
0902 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to initial position. 16992
0910 Carrier ST PA-axis has not moved to pallet clamp position. 16992
0920 Carrier ST PL-axis has not moved to pallet clamp position. 16992
6467-E P-510
ME61528R0102000300001
6467-E P-511
ME61528R0102000310001
6467-E P-512
ME61528R0102000320001
6467-E P-513
ME61528R0102000330001
6467-E P-514
ME61528R0102000340001
6467-E P-515
ME61528R0102000350001
6467-E P-516
ME61528R0102000360001
6467-E P-517
ME61528R0102000370001
6467-E P-518
ME61528R0102000380001
6467-E P-519
ME61528R0102000390001
6467-E P-520
SECTION 19 MU-6300V/6300V-L STACKER CRANE

INTERFACE
19-1. Link mode

When the “system link ON” input is ON, the “stacker crane link ON” output is turned to ON in the
automatic operation mode. When the “stacker crane link ON” output is ON, the mode is set to “link
mode”.
19-2. Description of Input/Output Signals

The input/output signal tables are given below. In the tables, the abbreviated format is used as
shown below.
“Stacker Crane” → “SC”
19-2-1.Input/Output Signal Table
Input signal from stacker crane to NC
Signal Name Signal Description Signal Level

APC sequence If this signal is turned OFF during APC sequence when
enabled the "system link ON" input is ON, the NC immediately Start of
iPWOK stops the APC sequence. completing
In addition, if this signal is turned ON after the SC has Workpiece
transferred the pallet, the NC completes preparation of preparation
the workpiece. APC
sequence
The SC turns ON this signal when all of the following enabled
conditions are met. 㨨φ ψ㨨
(1) The SC is at the retract position for the
corresponding machine.
ME61528R0102100030001
(2) The SC is not in pallet unloading/loading operation
with the corresponding machine.
Automatic power When this signal is ON in "link mode", the power is
shutdown automatically shut down when all of the conditions to be
iSPWOF described later are met (AND).
For the details, refer to item "19-3. Automatic power
shutdown function".
Automatic power
shutdown
ME61528R0102100030002
Safety fence This signal is normally ON; and if this signal is turned
close OFF the NC executes the following operation.
confirmation
(1) The APC sequence is stopped immediately.
iFENCC
APC sequence
stop
ME61528R0102100030003
6467-E P-521
Output signal from NC to stacker crane

SC link ON This signal is turned ON with “system link ON” input ON
oSYLK and in the automatic operation mode.
φψ
System link ON
+
automatic
operation mode
ME61528R0102100040001
NC alarm This signal is normally ON; and the signal is turned

oSNALM OFF if an NC alarm A, B, or C occurs.
The signal is turned OFF by reset (alarm release).
However, if MC USER PARA: (ROBOT LOADER I/F) Alarm release

"No.19 NC alarm signal is A contact" is set to "1", the
signal becomes OFF normally; and becomes ON if an Machine user
NC alarm A, B, or C occurs. parameter NO.21,
19 is set to "1".
Alarm release
ME61528R0102100040002
During NC This signal is ON while the NC is running.

running
oSNRUN
φ ψ
During NC running
ME61528R0102100040003
During APC This signal is ON during an APC sequence.

sequence In addition, this signal is ON if there is no pallet at
oAPCMV station ST2 even if the APC is stopped in middle of
sequence. APC sequence
This signal is turned ON when any of the following
nos. 2 to 17, 45 to
conditions later are met (OR).
58 or during APC
 During an APC cycle cycle
 APC sequence nos. 2 to 17, 45 to 58 ME61528R0102100040004
APC pallet A This signal is constantly ON.

oSPLTA
APC pallet B This signal is constantly OFF.
oSPLTB
6467-E P-522

Standby ST pallet This signal is turned ON when the pallet exist
exist confirmation LS with station ST2 is ON.
oPLES
φψ
Station ST2 pallet
exist
ME61528R0102100040005
Station ST pallet This signal is turned ON when the pallet exist

exist confirmation LS with station ST1 is ON.
oPLESTS
φψ
Station ST1 pallet
exist
ME61528R0102100040006
Crane operation This signal is turned ON this signal when all of the
enabled following conditions are met (AND). The signal is
oSCMVPM turned OFF if even one of the following conditions is
not met.
φψ
a. The APC is at the start position.
Conditions stated
b. Not during an APC cycle in the left are met.
c. "Link mode" ME61528R0102100040007
d. "Safety fence close confirmation" ON

e. No alarms A, B, C occurs.
f. The station ST1 pallet exist confirmation LS is
OFF.
g. Workpiece preparation has not been complete.
Note: Condition e) is applied only at the rising of the

crane operation enabled output.
6467-E P-523
19-2-2.Workpiece Preparation Completion

When the stacker crane interface function is provided, the workpiece preparation completion button
is not provided. The workpiece preparation completion state is established with the following
conditions met.
ON condition
(1) Pallet loading completion by stacker crane

By turning "APC sequence enabled (iPWOK)" signal to ON (from OFF), workpiece preparation
completion operation - pallet at station 2 is transferred to station 1 - is performed, which
completes "workpiece preparation" operation.
(2) Workpiece preparation completion set command

When the M command (M334) is specified by manual operation to complete "workpiece
preparation" operation
Axis travel
M code Description
Simul/after
M334 Workpiece preparation completion set command Simultaneous
Memory of workpiece preparation completion state
The workpiece preparation completion state at the power ON follows the state of the last time the
power is turned OFF.
6467-E P-524
19-3. Automatic power shutdown function
19-3-1.Automatic Power Shutdown Effective Condition

When any of the following situations applies, the state is called "Automatic power shutdown ON
state".
In "link mode"
The period when "auto power shutdown command" is input from the stacker crane is referred to as
"auto power shutdown ON state".
Note: In "link mode", the state is not affected by the automatic power shutoff ON/OFF SW.
Not in "link mode"
The period when the automatic power shutdown ON/OFF SW is ON is referred to as "auto power
shutdown ON state".
19-3-2.Execution of Automatic Power Shutdown

In "auto power shutdown ON state", when both "automatic operation mode" and "single block OFF"
are satisfied, and when the time set in MC USER PARA: (POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) "No.6
Power shutdown time" has elapsed with any of the following conditions met, the automatic power
shutdown is executed.
(1) Schedule end comes during a schedule program.
(2) After the program end has been executed if no schedule program is selected.
(3) An alarm A, B, or C occurs.

However, this is effective when MC USER PARA: (POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN) "No.4 Alarm is
added as a requirement for Shutdown" is set to "1".
a. When an alarm A (excluding emergency stop) occurs, and if the automatic power shutdown
timer is set to 30 seconds or shorter, the automatic power shutdown is executed after 30
seconds after the alarm A
b. When an alarm B occurs, the spindle is stopped after 10 seconds after calculation finish is
confirmed, and the automatic power shutdown is executed after the automatic power
shutdown timer has elapsed.
However, if the automatic power shutdown timer is set to 30 seconds or shorter, the
automatic power shutdown is executed after 30 seconds after the spindle is stopped.
c. When an alarm C occurs, and when a schedule program is selected, the automatic power
shutdown is executed after the NC running signal is OFF and the automatic power
shutdown timer has elapsed.
If no schedule program is selected, the function above does not apply.
When the following signal is ON, time counting for the automatic power shutdown is not
started if an alarm A, B, or C occurs.
 "Crane operation enabled" signal (oSCMVPM)

6467-E P-525
However, if the time set in MC USER PARA: (ROBOT LOADER I/F) "No.12 Automatic power
shutdown waiting timer" has elapsed, time counting for the automatic power shutdown is started by
cancelling automatic power shutdown disabled condition at alarm even if the "crane operation
enabled signal (oSCMVPM)" is ON.
19-3-3.Other Conditions
The automatic power shutdown is not executed "during a battery alarm" and "during file operation".
With a battery alarm, the following alarm is lit up to cancel the automatic power shutdown.
"3709 Alarm-C Auto power shut-off impossible 1"
1 = The automatic power shutdown is attempted with the memory disk (MD) battery life.
During file operation, the following alarm is lit up, and when file operation is finished, the alarm is
cancelled to execute the automatic power shutdown.
"4706 Alarm-D Auto power shut-off impossible 2"
2 = The automatic power shutdown is attempted during machining program file operation.
19-3-4.Parameter
MC USER PARA: POWER SAVE/SHUTDOWN

4 Alarm is added as a requirement for Shutdown
0: Alarm is not added.
1: Alarm is added.
Default: 0
6 Power shutdown time
Command: SET / ADD
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 3600
Unit: sec
MC USER PARA: ROBOT LOADER I/F

12 Automatic power shutdown waiting timer
Command: SET / ADD
Default: 0
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 7200
Unit: sec
6467-E P-526

Input
Label Item
iFENCC Safety fence close confirmation (SC I/F)
iPWOK APC sequence enabled (SC I/F)
iSPWOF Automatic power shutdown (SC I/F)
iSSYLK system link ON (SC I/F)
Output
Label Item
oSYLK Stacker crane link ON (SC I/F)
oSNRUN During NC running (SC I/F)
oSNALM NC alarm/ (SC I/F)
oAPCMV During APC sequence (SC I/F)
oSPLTA APC pallet A (SC I/F)
oSPLTB APC pallet B (SC I/F)
oPLES Standby ST pallet exist (SC I/F)
oPLESTS Station ST pallet exist (SC I/F)
oSCMVPM Crane operation enabled (SC I/F)
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication No. Date Edition
6467-E April 2015 1st
Original Instruction Manual
This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual,
please contact your OKUMA representative.

Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC SYSTEM

1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(2) Installation Environment

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

 MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unit

 Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

 Is the external air inlet blocked?

8. Symbols Used in This Manual

(1) NC operation panels

 Color CRT operation panels

 Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

 Thin color operation panels (vertical)

(2) Machining management functions

a. Reduction of setup time

b. Production Status Monitor

c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

(3) Help functions

SECTION 1 ROBOT/LOADER INTERFACE TYPES

SECTION 2 CHUCK (JIG) CONTROL

SECTION 3 WORK SIT CONFIRMATION

SECTION 4 OPERATION DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SPEC

SECTION 5 AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SHUTTER ON MACHINE SIDE

SECTION 6 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC

SECTION 7 BLUEBE ECOBOOSTER EP SERIES

SECTION 8 MATRIX MAGAZINE

SECTION 9 ECOSAVER MADE BY KURODA PRECISION

SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L

SECTION 11 AIR TURBINE SPINDLE FUNCTION

SECTION 12 MATRIX MAGAZINE TOOL-ID FUNCTION

SECTION 13 LHL GREASE LUBRICATION SYSTEM MADE BY LUBE

SECTION 14 MU-5000V/5000V-L 2-PALLET APC

SECTION 15 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT SPECIFICATION WITH KOSELL

SECTION 16 2ND AIR BLOW

SECTION 17 2ND COOLANT

SECTION 18 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC SUPPORTING FMS

SECTION 19 MU-6300V/6300V-L STACKER CRANE INTERFACE

This instruction manual consists of several specifications for peripheral devices

SECTION 2 CHUCK (JIG) CONTROL ....................................................................36

2-2-8. Special conditions ............................................................................................. 52

2-7-6. Status indicator.................................................................................................. 84

SECTION 3 WORK SIT CONFIRMATION ............................................................113

3-3-2. Sit condition monitoring mode ON................................................................... 124

SECTION 4 OPERATION DOOR AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SPEC............................136

SECTION 5 AUTO OPEN/CLOSE SHUTTER ON MACHINE SIDE.....................147

5-3. Precautions.................................................................................................................... 150

SECTION 6 MU-6300V/6300V-L 2-PALLET APC .................................................151

6-16-6. APC Output Logic 1/4...................................................................................... 189

SECTION 7 BLUEBE ECOBOOSTER EP SERIES ..............................................197

SECTION 8 MATRIX MAGAZINE .........................................................................201

8-7. Maintenance Function ................................................................................................... 241

SECTION 9 ECOSAVER MADE BY KURODA PRECISION ................................273

SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MU-6300V/MU-6300V-L

SECTION 11 AIR TURBINE SPINDLE FUNCTION................................................333

SECTION 12 MATRIX MAGAZINE TOOL-ID FUNCTION ......................................337

12-3-2. Registering Tool Presence .............................................................................. 349

12-10-16. Manual Interlock 1/8 ........................................................................................ 407